Zoom out
Zoom in
Vorherige Seite
1/404
Nächste Seite
MARINE RADAR
EQUIPMENT
INSTRUCTION
MANUAL
1

Brauchen Sie Hilfe? Stellen Sie Ihre Frage.

Forenregeln

Inhalt der Seiten


  • Page 1

    MARINE RADAR
    EQUIPMENT

    INSTRUCTION
    MANUAL



  • Page 2



  • Page 3

    9900
    LCD



  • Page 4



  • Page 5

    1087/1089
    NKE-1079/1075A
    NKE-1079/1075A

    NKE-1079/1075A



  • Page 6



  • Page 7



  • Page 8

    Then, wipe his mouth so that foaming mucus does not accumulate inside.



  • Page 9



  • Page 10



  • Page 11

    Transmitter-receiver Unit Type NTG-3037/3037A



  • Page 12

    Scanner Unit Type NKE-1075/1075A (12 Feet)



  • Page 13



  • Page 14



  • Page 15

    Display Unit Type NCD-4263(Self-standing Type)

    xiii



  • Page 16

    Monitor Unit Type NWZ-158T (Desktop Type) (Option)

    Control Unit Type NDC-1279T (Desktop Type) (Optyon)

    Keyboard Unit Type NCE-7721T (Desktop Type) (Option)

    Display Unit Type NCD-4263T (Desktop Type) (Option)



  • Page 17

    CONTENTS
    PREFACE ....................................................................................... i
    Before Operation .......................................................................... ii
    Cautions to be Used during Operation ................................... iii
    PRECAUTIONS BEFORE OPERATION

    Cautions for high voltage .................................................................v
    What to do in case of electric shock ..............................................v

    FIRST-AID TREATMENTS

    First-aid treatments ..........................................................................vi
    When pulse is beating but breathing has stopped ....................vii
    When both pulse and breathing have stopped .........................viii

    EQUIPMENT APPEARANCE ..................................................... ix
    GLOSSARY ................................................................................ xxi

    1. GENERAL AND EQUIPMENT COMPOSITION

    1.1 FUNCTIONS ....................................................................................... 1-1
    1.2 FEATURES ......................................................................................... 1-3
    1.3 CONFIGURATION ............................................................................. 1-5
    1.4 EXTERIOR DRAWING ...................................................................... 1-7
    1.5 GENERAL SYSTEM DIAGRAM ....................................................1-20
    1.6 COLLISION AVOIDANCE ...............................................................1-27

    2. NAME AND FUNCTION OF CONTROL PANEL
    SWITCHES AND FUNCTION OF
    SOFTWARE BUTTONS

    2.1 NAME AND FUNCTION OF CONTROL PANEL SWITCHES ....... 2-1
    2.2 FUNCTION OF SOFTWARE BUTTONS ......................................... 2-7

    - xv -



  • Page 18

    3. BASIC OPERATION

    3.1 FLOW OF OPERATION .................................................................... 3-1
    Power ON and Start the System .................................................. 3-2
    Observe and Adjust Video ........................................................... 3-4
    Tuning Operations ......................................................................... 3-6
    Acquire and Measurement Data .................................................. 3-7
    End the Operation and Stop the System ................................... 3-7
    3.2 MENU COPOSITION ......................................................................... 3-8
    3.3 PREPARATION ................................................................................ 3-11
    Tuning[TUNE] ............................................................................... 3-11
    Sensitivity Control [GAIN] .......................................................... 3-11
    Display Brilliance Control ...........................................................3-12
    Contrast Control [BRILL VIDEO] ...............................................3-12
    Sea Clutter Suppression [RAIN] ................................................3-13
    Brilliance Control .........................................................................3-13
    Day/Night Mode Selection [DAY/NIGHT] ..................................3-21
    Color Setting [COLOR] ...............................................................3-22
    3.4 BASIC OPERATIONS .....................................................................3-34
    Move Cross Cursor Mark [+] by Trackball ...............................3-34
    Methods for Setting Menu Items with the Trackball ..............3-35
    Use EBLs(Electronic Bearing Lines) ........................................3-41
    Set Floating EBL ..........................................................................3-43
    Set Floating EBL ..........................................................................3-45
    Select Range [RANGE] ...............................................................3-47
    Set Maximum Range ...................................................................3-47
    Select Pulse Length ....................................................................3-48
    Select Bearing Display Mode [AZI MODE] ..............................3-49
    Cancel Ship's Heading Line [HL OFF] ......................................3-49
    Cancel All Display Items Except HL and Cross Cursor
    Mark [+] [DATA OFF] ....................................................................3-49
    Display PI (Parallel Index Lines) [PI] .........................................3-50
    Move Own Ship's Display Position [OFF CENTER] ...............3-53
    Display Other Ship's Trails [TRAILS] ........................................3-54
    Display Own Ship's Tracks and Own Symbols[OWN SHIP] ..3-55
    Marking [MARK] ...........................................................................3-58
    Display Range Rings [RANGE RINGS] ....................................3-59
    Display Variable Range Markers [VRM1/VRM2] .....................3-59
    Set Guard Zone [GUARD ZONE] ...............................................3-61
    Reset Alarm Buzzer [ALARM ACK] ..........................................3-63
    Set Alarm Sound Level ...............................................................3-63
    - xvi -



  • Page 19

    Check Operation Status [TEST] ................................................3-64
    FUNCTION ....................................................................................3-73
    Expand Targets ............................................................................3-74
    Display Processed Videos .........................................................3-75
    Reduce Radar Interference ........................................................3-76
    Personal Information ..................................................................3-77
    Display of Navigational Information .........................................3-80
    Function of USER Switch / OPTION Switch ............................3-96
    Operation of Performance Monitor ...........................................3-97
    EBL Maneuvering ......................................................................3-103

    4. MEASUREMENT OF RANGE AND BEARING

    Measurement by Trackball ........................................................... 4-1
    Measurement by Range Rings .................................................... 4-2
    Measurement by EBLs and VRMs .............................................. 4-2
    Measurement by between Two Optional Points ....................... 4-4

    5. OPERATION OF ARPA AND AIS

    Using ARPA .............................................................................................. 5-1
    5.1 INITIAL SETTING ............................................................................... 5-2
    Setting Collision Decision Criteria : SAFE LIMIT ..................... 5-2
    Automatic Setting Mode (System Start) .................................... 5-4
    Setting Range Scale : RANGE SCALE ....................................... 5-4
    Setting Own Ship's Speed ............................................................ 5-5
    5.2 DISPLAY MODE SETTING ............................................................... 5-7
    Setting Motion Display Mode [TM/RM] ...................................... 5-7
    Setting Bearing Display Mode [AZI MODE] ............................... 5-7
    5.3 TARGET ID No. DISPLAY ................................................................. 5-8
    5.4 TARGET ACQUISITION .................................................................... 5-9
    Automatic Acquisition [AUTO] .................................................. 5-11
    Manual Acquisition [MANUAL] .................................................5-12
    Use of Automatic and Manual
    Acquisition Modes [ACQ AUTO] [ACQ MANUAL] ............... 5-13
    5.5 ARPA DATA DISPLAY .....................................................................5-13
    Display of Vectors ........................................................................5-13
    Display of Past Positions [PAST POSN] ..................................5-16
    5.6 DATA DISPLAY ................................................................................5-18
    Types of Data Display .................................................................5-18
    Method of Displaying Target Data [TGT DATA] ......................5-19

    - xvii -



  • Page 20

    Cancellation of Displaying Target Data [TGT DATA] .............5-19
    5.7 ALARM DISPLAY .............................................................................5-20
    Dangerous Target Alarm: CPA/TCPA .......................................5-20
    Guard Zone Alarm [GUARD ZONE] ..........................................5-21
    Lost Target Alarm [LOST TARGET] ..........................................5-22
    System Function Alarm [ARPA(DATA)] ...................................5-23
    Gyro Set Alarm [SET GYRO] .....................................................5-23
    5.8 TRIAL MANEUVERING ..................................................................5-24
    Trial Maneuvering in the True Vector Mode .............................5-24
    Trial Maneuvering in the Relative Vector Mode ......................5-25
    Using the TRIAL Function ..........................................................5-26
    5.9 DELETING UNWANTED TARGETS ..............................................5-27
    Deleting Targets ...........................................................................5-27
    5.10 ARPA SETTING .............................................................................5-29
    Simulation .....................................................................................5-30
    Gate Size .......................................................................................5-32
    Test Video ......................................................................................5-34

    6. TRUE AND FALSE ECHOES ON DISPLAY

    Radar Wave with the Horizon ...................................................... 6-1
    Strength of Reflection from the Target ....................................... 6-3
    Sea Clutters .................................................................................... 6-3
    False Echoes .................................................................................. 6-3
    Display of Radar Transponder (SART) ...................................... 6-6

    7. MAINTENANCE

    7.1 ROUTINE MAINTENANCE ............................................................... 7-1
    7.2 MAINTENANCE ON EACH UNIT .................................................... 7-2
    Scanner NKE-1079/10750/1089/1087 .......................................... 7-2
    Transmitter-receiver Unit NTG-3037/3037A/3028 ..................... 7-4
    Display Unit NCD-4263 ................................................................. 7-5
    Coaxial Cable JMA-9933-SA ........................................................ 7-5
    Wave Guide JMA-9923-7XA/9XA ................................................ 7-6

    8. COUNTERMEASURES FOR
    TORUBLE AND ADJUSTMENT

    8.1 FUNCTION CHECK ........................................................................... 8-1
    Function Check on Test Menu ..................................................... 8-2
    List of Alarms and other Indications ........................................8-10
    - xviii -



  • Page 21

    8.2 TROUBLESHOOTING ....................................................................8-13
    8.3 COUNTERMEASURES TO TROUBLE ........................................8-14
    8.4 REPLACEMNT OF MAJOR PARTS ..............................................8-20
    Replacement of Magnetron (V1/V201) .....................................8-21
    Replacement to TRHPL
    (A202/A203)(JMA-9933-SA/9932-SA) .......................................8-21
    Replacement of Diode Limiter(A203)
    (JMA-9923-7XA/9XA, JMA-9922-6XA/9XA)................................8-20
    Replacement of PIN Attenuator(A302)
    (JMA-9923-7XA/9XA, JMA-9922-6XA/9XA)...............................8-21
    Replacement of the Liquid-Crystal Monitor ............................8-22
    8.5 ADJUSTMENT .................................................................................8-23
    Tuning Adjustment ......................................................................8-24
    Bearing Adjustment ....................................................................8-25
    Range Adjustment .......................................................................8-26
    Antenna Height Adjustment ......................................................8-27
    Vector Constant ...........................................................................8-28
    Quantization Level .......................................................................8-29
    Adjustment of NSK Unit to Gyro Compass and Log .............8-30
    Main Bang Suppression Adjustment .......................................8-32
    8.6 SETTING ...........................................................................................8-34
    True Bearing Setting ...................................................................8-34
    Ship Speed Setting ......................................................................8-35
    Navigation Equipment Setting ..................................................8-37
    Current Correction(SET/DRIFT) Setting ...................................8-38
    Time/Day Display Setting ...........................................................8-40
    Adjustment of Performance Monitor(NJU-63/64) ...................8-42
    Adjustment of Inter switch...........................................................8-44

    9. AFTER-SALES SERVICE

    When you Request for Repair ..................................................... 9-1
    Recommended Maintenance ....................................................... 9-1
    Radar Failure Check List .............................................................. 9-2

    - xix -



  • Page 22

    10. DISPOSAL

    10.1 DISPOSAL OF THE UNIT .............................................................10-1
    10.2 DISPOSAL OF USED BATTERIES .............................................10-1
    10.3 DISPOSAL OF USED MAGNETRON .........................................10-1

    11. SPECIFICATION

    11.1 JMA-9933-SA TYPE RADAR ....................................................... 11-1
    11.2 JMA-9932-SA TYPE RADAR ....................................................... 11-2
    11.3 JMA-9923-7XA/9XA TYPE RADAR ............................................. 11-3
    11.4 JMA-9922-6XA/9XA TYPE RADAR ............................................. 11-4
    11.5 SCANNER(NKE-1079) .................................................................. 11-5
    11.6 SCANNER(NKE-1075) .................................................................. 11-6
    11.7 SCANNER(NKE-1089-7/9............................................................... 11-7
    11.8 SCANNER(NKE-1087-6/9) ............................................................ 11-8
    11.9 TRANSMITTER-RECEIVER UNIT(NTG-3037) ........................... 11-9
    11.10 TRANSMITTER-RECEIVER UNIT(NTH-3028) ....................... 11-10
    11.11 DISPLAY UNIT(NCD-4263) ....................................................... 11-11
    11.12 ARPA ........................................................................................... 11-12
    11.13 PERFORMANCE MONITOR(NJU-63) .................................... 11-13
    11.10 PERFORMANCE MONITOR(NJU-64) .................................... 11-13

    APPENDIX

    JMA-9900 ARPA Series Radar System Composition ...................... A-1
    JMA-9900 ARPA Series Radar System Circuit Block ....................... A-2
    Fig.101 Block Diagram of Radar, Type JMA-9933-SA and JMA-9923-7XA/9XA
    Fig.102 Block Diagram of Radar, Type JMA-9932-SA and JMA-9922-6XA/9XA
    Fig.103 Terminal Board Connection Diagram of Radar, Type JMA-9933-SA
    (SELF STANDING TYPE)
    Fig.104 Terminal Board Connection Diagram of Radar, Type JMA-9933-SA
    (DESK TOP TYPE)
    Fig.105 Terminal Board Connection Diagram of Radar, Type JMA-9932-SA
    (SELF STANDING TYPE )
    Fig.106 Terminal Board Connection Diagram of Radar, Type JMA-9932-SA
    (DESK TOP TYPE )
    Fig.107 Terminal Board Connection Diagram of Radar, Type JMA-9923-7XA/9XA
    (SELF STANDING TYPE AC220V 3φ)
    Fig.108 Terminal Board Connection Diagram of Radar, Type JMA-9923-7XA/9XA
    (SELF STANDING TYPE AC220V 1φ AC100V 1φ)
    Fig.109 Terminal Board Connection Diagram of Radar, Type JMA-9923-7XA/9XA
    (DESK TOP TYPE AC220V 3φ)
    Fig.110 Terminal Board Connection Diagram of Radar, Type JMA-9923-7XA/9XA
    (DESK TOP TYPE AC220V 1φ AC100V 1φ)

    - xx -



  • Page 23

    Fig.111 Terminal Board Connection Diagram of Radar, Type JMA-9922-6XA/9XA
    (SELF STANDING TYPE AC220V 3φ)
    Fig.112 Terminal Board Connection Diagram of Radar, Type JMA-9922-6XA/9XA
    (SELF STANDING TYPE AC220V 1φ AC100V 1φ)
    Fig.113 Terminal Board Connection Diagram of Radar, Type JMA-9922-6XA/9XA
    (DESK TOP TYPE AC220V 3φ)
    Fig.114 Terminal Board Connection Diagram of Radar, Type JMA-9922-6XA/9XA
    (DESK TOP TYPE AC220V 1φ AC100V 1φ)
    Fig.115 Primary Power Supply lock Diagram of Radar, Type JMA-9933-SA
    Fig.116 Primary Power Supply lock Diagram of Radar, Type JMA-9932-SA
    Fig.117 Primary Power Supply lock Diagram of Radar, Type JMA-9923-7XA/9XA
    Fig.118 Primary Power Supply lock Diagram of Radar, Type JMA-9922-6XA/9XA
    Fig.119 Internal Connection Diagram of Scanner Unit, Type NKE-1079
    Fig.120 Internal Connection Diagram of Scanner Unit, Type NKE-1079-D
    Fig.121 Internal Connection Diagram of Scanner Unit,
    Type NKE-1075/1075A (100V AC,1-phase)
    Fig.122 Internal Connection Diagram of Scanner Unit,
    Type NKE-1075/1075A (230V AC,3-phase)
    Fig.123 Internal Connection Diagram of Scanner Unit,
    Type NKE-1075/1075A (230V AC,1-phase)
    Fig.124 Internal Connection Diagram of Scanner Unit, Type NKE-1089-7/9 (1-phase)
    Fig.125 Internal Connection Diagram of Scanner Unit, Type NKE-1089-7/9 (3-phase)
    Fig.126 Internal Connection Diagram of Scanner Unit, Type NKE-1087-6/9 (1-phase)
    Fig.127 Internal Connection Diagram of Scanner Unit, Type NKE-1087-6/9 (3-phase)
    Fig.128 Internal Connection Diagram of Transmitter-receiver Unit, Type NTG-3037/3037A
    Fig.129 Internal Connection Diagram of Transmitter-receiver Unit, Type NTG-3028
    Fig.130 Internal Connection Diagram of Display Unit, Type NCD-4263
    Fig.131 Internal Connection Diagram of CRT Monitor of Display Unit, Type NCD-4263
    Fig.132 Internal Connection Diagram of Power Supply of Display Unit, Type NCD-4263
    Fig.133 List of NSK and LOG Select Switches of Display Unit, Type NCD-4263
    Fig.134 Setting Table of Speed LOG Select Switches of Display Unit, Type NCD-4263
    Fig.135 Setting Table of Gyro Compass and Gyro Select Switches of
    Display Unit, Type NCD-4263
    Fig.136 Terminal Board Connection Diagram of 2-unit Interswitchesystem, Type NQE-3141N
    Fig.137 Terminal Board Connection Diagram of 3-unit Interswitches
    System, Type NQE-3141N
    Fig.138 Internal Connection Diagram of Interswitch, Type NQE-3141N

    - xxi -



  • Page 24

    Rejection

    Use as a temporary marker



  • Page 25



  • Page 26



  • Page 27



  • Page 28



  • Page 29



  • Page 30

    23.1 inch color raster-scan LCD display unit

    9900

    In addition, a radar switching function ( interswitch ) can be added to switch between two, four or eight
    eight radar units. However, in order to this function for four or eight units, an external switching box is
    necessary.
    9900



  • Page 31

    LCD



  • Page 32

    the soft button on a screen and screen menu.



  • Page 33

    9900



  • Page 34

    9933
    9932
    9923

    9923
    9922

    9922

    9933

    9932

    9923

    1079

    NTG-3037
    NTG-3037A

    NKE-1075 (*)

    NKE-1075A (*)
    1089-7

    230

    3028
    9923

    1089-9

    9922

    1087-6

    9922

    1087-9
    9933

    230

    4263

    100/230V



  • Page 35

    230

    230



  • Page 36

    1079
    1075/1075A

    1089-7
    1089-9

    1087-6
    1087-9
    3037/3037A
    3028
    4263

    158T

    1279T

    7721T



  • Page 37

    Fig.1.1 EXTERIOR DRAWING OF
    SCANNER UNIT,TYPE NKE-1079
    18



  • Page 38

    Fig.1.2 EXTERIOR DRAWING OF
    SCANNER UNIT,TYPE NKE-1075
    19



  • Page 39

    Fig.1.3 EXTERIOR DRAWING OF
    SCANNER UNIT,TYPE NKE-1089-7
    110



  • Page 40

    111

    Fig.1.4 EXTERIOR DRAWING OF
    SCANNER UNIT,TYPE NKE-1089-9



  • Page 41

    112

    Fig.1.5 EXTERIOR DRAWING OF
    SCANNER UNIT,TYPE NKE-1087-6



  • Page 42

    1 13

    Fig.1.6 EXTERIOR DRAWING OF
    SCANNER UNIT,TYPE NKE-1087-9
    113



  • Page 43

    Fig.1.7 EXTERIOR DRAWING OF
    TRANSMITTER-RECEIVER UNIT,TYPE NTG-3037/3037A
    114



  • Page 44

    Fig.1.8 EXTERIOR DRAWING OF
    TRANSMITTER-RECEIVER UNIT,TYPE NTG-3028
    115



  • Page 45

    Fig.1.9 EXTERIOR DRAWING OF DISPLAY UNIT,
    TYPE NCD-4263(SELF-STANDING TYPE)
    116



  • Page 46

    Fig.1.10 EXTERIOR DRAWING OF MONITOR UNIT,
    TYPE NWZ-158 (DESKTOP TYPE)(OPTION)
    1 17



  • Page 47

    Fig.1.11 EXTERIOR DRAWING OF CONTROL UNIT,
    TYPE NDC-1279 (DESKTOP TYPE)(OPTION)
    118



  • Page 48

    Fig.1.12 EXTERIOR DRAWING OF KEYBOARD UNIT,
    TYPE NCE-7721 (DESKTOP TYPE)(OPTION)

    1 19



  • Page 49

    Fig.1.13 GENERAL SYSTEM DIAGRAM OF RADAR,TYPE JMA-9933-SA
    Fig.1.14 GENERAL SYSTEM DIAGRAM OF RADAR,TYPE JMA-9932-SA

    Fig.1.15 GENERAL SYSTEM DIAGRAM OF RADAR,TYPE JMA-9923-7XA
    Fig.1.16 GENERAL SYSTEM DIAGRAM OF RADAR,TYPE JMA-9923-9XA

    Fig.1.17 GENERAL SYSTEM DIAGRAM OF RADAR,TYPE JMA-9922-6XA
    Fig.1.18 GENERAL SYSTEM DIAGRAM OF RADAR,TYPE JMA-9922-9XA



  • Page 50

    3038

    4263

    AC100/230V
    50/60Hz, 1
    AC230V
    50/60Hz, 3
    1kVA

    Note: Eliminating the interference on frequencies used for marine communications and
    navigation due to operation of the radar.
    All cables of the radar are to be run away from the cables of radio equipment.
    (Ex. Radiotelephone. Communications receiver and direction finder. etc)
    Especially inter-wiring cables between scanner unit and display unit of the radar
    should not run parallel with the cables of radio equipment.
    Fig.1.13 GENERAL SYSTEM DIAGRAM OF
    RADAR, TYPE JMA-9933-SA
    9933



  • Page 51

    4263

    AC100/230V
    50/60Hz, 1
    AC230V
    50/60Hz, 3
    1kVA

    Note: Eliminating the interference on frequencies used for marine communications and
    navigation due to operation of the radar.
    All cables of the radar are to be run away from the cables of radio equipment.
    (Ex. Radiotelephone. Communications receiver and direction finder. etc)
    Especially inter-wiring cables between scanner unit and display unit of the radar
    should not run parallel with the cables of radio equipment.
    Fig.1.14 GENERAL SYSTEM DIAGRAM OF
    RADAR, TYPE JMA-9932-SA
    9932



  • Page 52

    -1089-7

    3028

    4263

    AC100/230V
    50/60Hz, 1
    AC230V
    50/60Hz, 3
    800VA

    Note: Eliminating the interference on frequencies used for marine communications and
    navigation due to operation of the radar.
    All cables of the radar are to be run away from the cables of radio equipment.
    (Ex. Radiotelephone. Communications receiver and direction finder. etc)
    Especially inter-wiring cables between scanner unit and display unit of the radar
    should not run parallel with the cables of radio equipment.

    Fig.1.15 GENERAL SYSTEM DIAGRAM OF
    RADAR, TYPE JMA-9923-7XA
    9923



  • Page 53

    -1089-9

    3028

    4263

    AC100/230V
    50/60Hz, 1
    AC230V
    50/60Hz, 3
    800VA

    Note: Eliminating the interference on frequencies used for marine communications and
    navigation due to operation of the radar.
    All cables of the radar are to be run away from the cables of radio equipment.
    (Ex. Radiotelephone. Communications receiver and direction finder. etc)
    Especially inter-wiring cables between scanner unit and display unit of the radar
    should not run parallel with the cables of radio equipment.

    Fig.1.16 GENERAL SYSTEM DIAGRAM OF
    RADAR, TYPE JMA-9923-9XA
    9923



  • Page 54

    -1087-6

    4263

    AC100/230V
    50/60Hz, 1
    AC230V
    50/60Hz, 3
    800VA

    Note: Eliminating the interference on frequencies used for marine communications and
    navigation due to operation of the radar.
    All cables of the radar are to be run away from the cables of radio equipment.
    (Ex. Radiotelephone. Communications receiver and direction finder. etc)
    Especially inter-wiring cables between scanner unit and display unit of the radar
    should not run parallel with the cables of radio equipment.
    Fig.1.17 GENERAL SYSTEM DIAGRAM OF
    RADAR, TYPE JMA-9922-6XA
    9922



  • Page 55

    -1087-9

    4263

    AC100/230V
    50/60Hz, 1
    AC220V
    50/60Hz, 3
    800VA

    Note: Eliminating the interference on frequencies used for marine communications and
    navigation due to operation of the radar.
    All cables of the radar are to be run away from the cables of radio equipment.
    (Ex. Radiotelephone. Communications receiver and direction finder. etc)
    Especially inter-wiring cables between scanner unit and display unit of the radar
    should not run parallel with the cables of radio equipment.
    Fig.1.18 GENERAL SYSTEM DIAGRAM OF
    RADAR, TYPE JMA-9922-9XA
    9922



  • Page 56



  • Page 57



  • Page 58



  • Page 59

    SECTION 2
    NAME AND FUNCTION OF
    CONTROL PANEL SWITCHES
    AND FUNCTION OF
    SOFTWARE BUTTONS

    NAME AND FUNCTION OF CONTROL PANEL SWITCHES.......................2-1
    FUNCTION OF SOFTWARE BUTTONS .......................................................2-6



  • Page 60



  • Page 61

    NAME AND FUNCTION OF CONTROL PANEL SWITCHES
    Screen Display Example

    2

    2-1



  • Page 62

    Name and Function of Control Panel Switches

    2

    2-2



  • Page 63

    [POWER] (Power Supply) Switch

    This switch is used to turn the power on and off. The lamp lights when this switch is on.
    When the power is on and it cannot be turned off for some reason, depressing this switch for five
    seconds will force the power off.

    2

    [PWR ACK] (Power Alarm Acknowledgment) Switch

    When this switch is set to ON, the lamp lights to start the system.
    In order for this key to work, an external battery is required (normally a power supply separate
    from the AC unit).

    [TX/STBY] (Operation) Switch

    The STANDBY will appear at the upper left of the radar display about 3 minutes after
    the [PWR] switch is set to ON. Then, press this switch, and transmission will be started.
    Pressing the switch during transmission sets the equipment to the standby state.

    [ALARM ACK] (Alarm Acknowledgment) Switch

    Press this switch to acknowledge a failure, approach of a target, or collision alarm.

    [TUNE] (Turning) Control

    Tunes the target signals to display the targets most clearly on the radar display.
    Switching between AUTO and MANUAL can be done by pressing the knob.

    [RAIN] (Rain/Snow Clutter Suppression) Control

    Reduces the clutter echo caused by rain and snow.
    Be careful not to set this adjustment too high. Setting this adjustment too high may cause the
    target to be erased. Switching between AUTO and MANUAL can be done by pressing the knob.

    [SEA] (Sea Clutter Suppression) Control

    Reduces the clutter echo caused by the surface of the sea.
    Be careful not to set this adjustment too high. Setting this adjustment too high may cause the
    target to be erased. Switching between AUTO and MANUAL can be done by pressing the knob.

    [GAIN] (Receiving Sensitivity) Control

    Controls the radar receiving sensitivity.
    Adjust the GAIN to a point where the background static does not interfere with operation.

    [RANGE +/-] (Range Scale Select) Switch

    Selects a range scale from 0.125 to 96 (or 120) nautical miles.

    [EBL1] (Electric Bearing Line 1) Switch

    Selects and displays EBL1. Switches between ON and OFF, and the function for which this
    switch if valid. When depressed for two seconds or longer, this switch selects ON/OFF for the
    floating setting.

    [EBL2] (Electric Bearing Line 2) Switch

    Selects and displays EBL2. Switches between ON and OFF, and the function for which this
    switch if valid. When depressed for two seconds or longer, this switch selects ON/OFF for the
    floating setting.

    [EBL] (Electric Bearing Line) Control

    Rotates the bearing of the EBL that is selected by EBL1 and 2.

    [VRM1] (Variable Range Marker 1) Switch
    2-3



  • Page 64

    Selects and displays VRM1.
    Switches between ON and OFF, and the function for which this switch if valid.

    [VRM2] (Variable Range Marker 2) Switch
    Selects and displays VRM2.
    Switches between ON and OFF, and the function for which this switch if valid.

    [VRM] (Variable Range Marker) Control
    Changes the range of the VRM that is selected by VRM1 and 2.

    [T/R VECT] (TM/RM Mode Select) Switch
    Selects the ARPA vector display in the TM or RM mode.

    [TGT DATA] (Target Data Setup) Switch

    This switch is used to display numeric data of ARPA being tracked and AIS being displayed.
    When this switch is depressed for two seconds, the numeric display next to symbols will be
    turned on and off.

    [ACQ MANUAL] (Manual Acquisition) Switch

    This switch turns on and off manual acquisition of ARPA targets.
    When this key is pressed, the cursor mode is changed to the manual acquisition setting mode.

    [ACQ CANCEL] (Acquisition Cancel) Switch

    This switch cancels the symbol and vector of an ARPA target being tracked, and stops tracking
    the target.
    If depressed for two seconds or longer, that tracking of all targets will be cancelled. (ARPA
    display)
    When using with AIS, pressing this for two seconds, all targets will be paused and displayed.

    [DAY/NIGHT] (Day/Night Mode Select) Switch

    Switches the screen color and brilliance according to the DAY, DAY2, NIGHT1 and NIGHT2
    setting.

    [AIS/ARPA]

    Selects whether to use the ACQ MANUAL and ACQ CANCEL keys with ARPA or AIS.

    [HL OFF] (Heading Line Off) Switch

    The ship’s heading line (HL) can be cancelled as long as this switch is depressed.

    [DATA OFF]

    While this switch is depressed, graphics other HL, the range ring, EBL and VRM will be deleted
    temporarily.

    [PANEL] (Operation Panel Brightness) Switch

    Controls the brightness of the controls and switches on the operation panel.

    [USER]

    The registered function is called. Also, if an option is connected, then this is used to operate that
    option.
    At the time of factory shipments, it is set as ON of the function which switches the vector length
    of "ARPA" in 60 minutes, and OFF.
    2-4

    2



  • Page 65

    [OPTION1]

    The registered function is called. Also, if an option is connected, then this is used to operate that
    option.
    The call of a MENU is assigned at the time of factory shipments.

    2

    [OPTION2]

    The registered function is called. Also, if an option is connected, then this is used to operate that
    option.
    The call of a TEST is assigned at the time of factory shipments.

    [Trackball]
    The trackball is used to move the cursor to arbitrary locations on the screen. It is used to make
    settings in the various modes.
    It is used to specify the center position of floating EBLs and specify the off center position.

    [Left Trackball Button]
    This button Is used to select various modes and confirm numeric input.
    In the MARK mode, it is used to confirm the screen mark. During manual acquisition of ARPA,
    it is used to confirm acquisition.

    [Right Trackball Button]
    In the MARK mode, this button is used to delete screen marks.
    During manual acquisition of ARPA, it is used to release acquisition.

    [BRILL] Control

    Controls the brilliance of the entire display panel.
    Brilliance knob is located right-hard if a screen.

    2-5



  • Page 66

    FUNCTION OF SOFTWARE BUTTONS
    This radar provides software buttons on the screen which can be used to set important functions
    directly and swiftly without opening a menu.

    2

    By positioning the arrow cursor on the buttons indicated by
    to
    in the figure above and then
    pressing the left trackball button, the settings can be changed in the ways described below.

    2-6



  • Page 67

    Range selection
    Changes the radar range.
    “+”: Increases the range by one step. (The maximum range is 96 or 120 nautical miles.)
    “-”: Decreases the range by one step. (The minimum range is 0.125 nautical mile.)

    2

    RINGS indicator selection
    Turns on and off the fixed distance scale display. When this is turned on, the intervals of the
    range rings will be displayed. When this is turned off, then “OFF” will be displayed.
    Pulse width selection
    Select the pulse width. There are three pulse widths: Short pulse (SP), middle pulse (MP)
    and long pulse (LP). The pulse widths that can be used depend on the range being used. If a
    change cannot be made, then nothing will be displayed. This setting is stored for each range.
    Tuning indicator mode
    Sets the tuning mode to MANUAL or AUTO.
    MANUAL

    AUTO
    Manual tuning → Automatic tuning
    Bearing mode selection
    This has the same function as the [AZI MODE] switch. It switches between North-up (true
    bearing), Head-up (relative bearing) and Course-up. Each time this button is clicked it will step
    through the settings in the following order: “N UP” ⇒ “C UP” ⇒ “H UP”
    Motion mode selection
    The screen display is changed between the True Motion (TM) and Relative Motion (RM)
    displays. Clicking this button will switch between “TM” and “RM.” (R) indicates a relative trail.
    (T) indicates a true trail.
    Transmission/Standby selection
    About three minutes after the [PWR] switch is turned on, the “PREHEAT” indication on the upper
    left of the screen will change to “STANDBY.”
    STANDBY:
    Indicates that the unit is in the standby state. Clicking the switch at this time will
    change the unit to the transmission state.
    TRANSMIT: Indicates that the unit is in the transmission state. Clicking the switch at this time
    will change the unit to the standby state.
    Change Interswitch connection
    This is displayed if Interswitch is connected. The indicator shows the connected scanner and
    the connection status of the indicator. When this switch is pressed, a menu to change the
    connection states of the scanner and indicator will be displayed. The scanner and indicator
    connection states cannot be changed, unless the master indicator is in the standby state.
    AIS target refreshed (ACT)
    When this switch is pressed, the AIS target will be activated.
    AIS target deactivated (DACT)
    When this switch is pressed, the activated AIS target is paused.
    ARPA symbol indicator selection
    Turns the ARPA symbol indicator on or off. The setting is changed each time this button is
    clicked.
    AIS symbol indicator selection
    Turns the AIS symbol indicator on or off. The setting is changed each time this button is
    clicked.
    2-7



  • Page 68

    Radar interference reflector function selection
    Turns on and off the radar interference reflector (IR).
    switch is clicked.

    The IR is turned on or off each time this

    Radar reception scale (GAIN)
    This indicates the degree the knob has been turned.
    Sea clutter suppression function (SEA) selection
    Selects either manual or automatic sea clutter suppression.
    position in the manual mode.

    The bar on the right indicates the

    Sea scale
    This indicates the amount the knob has been turned in manual mode. When in auto
    mode,“AUTO”will be displayed.
    Rain/snow clutter suppression function (RAIN) selection
    Selects either manual or automatic rain/snow clutter suppression.
    indicates the position in the manual mode.

    The bar on the right

    Rain scale
    This indicates the amount the knob has been turned in manual mode. When in auto mode,
    “AUTO”will be displayed.
    Own ship’s trail indication interval function (TRACK) selection
    Turns on and off the own ship’s trail indication interval.
    Radar trail indicator function (TRAILS) selection
    Sets the time intervals for radar trails. OFF, 0.5MIN, 1MIN, 3MIN, or 6MIN can be selected.
    Image processing function (PROC) selection
    Sets the image processing mode. OFF, PROC1, PROC2 or PROC3 can be selected.
    Radar trail mode selection
    Sets true trail or relative trail when operating the radar trail function.
    “T” is displayed when true trails are used and “R” is displayed for relative trails.
    This setting is also limited by the radar bearing mode.
    When the North-up (N UP) mode is used, switching between “T” and “R” is possible.
    When the Course-up (C UP) mode is used, only “T” is set.
    When the Head-up (H UP) mode is used, only “R” is set.

    Radar image enhance (ENH) function selection
    Turns on and off the radar image enhance function.
    clicked.

    It is turned on or off each time this switch is

    Cursor mode selection
    Sets the cursor mode. Clicking this button will display a pull-down menu. After setting the
    mode, the cursor can be moved and the left trackball button used to make various settings.
    Because all the modes are to be used during radar transmission, a mode may not operate
    properly if it is selected in the standby state.
    Off center mode selection
    This has the same function as the [OFF CENT] switch. Shifts the own ship position within the
    screen (within 60% of the scope’s radius) to display a wider range in an arbitrary direction.
    When this button is pressed when the system is already in the off center mode, then the off
    center function will be turned off.
    2-8

    2



  • Page 69

    Heading line off setting
    Has the same function as the [HL OFF] key.
    display will be turned off.

    While this switch is clicked, the heading lines (HL)

    CPA RING indicator selection
    Turn on and off the CPA RING display.
    When the vector mode is TRUE, the CPA RING cannot be turned on.

    2

    MAP SHIFT
    This is used to mode maps made by users.
    DEPTH
    This displays the depth received from external devices.
    The □ button can be used to turn on and off the depth graph display.
    DAY/NIGHT setting
    This button selects the day or night mode. The mode changes each time this button is clicked.
    There are four settings: DAY1→ DAY2 → NIGHT1 → NIGHT2.
    PANEL/BRILL VIDEO/BRILL ARPA setting
    The modes PANEL, VIDEO, and ARPA which adjust luminosity are switched.
    The mode changes each time this button is clicked.
    There are three settings: PANEL→VIDEO→ARPA.
    Brilliance adjustment
    Each time this switch is clicked, it will go to the next of four (BRILL VIDEO) or five (PANEL,
    BRILL ARPA) brilliance settings.
    Process setting function (FUNC) selection
    Sets the process setting mode. OFF, FUNC1, FUNC2, FUNC3, FUNC4, or FUNC5 can be
    selected.

    ,

    ,
    ,
    : EBL and VRM settings
    The EBL1, EBL2, VRM1, and VRM2 switches are used to acquire operation rights.
    They function in the same way as the EBL1 and 2 and VRM1 and 2 switches on the control
    panel.
    The numeric indicator switches are used to turn on and off the various EBLs and VRMs.
    When a numeric indicator displays “OFF,” that means the corresponding indicator in the PPI is
    off.
    The switches on the control panel are used to move the EBLs and VRMs.
    EBL1 T051.0 °
    EBL2 T135.0 °
    ● VRM1 0.30
    nm
    ○ VRM2 0.60
    nm
    When ON: The numeric display is off.
    When OFF: The numeric display is on.
    This is used to turn ON and OFF either EBL or VRM operation, and turn ON and OFF the display.
    The function that is valid is indicated by the inverted display.
    EBL and VRM intersection identification marks

    EBL1 starting point mode
    Sets whether the EBL1 starting point is placed at the center of the own ship or at an arbitrary
    position on the radar screen. This has the same function as depressing the EBL1 switch on the
    control panel for a long period.
    2-9



  • Page 70

    C: CENTER Indicates that the EBL1 starting point is at the own ship position.
    O: OFFSET Indicates that the EBL1 starting point is not at the own ship position.
    In this state, the starting point may be at the cursor position or it may be fixed at an arbitrary
    position on the screen. When the button is clicked, the starting point will move with the
    cursor position, then when the left button is clicked the starting point will be fixed at the
    cursor location.
    L: After moving the L/L FIX EBL1 starting point, the starting point is fixed by the latitude and
    longitude values.
    If the starting point moves out of the screen, then it will be reset automatically so that the
    starting point is at the own ship position.
    Note: When the EBL1 starting point moves, the mode O or L is indicated by the position
    selected among the EBL OFFSET ORIGIN menu.
    EBL2 starting point mode
    Sets whether the EBL2 starting point is placed at the center of the own ship or at an arbitrary
    position on the radar screen.
    Everything else is the same as that for the EBL2 starting point mode.

    Speed unit setting
    Sets the speed unit.
    Clicking this button will open a pull-down menu. A unit can be selected from one of the
    following. An alarm is activated if the selected speed unit is not connected to the radar.
    Options: MANUAL, LOG (1-axis log), 2AXW (2-axis over water), 2AXG (2-axis over ground),
    GPS
    If the speed unit setting is “MANUAL,” then placing the cursor over the numeric section and left
    clicking will allow numeric input.
    SET/DRIFT
    Turns on and off SET/DRIFT correction.
    If CORRECTION is on for this setting, then “CORR” will be displayed next to the button. The
    number displayed next to “CORR” at this time will be valid. Also, correction can only be set
    when the speed unit is in the MANUAL or LOG (1-axis log) modes.
    SET setting
    Placing the cursor over the numeric section and left clicking will allow numeric input. This
    setting is only valid if CORRECTION is ON.
    DRIFT setting
    Placing the cursor over the numeric section and left clicking will allow numeric input. This
    setting is only valid if CORRECTION is ON.
    Date display mode
    Sets the date mode to be displayed on the screen.
    : Turns off the time display.
    : Global time display (UCT).
    : Local time display (LOCAL).
    ARPA, PAST POSN vector mode setting
    These set the vector display mode.
    T: True vector
    R: Relative vector
    These settings work concurrently.
    2-10

    2



  • Page 71

    Guard zone 1 ON/OFF function setting
    Turns the guard zone 1 function on or off.
    Guard zone 2 ON/OFF function setting
    Turns the guard zone 2 function on or off.

    2

    MAIN MENU setting
    This button has the same functions as the MENU switch on the control panel.
    Clicking this button will display the “MAIN MENU.”
    PI menu setting
    Clicking this button will open the “PI” menu.
    This menu is used to set and display parallel index lines (PI).

    GZ menu setting
    Clicking this button will open the “GZ” menu.
    This menu will turn on and off the range settings for guard zone 1 and 2.
    TEST menu setting
    Clicking this button will open the “TEST” menu.
    Checks the operational status of the radar equipment.
    Navigation information readout (NAV)
    Opens a list of navigation information files stored in the NAV/MAP INFO Menu.
    Personal code name (PIN)
    Opens a list of personal code files in the PIN Menu.

    2-11



  • Page 72

    SECTION 3
    BASIC OPERATION

    3.1 FLOW OF OPERATION................................................3-1
    Power ON and Start the System .........................................3-2
    Observe and Adjust Video...................................................3-4
    Tuning Operations...............................................................3-7
    Acquire and Measurement Data .........................................3-8
    End the Operation and Stop the System.............................3-8
    3.2 MENU COMPOSITION.................................................3-9
    3.3 PREPARATION...........................................................3-12
    Tuning [TUNE] ..................................................................3-12
    Sensitivity Control [GAIN] .................................................3-12
    Display Brilliance Control ................................................3-12
    Contrast Control [BRILL VIDEO].......................................3-13
    Sea Clutter Suppression [SEA].........................................3-13
    Rain/Snow Clutter Suppression [RAIN] ............................3-14
    Brilliance Control ...............................................................3-14
    Day/Night Mode Selection [DAY/NIGHT] ..........................3-22
    Color Setting [COLOR] .....................................................3-22
    3.4 BASIC OPERATIONS.................................................3-34
    Move Cross Cursor Mark [+] by Trackball.........................3-34
    Methods for Setting Menu Items with the Trackbal ...........3-34
    Use EBLs (Electronic Bearing Lines)................................3-41
    Set Floating EBL ...............................................................3-43
    Set Floating EBL ...............................................................3-45
    Select Range [RANGE].....................................................3-47
    Set Maximum Range.........................................................3-47
    Select Pulse Length ..........................................................3-48

    Select Bearing Display Mode [AZI MODE] .......................3-48
    Cancel Ship’s Heading Line [HL OFF] ..............................3-49
    Cancel All Display Items Except HL and Cross Cursor Mark
    [+] [DATA OFF]..................................................................3-49
    Display PI(Parallel Index Lines )[PI] ............................3-50
    Move Own Ship’s Display Position [OFF CENTER] .........3-53
    Display Other Ship’s Trails [TRAILS] ................................3-54
    Display Own Ship’s Tracks and Own Symbols [OWN
    TRACK].............................................................................3-55
    Marking [MARK]................................................................3-58
    Display Range Rings [RANGE RINGS] ............................3-59
    Display Variable Range Markers [VRM1/VRM2] ..............3-59
    Set Guard Zones [GUARD ZONE]....................................3-61
    Reset Alarm Buzzer [ALARM ACK] ..................................3-63
    Set Alarm Sound Level .....................................................3-63
    FUNCTION .......................................................................3-65
    Expand Targets.................................................................3-66
    Display Processed Videos ................................................3-67
    Reduce Radar Interference...............................................3-68
    Personal Information.........................................................3-69
    Display of Navigational Information ..................................3-72
    Function of USER Switch / OPTION Switch..................... 3-88
    Operation of Performance monitor....................................3-89
    EBL Maneuvering .............................................................3-95



  • Page 73

    ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●

    3.1

    FLOW OF OPERATION
    Attention



    Do not put anything on the operation panel. If you put anything hot on it, it
    may be deformed.
    Do not apply sudden force to the operation panel, trackball and controls.
    Otherwise, some failure or damage may result.

    POWER ON AND START
    THE SYSTEM

    OBSERVE AND ADJUST
    VIDEO

    TUNING OPERATIONS

    ACQUIRE AND
    MEASUREMENT DATA

    END THE OPERATION AND
    STOP THE SYSTEM
    Each operation will be described in detail below.

    3-1



  • Page 74

    ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●

    Power ON and Start the System・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・
    Attention
    Wait approximately 10 seconds before turning on the power again.
    A malfunction may occur if the power in the ship is suddenly interrupted during
    operation of the radar. In this case, the power should be turned on again.
    Immediately after the radar is installed, if the system is not used for a long time,
    or after the magnetron is replaced, warm-up the equipment in the standby mode
    for 20 to 30 minutes before setting it to the transmit mode.
    If the warm-up time is short, the magnetron may cause sparks, resulting in an
    unstable oscillation.
    Start transmission on a short-pulse range and then send long pulses
    sequentially. If the transmission is unstable in the meantime, reset the system
    to the standby mode immediately and maintain it in the standby mode for 5 to 10
    minutes before restarting the operation. Repeat these steps until the operation
    is stabilized.

    3-2





  • Page 75

    ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●

    Procedures

    1

    Check that the ship’s mains are turned on.

    2

    Press

    POWER

    .


    POWER

    Orange lamp on

    The warm-up time will appear.

    3



    Wait for completion of warm-up
    When the warm-up time expires, the warm-up time screen disappears and
    the PREHEAT display on the upper-left corner of the radar display is
    changed to STANDBY .

    4

    Press

    TX
    STBY

    .

    The radar transmission and the scanner start rotating.
    The STANDBY on the upper-left corner on the radar display is changed
    to TRANSMIT .

    Attention:

    Even if

    TX
    STBY

    is pressed before

    STANDBY

    is displayed, radar

    transmission is not performed.

    The method of transmission in case of emergency.
    Procedures

    1

    Check that the ship’s mains are turned on.

    2

    Press .

    POWER

    Orange lamp on →

    POWER

    The warm-up time will appear.
    TX

    A push of the
    3
    5 seconds or more vanishes the display of
    STBY
    warm-up time.
    The radar transmission and the scanner start rotating.
    The STANDBY on the upper-left corner on the radar display is changed
    to TRANSMI
    Note:
    In the moment sag of a power supply, and the case of an unusual
    operation outbreak, it can transmit, immediately after rebooting the power
    supply.
    Please do not use emergent transmitting operation except the above.
    The life of a magnetron will be shortened if the warm-up is not completed.

    3-3



  • Page 76

    ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●

    Observe and Adjust Video・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・
    Procedures

    1

    Press
    target

    RANGE

    to set the range to the scale required for

    observation.
    2

    Turn the

    or monitor brilliance knob.
    GAIN

    Adjust to obtain the clearest targets.
    Attention
    In the AUTO SEA mode, there are cases in which the targets are not displayed
    because the sea clutter returns are suppressed in a simple way.
    Use the normal [SEA] control during sailing under normal conditions.
    In the AUTO RAIN mode, there are cases in which the targets are not displayed
    because the rain/snow clutter returns are suppressed in a simple way.
    Use the manual [SEA control during sailing under normal conditions.
    The AUTO SEA and AUTO RAIN mode cannot be used concurrently. If one is
    set to AUTO mode, the other will be set to MANUAL mode.

    3-4





  • Page 77

    ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●

    In case of Using AUTO SEA/SEMI AUTO:
    AUTO

    1

    Press

    . Or, when the SEA button on
    SEA

    the screen is pressed, AUTO is set.
    The AUTO Menu will appear.
    SEA AUTO is displayed at the lower left of the radar
    screen.


    SEMI AUTO

    1

    Press

    . Or, when the SEA button on
    SEA

    the screen is pressed,SEMI AUTO is set.
    The SEMI AUTO Menu will appear.
    SEA A is displayed at the lower left of the radar
    screen.

    Cancellation

    1

    Press

    . Or, press the SEA button
    SEA

    GAIN
    SEA
    RAIN
    TRACK 3min
    TRAILS 0.5min T
    PROC PROC1

    GAIN
    SEA AUTO
    RAIN
    TRACK 3min
    TRAILS 0.5min T
    PROC PROC1

    GAIN
    SEA
    A
    RAIN
    TRACK 3min
    TRAILS 0.5min T
    PROC PROC1

    on the screen .
    AUTO is released.

    Note: When setting AUTO SEA / SEMI AUTO, the AUTO RAIN is set to the MANUAL
    mode. Both AUTO SEA and AUTO RAIN cannot be set at the same time.

    3-5



  • Page 78

    ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●

    In case of Using AUTO RAIN:

    Procedures

    1

    Press

    . Or, press the SEA
    SEA

    button on the screen .

    GAIN
    SEA
    RAIN
    TRACK 3min
    TRAILS 0.5min T
    PROC PROC1

    RAIN AUTO is displayed on the radar
    screen.

    Cancellation

    1

    AUTO is released using the same
    procedure that was used to set it.

    3-6

    GAIN
    SEA
    RAIN AUTO
    TRACK 3min
    TRAILS 0.5min T
    PROC PROC1





  • Page 79

    ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●

    Tuning Operations・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・
    Attention
    When the receiver is detuned, the best video may not be obtained even if the
    maximum bar graph is displayed on the AUTO TUNE tuning indicator. In this
    case, adjust the [TUNE] control manually so that the best video is presented.



    Procedures

    1

    Press
    RANGE

    and select any range scale from 0.125 to 96
    (or 120) NM. (The current range scale is
    displayed at the upper left of the radar
    display.)

    The range scale becomes shorter by
    .
    pressing

    2

    ROTATE

    pressing

    and longer by

    .
    TUNE

    Adjust the video to present the clearest targets.
    If there is no adequate target, adjust [TUNE] control to indicate the maximum
    bar graph on the turning indicator at the upper left of the radar display.

    AUTO

    In case of Using AUTO TUNE:
    Procedures

    1

    Press
    button.

    . Or, press MANUAL
    TUNE

    1.SEA/RAIN
    1.MANUAL
    2.TUNE
    MANUAL
    AUTO

    “AUTO” in “2.TUNE” will be set and “AUTO” will
    appear at the upper left of the radar display.

    Cancellation

    1

    Repeat the procedures up to step 2
    in case of using AUTO TUNE.
    “MANUAL”in“2.TUNE”will be set and“AUTO”at
    the upper left of the radar display will change
    to“MANUAL”and AUTO TUNE mode will be
    cancelled.

    0.
    3-7

    EXIT



  • Page 80

    ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●

    Acquire and Measurement Data・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・
    For detailed operations for data acquisition and measurement, refer to Section 3.4 “BASIC
    OPERATIONS” and Section 4 “MEASUREMENT OF RANGE AND BEARING”.

    End the Operation and Stop the System・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・
    Exit

    1

    Press

    TX
    STBY



    .

    The radar transmission will end and the scanner will stop rotating.
    The indication TRANSMIT will be changed to STANDBY .
    Maintain the “STANDBY” mode if radar observation is restarted in a
    relatively short time. Observation can be restarted simply by pressing
    the [TX/STBY] switch..

    2

    Press

    POWER

    .

    The power will be turned off.

    Orange lamp Off →

    POWER

    Note: When "PWR" is lit, data is being written to internal memory, so do not
    open the shipboard breaker.
    Also, when turning on the power supply again, be sure that the green
    PWR switch lamp is off before pressing "PWR".

    3-8



  • Page 81

    ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●

    3.2

    MENU COMPOSITION

    The Menu system of this radar equipment consists of the Main menu, Sub1 menu, Sub2 menu and
    Test menu.
    Click MENU button on the screen.
    SUB1 MENU

    MAIN MENU
    1.IR



    OFF
    ON
    2.TGT ENH
    2.TUNE
    ON
    OFF
    3.PROCESS
    2.PROC1
    4.FUNCTION
    1.FUNC OFF
    5.EBL1
    CENTER
    OFFSET
    6.EBL2
    CENTER
    OFFSET
    DATA OFF
    7.
    8.

    SUB1 MENU

    9.

    CODE INPUT

    0.

    EXIT

    1.

    SETTING1

    2.

    LEVEL

    3.

    NAV/MAP INFO

    4.

    TRACK

    5.

    ARPA

    6.

    PIN

    7.

    ISW

    8.

    EBL MANEUVER

    9.

    SUB2 MENU

    0.

    EXIT
    SUB2 MENU

    TEST MENU
    1.

    SELF CHECK

    2.

    PANEL TEST

    1.

    COLOR

    0.

    EXIT

    ARPATEST
    3.
    4.MAG CURRENT
    OFF
    ON
    5.PM
    OFF
    ON
    6.

    ERROR LOGGING

    7.

    SYSTEM INFO

    0.

    EXIT

    The Main menu consists of the items of signal processing functions and EBL control, and
    other functions are included in the Sub1 menu. The video color setting is included in the Sub2
    menu.The Test menu consists of the items of input monitoring and Self-diagnostic functions.

    Note: When the unit is shipped from the factory, this is set in "OPTION2" or the "MENU" key.
    3-9



  • Page 82

    ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●

    A. Main menu

    MAIN MENU
    1.IR

    1

    Displaying the Main menu.
    Click the MENU button on the
    screen.
    The main menu will appear.

    2.

    Ending the Main menu.
    Click the EXIT button on the
    screen.
    The MAIN Menu will be closed.

    OFF

    ON
    OFF
    3.PROCESS
    2.PROC1
    4.FUNCTION
    1.FUNC OFF
    5.EBL1
    CENTER
    OFFSET
    6.EBL2
    CENTER
    OFFSET
    DATA OFF
    7.
    8.

    SUB1 MENU

    9.

    CODE INPUT

    0.

    EXIT

    B. Sub1 menu
    1

    2

    ON

    2.TGT
    2.TUNEENH

    SUB1 MENU
    1.

    SETTING1

    2.

    LEVEL

    Click the SUB1 MENU button on
    the screen.

    3.

    NAV/MAP INFO

    4.

    TRACK

    The SUB1 Menu will appear.

    5.

    ARPA

    6.

    PIN

    7.

    ISW

    8.

    EBL MANEUVER

    9.

    SUB2 MENU

    0.

    EXIT

    Displaying the Sub1 menu.

    Ending the Sub1 menu.
    Click the EXIT button on the
    screen.
    The SUB1 Menu will be closed.

    Note: When the unit is shipped from the factory, this is set in "OPTION2" or the
    "MENU" key.

    3-10





  • Page 83

    ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●

    C. Sub2 Menu
    SUB2 MENU

    1

    Displaying the Sub2 menu.

    1.

    COLOR

    0.

    EXIT

    Press MENU, then SUB1 MENU and
    SUB2 MENU or press MENU, then



    MENU and MENU.
    The TEST Menu will appear.

    2.

    Ending the Sub2 menu.
    Press EXIT or MENU.
    The Sub2 Menu will be closed.

    D. Test menu
    1

    Click TEST .
    The TEST Menu will appear.

    2

    TEST MENU

    Displaying the Test menu.

    Ending the Sub1 menu.

    1.

    SELF CHECK

    2.

    PANEL TEST

    ARPATEST
    3.
    4.MAG CURRENT
    OFF
    ON
    5.PM
    OFF
    ON
    6.

    ERROR LOGGING

    7.

    SYSTEM INFO

    0.

    EXIT

    Click EXIT or MENU.
    The Sub2 Menu will be closed.

    3-11



  • Page 84

    ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●

    3.3

    PREPARATION

    Tuning [TUNE]・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・

    TUNE

    This control is used to tune the receiver.
    If the receiver is detuned from the best level, the receiving sensitivity falls, and the targets on a long
    range or the small targets on a short range may be overlooked.
    In manual tuning, rotate the [TUNE] control clockwise or anticlockwise and adjust so that the target
    echoes are the clearest. If no suitable target is present, adjust the control so that the tuning
    indicator bar graph at the upper left of the radar display is maximized.
    After setting the radar to the TRANSMIT mode, it take about 10 minutes until the oscillation
    frequency of the magnetron is stabilized. Therefore, tune the receiver once again after about 10
    minutes.
    For automatic tuning, set “TUNE” to “ON” in the AUTO Menu. (Refer to page 3-8).

    Sensitivity Control [GAIN]・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・

    GAIN

    This control is used to control the radar receiving sensitivity.
    Clockwise rotation of the [GAIN] control increases receiving sensitivity and extends the radar
    observation range. If the sensitivity is too high, the receiver noise will increase to reduce the
    contrast of the targets with the background video and make the targets obscure on the display. To
    observe densely crowded targets or the targets on a short range, rotate the [GAIN] control
    anticlockwise to reduce the sensitivity so that the targets are easy to observe. Be careful not to
    overlook small and important targets.

    Display Brilliance Control ・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・

    This control is used to adjust the brilliance of the entire display.
    Clockwise rotation of the [BRILL] control increases the brilliance of the entire display. Adjust the
    [BRILL] control to obtain the best-to-see display with optimum brilliance.

    3-12





  • Page 85

    ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●

    Contrast Control [BRILL VIDEO]・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・



    The contrast of the radar video display can be adjusted in four levels. Press the PANEL button on
    the screen, then select [BRILL VIDEO]. Each time the brilliance button
    is clicked, the screen
    will switch to VIDEO
    . The current mode is displayed on the lower right of
    the radar screen. (The VIDEO indication will change to the PANEL indicated in several second.)
    Adjust the [BRILL VIDEO] switch to obtain the best-to-see video with optimum contrast.

    Attention
    In the AUTO SEA mode, there are cases in which the targets are not displayed
    because the sea clutter returns are suppressed in a simple way.
    Use the manual [SEA] control during sailing under normal conditions.
    In the AUTO RAIN mode, there are cases in which the targets are not displayed
    because the rain/snow clutter returns are suppressed in a simple way.
    Use the manual [SEA] control during sailing under normal conditions.

    Sea Clutter Suppression [SEA]・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・

    SEA

    This control is used to reduce the receiving sensitivity on a short range to suppress the sea clutter
    returns.
    Clockwise rotation of the [SEA] control can suppress sea clutter returns more effectively. Be
    careful not to suppress sea clutter excessively. Otherwise, small buoys and boats may disappear
    from the radar display.
    When setting “SEA” to “SEA AUTO” , sea clutter returns can be suppressed depending on their
    intensity levels. This setting is used for the case in which the sea clutter returns are different in
    their directions.
    Switching between manual and auto is done by clicking the“SEA AUTO” / “SEMI AUTO”button on
    the lower left of the screen, or pressing the“SEA”knob.

    Note: It is not allowed to use both the AUTO / SEMI AUTO SEA mode and the AUTO
    RAIN mode at the same time.

    3-13



  • Page 86

    ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●

    Rain/Snow Clutter Suppression [RAIN]・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・

    RAIN

    This control is used to suppress rain or snow clutter returns. Clockwise rotation of the [RAIN]
    control makes clearer those targets that may be hidden among rain/snow clutter returns. Be
    careful not to overlook small targets in the clutter. This control also has the effect of reducing sea
    clutter, so that it is more effective to use this control together with the [SEA] control.
    Rotate the control anticlockwise to the maximum in the normal condition.
    When setting SEA/RAIN to AUTO RAIN in the AUTO Menu, rain/snow clutter can be suppressed
    depending upon the intensity level. When setting SEA/RAIN to MANUAL in the AUTO Menu, the
    mode is changed into the MANUAL mode.
    Switching between manual and auto is done by clicking the "RAIN AUTO" button on the lower left of
    the screen, or pressing the "RAIN" knob.

    Note: It is not allowed to use both the AUTO RAIN mode and AUTO SEA mode at the
    same time.

    Brilliance Control・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・
    Press

    PANEL

    . Or press the

    right side of "PANEL" on the screen.

    The BRILLIANCE switches [PANEL], [BRILL VIDEO], and [BRILL ARPA] are used to adjust the
    brilliance of the panel, video and ARPA markers. Each time a switch is pressed, the brilliance is
    increased by one level up to 4 or 5 levels. When the maximum level is reached, the brilliance is
    reset to the original panel.
    [PANEL]

    Adjusts the lighting for the characters on the controls and switches on the
    operational panel.
    When PANEL on the screen is pressed, the adjustment status of "BRILL
    VIDEO" and "BRILL ARPA" are changed.
    Then, each of the levels can be set if the brilliance level button on the right is
    pressed.

    [BRILL VIDEO]
    [BRILL ARPA]

    Adjusts the brilliance of radar display.
    Adjusts the brilliance of ARPA information

    Brilliance Control by Menu Operation
    [RANGE RINGA]
    Adjusts the brilliance of the fixed range scale.
    [VRM]
    Adjusts the brilliance of the variable range scale (VRM1 and VRM2).
    [EBL]
    Adjusts the brilliance of electronic bearing cursor (EBL1 and EBL2).
    [CHARACTER]
    Adjusts the brilliance of characters.

    3-14





  • Page 87

    ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●

    Procedures

    1

    Click the MENU on the screen. Or press the OPTION2 button .
    The Main Menu will appear.

    2

    Click SUB1 MENU .
    The Sub1 Menu will appear.

    3



    Click LEVEL.
    The LEVEL Menu will appear.

    4

    Click the level setting section of RANGE RINGS .
    1.RANGE RINGS will be selected and the following pull-down menu will
    appear.

    SUB1 MENU
    LEVEL
    1.RANGE RINGS
    4.LEVEL4
    1.LEVEL1
    2.VRM
    2.LEVEL2
    3.LEVEL3
    3.EBL
    4.LEVEL4
    4.CHARACTER
    4.LEVEL4
    5.VIDEO(ECHO)
    4.LEVEL4
    6.ARPA
    5.LEVEL5
    7.BUZZER
    7.LEVEL7

    0.

    EXIT

    3-15



  • Page 88

    ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●

    5

    Select any level from 1 to 4 for RANGE RINGS brilliance in
    the pull-down menu and press it.
    The default value is set to 4.LEVEL4.

    6

    Click the level setting section of VRM .
    2.VRM will be selected and the following pull-down menu will appear.

    SUB1 MENU
    LEVEL
    1.RANGE RINGS
    4.LEVEL4
    2.VRM
    4.LEVEL4
    1.LEVEL1
    2.LEVEL2
    3.LEVEL3
    4.CHARACTER
    4.LEVEL4
    5.VIDEO(ECHO)
    4.LEVEL4
    6.ARPA
    5.LEVEL5
    7.BUZZER
    7.LEVEL7
    3.EBL

    0.

    7

    EXIT

    Select any level from 1 to 4 for VRM (VRM1 and VRM2)
    brilliance in the pull-down menu and press it.
    The default value is set to 4.LEVEL4.

    3-16





  • Page 89

    ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●

    8

    Click the level setting section of EBL .
    3.EBL will be selected and the following pull-down menu will appear.

    SUB1 MENU
    LEVEL



    1.RANGE RINGS
    4.LEVEL4
    2.VRM
    4.LEVEL4
    3.EBL
    4.LEVEL4
    4.CHARACTER
    1.LEVEL1
    2.LEVEL2
    5.VIDEO(ECHO)
    3.LEVEL3
    4.LEVEL4
    6.ARPA
    5.LEVEL5
    7.BUZZER
    7.LEVEL7

    0.

    9

    EXIT

    Select the brightness of the electronic cursor (EBL1, EBL2)
    from the pull-down menu, select 1 through 4 with the
    trackball, then click.
    The default value is set to 4.LEVEL4.

    3-17



  • Page 90

    ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●

    10 Click the level setting section of CHARACTER .
    4.CHARACTER will be selected and the following pull-down menu will appear.

    SUB1 MENU
    LEVEL
    1.RANGE RINGS
    4.LEVEL4
    2.VRM
    4.LEVEL4
    3.EBL
    4.LEVEL4
    4.CHARACTER
    4.LEVEL4
    5.VIDEO(ECHO)
    1.LEVEL1
    2.LEVEL2
    6.ARPA 3.LEVEL3
    4.LEVEL4
    7.BUZZER
    7.LEVEL7

    EXIT

    0.

    11 Select the character brightness from the pull-down menu,
    and set 1 through 4.
    The default value is set to

    4.LEVEL4 .

    3-18





  • Page 91

    ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●

    12 Click the level setting section of VIDEO .
    5.VIDEO (ECHO) will be selected and the following pull-down menu will
    appear.

    SUB1 MENU
    LEVEL



    1.RANGE RINGS
    4.LEVEL4
    2.VRM
    4.LEVEL4
    3.EBL
    4.LEVEL4
    4.CHARACTER
    4.LEVEL4
    5.VIDEO(ECHO)
    4.LEVEL4
    6.ARPA 1.LEVEL1
    2.LEVEL2
    3.LEVEL3
    7.BUZZER
    4.LEVEL4

    EXIT

    0.

    3-19



  • Page 92

    ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●

    13 Select the echo brightness from the pull-down menu, and set
    1 through 4.
    The default value is set to

    4.LEVEL4 .

    14 Click the level setting section of ARPA .
    6.ARPA will be selected and the following pull-down menu will appear.



    SUB1 MENU
    LEVEL
    1.RANGE RINGS
    4.LEVEL4
    2.VRM
    4.LEVEL4
    3.EBL
    4.LEVEL4
    4.CHARACTER
    4.LEVEL4
    5.VIDEO(ECHO)
    4.LEVEL4
    6.ARPA
    5.LEVEL4
    7.BUZZER
    1.LEVEL0
    2.LEVEL1
    3.LEVEL2
    4.LEVEL3
    5.LEVEL4
    EXIT



    15 Select the ARPA brightness from the pull-down menu, and
    set 1 through 5.
    The default value is set to

    3-20

    5.LEVEL4 .



  • Page 93

    ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●

    After the brilliance levels are adjusted, the following menu will appear.
    SUB1 MENU
    LEVEL
    1.RANGE RINGS
    4.LEVEL4
    2.VRM
    4.LEVEL4
    3.EBL
    4.LEVEL4
    4.CHARACTER
    4.LEVEL4
    5.VIDEO
    4.LEVEL4
    6.ARPA
    5.LEVEL4
    7.BUZZER
    7.LEVEL7



    0.

    EXIT

    The menu display after adjustment shows the level values set for the indiviual
    brilliance items.

    Exit

    1

    Click

    EXIT .

    The Sub1 Menu will reappear.

    2

    Click

    EXIT .

    The Sub1 Menu will be closed.
    These set brilliance levels are saved depending upon the Day/Night mode.

    3-21



  • Page 94

    ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●

    Day/Night Mode Selection [DAY/NIGHT]・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・
    Whenever the [DAY/NIGHT] switch is pressed, the mode is changed over from DAY1 → DAY2
    → NIGHT1 → NIGHT2 and the current mode is indicated at the lower right of the radar
    display. The brilliance levels selected for each mode are saved. For brilliance adjustment, refer to
    page 3 -12. For selection of DAY/NIGHT mode by menu operation, refer to “Color Setting” on the
    next page.


    Color Setting [COLOR]・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・
    The colors of the Day/Night mode [Day1, 2/NIGHT1, 2], system, background color outside the
    bearing scale, background color inside the bearing scale, echoes, characters, dials, own ship’s track,
    and radar trails are set up.
    Color Adjustment by Menu Operation
    [DAY/NIGHT]
    Register of DAY/NIGHT mode
    [SYSTEM]
    System color adjustment
    [OUTER PPI]
    Adjustment of the background color outside the bearing scale
    [INNER PPI]
    Adjustment of the background color inside the bearing scale
    [CHARACTER]
    Adjustment of character colors
    [DIAL]
    Adjustment of dial color
    [ECHO]
    Adjustment of echo colors
    [TRAILS]
    Adjustment of the color of radar trails
    [OWN TRACK]
    Adjustment of the color of own ship’s track

    Procedures

    1

    Click the MENU on the screen.
    The Main Menu will appear.

    2

    Click

    SUB1 MENU .

    The Sub1 Menu will appear.

    3

    Click

    SUB2 MENU .

    The Sub2 Menu will appear.

    4

    Click

    COLOR .

    The COLOR Menu will appear.

    3-22



  • Page 95

    ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●

    5

    Left-click the selection section (combo box) of DAY/NIGT.
    1.DAY/NIGHT will be selected and the following pull-down menu will appear.

    SUB2 MENU
    COLOR



    1.DAY/NIGHT
    1.DAY1
    2.SYSTEM
    1.DAY1
    2.DAY2
    3.OUTER3.NIGHT1
    PPI
    4.NIGHT2
    4.INNER PPI
    1.BLACK
    5.CHARACTER
    1.WHITE
    6.DIAL 1.WHITE
    7.ECHO 1.YELLOW
    8.TRAILS
    1.SKY
    9.OWN TRACK
    1.SKY
    0.

    6

    EXIT

    Select the Day/Night mode from the pull-down menu, select 1
    through 4 with the trackball, then left-click.

    3-23



  • Page 96

    ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●

    7

    Left-click the selection section (combo box) of SYSTEM.
    2.SYSTEM will be selected and the following pull-down menu will appear.

    SUB2 MENU
    COLOR
    1.DAY/NIGHT
    1.DAY
    2.SYSTEM
    1.BLUE1
    3.OUTER1.BLUE1
    PPI
    2.BLUE2
    3.GRAY
    4.INNER PPI
    4.BLACK
    1.BLACK
    5.CHARACTER
    1.WHITE
    6.DIAL 1.WHITE
    7.ECHO 1.YELLOW
    8.TRAILS
    1.SKY
    9.OWN TRACK
    1.SKY
    0.

    8

    EXIT

    Select the System color from the pull-down menu, select 1
    through 4 with the trackball, then left-click.

    3-24





  • Page 97

    ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●

    9

    Left-click the selection section (combo box) of OUTER PPI.
    3.OUTER PPI will be selected and the following pull-down menu will appear.



    SUB2 MENU
    COLOR
    1.DAY/NIGHT
    1.DAY
    2.SYSTEM
    1.BLUE1
    3.OUTER PPI
    1.BLACK
    4.INNER PPI
    1.BLACK
    1.BLACK
    2.BLUE
    5.CHARACTER
    3.D-BLUE
    1.WHITE
    6.DIAL 1.WHITE
    7.ECHO 1.YELLOW
    8.TRAILS
    1.SKY
    9.OWN TRACK
    1.SKY
    0.

    10

    EXIT

    Select the background color outside the bearing scale from
    the pull-down menu, select 1 through 3 with the trackball,
    then left-click.

    3-25



  • Page 98

    ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●

    11 Left-click the selection section (combo box) of INNER PPI.
    4.INNER PPI will be selected and the following pull-down menu will appear.

    SUB2 MENU
    COLOR
    1.DAY/NIGHT
    1.DAY
    2.SYSTEM
    1.BLUE1
    3.OUTER PPI
    1.BLACK
    4.INNER PPI
    1.BLACK
    1.BLACK
    5.CHARACTER
    2.BLUE
    1.WHITE
    3.D-BLUE
    6.DIAL 1.WHITE
    7.ECHO 1.YELLOW
    8.TRAILS
    1.SKY
    9.OWN TRACK
    1.SKY
    0.

    12

    EXIT

    Select the background color inside the bearing scale from
    the pull-down menu, select 1 through 3 with the trackball,
    then left-click.

    3-26





  • Page 99

    ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●

    13 Left-click the selection section (combo box) of CHARACTER.
    5.CHARACTER will be selected and the following pull-down menu will appear.



    SUB2 MENU
    COLOR
    1.DAY/NIGHT
    1.DAY
    2.SYSTEM
    1.BLUE1
    3.OUTER PPI
    1.BLACK
    4.INNER PPI
    1.BLACK
    5.CHARACTER
    1.WHITE
    1.WHITE
    6.DIAL
    2.AMBER
    7.ECHO 1.YELLOW
    3.GREEN
    8.TRAILS
    1.SKY
    9.OWN TRACK
    1.SKY
    0.

    14

    EXIT

    Select the character color from the pull-down menu, select 1
    through 3 with the trackball, then left-click.

    3-27



  • Page 100

    ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●

    15 Left-click the selection section (combo box) of DIAL.
    6.DIAL will be selected and the following pull-down menu will appear.

    SUB2 MENU
    COLOR
    1.DAY/NIGHT
    1.DAY
    2.SYSTEM
    1.BLUE1
    3.OUTER PPI
    1.BLACK
    4.INNER PPI
    1.BLACK
    5.CHARACTER
    1.WHITE
    6.DIAL 1.WHITE
    1.WHITE
    7.ECHO 1.YELLOW
    2.AMBER
    8.TRAILS3.GREEN
    1.SKY
    9.OWN TRACK
    1.SKY
    0.

    16

    EXIT

    Select the dial color from the pull-down menu, select 1
    through 3 with the trackball, then left-click.

    3-28





  • Page 101

    ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●

    17 Left-click the selection section (combo box) of ECHO.
    7.ECHO will be selected and the following pull-down menu will appear.



    SUB2 MENU
    COLOR
    1.DAY/NIGHT
    1.DAY
    2.SYSTEM
    1.BLUE1
    3.OUTER PPI
    1.BLACK
    4.INNER PPI
    1.BLACK
    5.CHARACTER
    1.WHITE
    6.DIAL 1.WHITE
    7.ECHO 1.YELLOW
    8.TRAILS1.YELLOW
    1.SKY
    2.GREEN
    3.AMBER
    9.OWN TRACK
    1.SKY
    EXIT
    0.

    18

    Select the echo color from the pull-down menu, select 1
    through 3 with the trackball, then left-click.

    3-29



  • Page 102

    ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●

    19 Left-click the selection section (combo box) of TRAILS.
    8.TRAILS will be selected and the following pull-down menu will appear.

    SUB2 MENU
    COLOR
    1.DAY/NIGHT
    1.DAY
    2.SYSTEM
    1.BLUE1
    3.OUTER PPI
    1.BLACK
    4.INNER PPI
    1.BLACK
    5.CHARACTER
    1.WHITE
    6.DIAL 1.WHITE
    7.ECHO 1.YELLOW
    8.TRAILS
    1.SKY
    9.OWN TRACK
    1.SKY
    2.WHITE
    1.SKY
    3.GREEN
    EXIT
    0.

    20

    Select the radar trails colors from the pull-down menu, select
    1 through 3 with the trackball, then left-click.

    3-30





  • Page 103

    ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●

    21 Left-click the selection section (combo box) of
    OWN TRACK.
    9.OWN TRACK will be selected and the following pull-down menu will appear.



    SUB2 MENU
    COLOR
    1.DAY/NIGHT
    1.DAY
    2.SYSTEM
    1.BLUE1
    3.OUTER PPI
    1.BLACK
    4.INNER PPI
    1.BLACK
    5.CHARACTER
    1.WHITE
    6.DIAL 1.WHITE
    7.ECHO 1.YELLOW
    8.TRAILS
    1.SKY
    9.OWN TRACK
    1.SKY
    1.SKY
    EXIT
    0.
    2.GREEN
    3.WHITE
    4.YELLOW
    5.PINK
    6.BLUE

    22

    Select the own track colors from the pull-down menu, select
    1 through 6 with the trackball, then left-click.

    3-31



  • Page 104

    ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●

    After the colors are adjusted, the following menu will appear.

    SUB2 MENU
    COLOR
    1.DAY/NIGHT
    1.DAY
    2.SYSTEM
    1.BLUE1
    3.OUTER PPI
    1.BLACK
    4.INNER PPI
    1.BLACK
    5.CHARACTER
    1.WHITE
    6.DIAL 1.WHITE
    7.ECHO 1.YELLOW
    8.TRAILS
    1.SKY
    9.OWN TRACK
    1.SKY
    EXIT

    0.

    The menu display after adjustment shows the colors set for
    indiviual items.

    Exit

    1

    Click

    EXIT .

    The Sub2 Menu will reappear.

    2

    Click

    EXIT .

    The Sub2 Menu will be closed.

    3-32





  • Page 105

    ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●

    .......Radar Interference Rejection【IR】・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・
    Procedures

    IR . This switch selects ON/OFF.

    Left-click the

    ○ When setting from the menu
    1 Click MENU .
    The Main Menu will appear.



    2

    Click "ON" radio button of

    IR .

    “ON”in“1.IR”will be set.
    Then, the mark
    IR at the lower left of the radar display will be shown and
    the radar interference in turned on.
    MAIN MENU
    1.IR
    OFF
    ON
    2.TGT ENH
    ON
    OFF
    3.PROCESS
    2.PROC1
    4.FUNCTION
    1.FUNC OFF
    5.EBL1
    OFFSET
    CENTER
    6.EBL2
    CENTER
    OFFSET
    DATA OFF
    7.

    Cancellation

    1

    8.

    SUB1 MENU

    9.

    CODE INPUT

    0.

    EXIT

    Click "OFF" radio button of

    IR

    .

    “OFF”in“1.IR”is set and the radar interference rejector turned off.

    Exit

    1

    Click EXIT .
    The Main Menu will be closed.

    Attention
    When watching a radar beacon or a SART signal, set the following parameter to
    suppress the video.
    IR OFF (Interference Rejecter OFF).

    3-33



  • Page 106

    ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●

    3.4

    BASIC OPERATIONS

    Move Cross Cursor Mark [+] by Trackball・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・
    Trackball

    Trackball section
    left button



    Trackball section
    right button

    Sclool button
    No used

    The cross cursor mark [+] is used for position designation and other purposes in various operating
    procedures. The cross cursor mark [+] moves in conjunction with the trackball. If the trackball is
    rotated up and down or left and right, the cross cursor mark follows the movements of the trackball.
    The distance and bearing between own ship and the cross cursor mark [+] are indicated on the
    upper right of the radar display. Before operating other controls and switches, the operator must be
    familiar with manipulation of the trackball and the movements of the cross cursor mark. When
    rotating the trackball, the cross cursor mark [+] will not move if the palm is apart from the hand
    sensor section. Approach the palm to the hand sensor section and operate the trackball.
    When making a menu or button selection, the "+" cursor will change to
    Click:

    .

    In this manual, "clicking" refers to pressing the trackball button.
    Left-button = This is called "left-clicking".

    Methods for Setting Menu Items with the Trackball・・・・・・・・・・
    In addition to the method for setting menu items with the switches, the trackball can also be used to
    set menu items in almost the same manner as with the control panel.
    There are several methods for setting an item in a menu with the trackball.

    3-34



  • Page 107

    ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●

    [Ⅰ] Change the Setting of Radio Button Type
    When an item has alternative selections, for example, ON and OFF, radio buttons are
    provided to set the item in many menu items.



    ON

    OFF

    When the current item is set in the OFF position as shown in Figure ①,





    ON

    OFF

    Move the arrow cursor to the ON position with the trackball.



    ON

    OFF

    With the arrow cursor on the ON position, press the left button of the trackball.



    ON

    OFF

    The Setting will change from OFF to ON.
    When changing from ON to OFF, operate in the same manner.

    3-35



  • Page 108

    ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●

    [Ⅱ] Changing the Setting of Pull-down Menu
    This method is used when there are three or more selections:



    When PROC1 is set as shown below:

    2. PROC1


    Move the arrow cursor to the position that is shown below (downward triangle).

    2. PROC1







    Set the cursor on the item to be selected and press the left-button on the trackball.

    3. PROC2
    1. OFF
    2. PROC1
    3. PROC2
    4. PROC3




    Move the cursor with the trackball.

    2. PROC1
    1. OFF
    2. PROC1
    3. PROC2
    4. PROC3


    as shown below and press the left button

    The pull-down menu will appear and selection items are displayed in the menu.

    2. PROC1
    1. OFF
    2. PROC1
    3. PROC2
    4. PROC3







    Set the arrow cursor on the position in Figure
    on the trackball.

    2. PROC1







    The pull-down menu will be closed and the setting is established.

    3. PROC2


    3-36



  • Page 109

    ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●

    [Ⅲ] Changing the Setting of Pull-down Menu
    This method can be used in most of boxes where a numeric value is to be entered.

    ① 0.0-100.0kts

    10.0

    When the value is set as shown in the figure ①:
    The minimum and maximum (min-max) are displayed on the left side and the unit is also
    displayed if present.



    ② 0.0-100.0kts

    10.0

    To increase the value, move the arrow cursor to the position in the figure ② (upward
    triangle) with the trackball.

    ③ 0.0-100.0kts

    10.0

    With the arrow cursor on the position in the figure ②, click the trackball section left button
    once.

    ④ 0.0-100.0kts

    10.1

    The value will be increase in the minimum step.

    ⑤ To increase the value continuously:
    Hold down th trackball section left button in the figure ③.

    ⑥ To decrease the value:
    Move the arrow cursor to the downward triangle in the figure ②.
    The following procedures are the same as for increasing.

    3-37



  • Page 110

    ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●

    [Ⅳ] Changing the Setting of Pull-down Menu
    This method is used when a number of items have alternative selections of ON and OF in
    one menu. (In this case, only one item is presented.)



    NAV LINE
    The status in the figure ① means that the item is OFF.





    NAV LINE
    Move the arrow cursor to the position in the figure ② withe the trackball.



    NAV LINE
    With the arrow cursor on the position in the figure ②, press the trackball section left
    button.



    NAV LINE
    A check mark will appear in the checkbox and the funcrion will be turned on.

    ⑤ To turn off the function:
    With the checkbox and arrow cursor position as shown in the fibure ④, press the
    trackball section left button.

    3-38



  • Page 111

    ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●

    [Ⅴ] Switch Type
    This method is used, for example, in switching the current menu to the next.



    SUB1 MENU
    A menu has an item as presented in the figure ①.





    SUB1 MENU
    Move the arrow cursor to the position in the figure ② with the trackball.



    SUB1 MENU
    With the arrow cursor over
    button.

    SUB1 MENU

    , press the trackball section left

    ④ The Sub1 Menu will appear.
    * In some selections of this type, the key color will change in the step ② entering a
    certain mode.
    To reset the setting, select the same item again.
    Example: Select NAV/MAP INFO Menu "SHIFT".
    NAV SHIFT mode

    3-39



  • Page 112

    ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●

    [Ⅵ] Vertical Scroll Type
    The display is scrolled vertically.
    This method is mainly used for functions such as display of a stored file.


    ****
    ***
    **







    The vertical scrollbar is provided in a menu as shown in the figure ①.


    ****
    ***
    **







    When scrolling the display, move the arrow cursor to the position in the figure (upward
    triangle) with the trackball.


    ****
    ***
    **







    With the arrow cursor on the position in the figure ②, click the trackball section left
    button.


    ***
    **
    ******




    Scroll to
    Upper item.

    the



    ⑤ To scroll continuously the display upward:
    Hold down the trackball section left button on the trackball in the figure ③.

    ⑥ To scroll the display downward:
    Move teh arrow cursor to the downward triangle in the figure ②.
    The following procedures are the same as for the upward scroll.
    3-40





  • Page 113

    ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●

    Use EBLs (Electronic Bearing Lines)・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・
    The EBLs (Electronic Bearing Lines) are indispensable to measure distances and bearings of
    targets.
    Before operation, the operator must become familiar with the operation of EBLs.



    EBL1 Operation
    If EBL2 is selected, press

    to select EBL1 before operation. (The currently selected EBL is

    indicated by selected characters in the lower right of the radar display.)

    Procedures

    1

    Press
    EBL1 will be displayed
    in reverse video.

    Press
    EBL1 will disappear.

    3-41



  • Page 114

    ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●

    EBL2 Operation
    If EBL1 is selected, press
    is

    to select EBL2 before operation. (The currently selected EBL

    indicated by characters in the lower right of the radar display.)

    Procedures

    1

    Press
    EBL2 will be displayed
    in reverse video.

    Press
    EBL2 will disappear.

    EBL Bearing Display
    The bearing values of EBL1 and EBLL2 currently displayed within the PPI video
    are indicated at the lower right of the radar display. For the currently operable
    EBL, the characters EBL1 or EBL2 are displayed in reverse video.

    Starting Point of EBL
    The starting point of the currently operating EBL can be changed over to the
    center of the radar display (CENTER) or to any offset position (OFFSET).

    Note: For OFFSET of the EBL’s starting point, it is possible to determine whether the
    starting point is fixed at the specific latitude and longitude.

    3-42





  • Page 115

    ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●

    Set Floating EBL・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・
    To offset the starting point of EBL1 during its operation:
    EBL1 T0370°C
    Click the right figure C.
    ・Use the trackball to move the starting point of "EBL1".
    ・The starting point can be fixed by clicking the left trackball button.
    When adjusting from the menu,
    MAIN MENU



    1.IR

    [Ⅰ] Click MENU .
    The Main Menu will appear.

    Click “5.EBL1”.
    “OFFSET”in“5.EBL1”will be set.

    Move the starting point of EBL1 with the trackball.
    Click the trackball section left button to fix the starting point
    of EBL1.

    To reset the starting point of EBL1 to the center of the radar
    display.

    OFF
    ON
    2.TUNE
    ON
    OFF
    3.PROCESS
    2.PROC1
    4.FUNCTION
    1.FUNC OFF
    5.EBL1
    OFFSET
    CENTER
    6.EBL2
    CENTER
    OFFSET
    DATA OFF
    7.
    8.

    SUB1 MENU

    9.

    CODE INPUT

    0.

    EXIT

    Click “5.EBL1”.
    “CENTER”in“5.EBL1”will be set.

    Click 0.EBL .
    The Main Menu will be closed.

    [Ⅱ]

    Continue to press

    also allow you to set the starting point of EBL1.

    Continue to press

    .

    “OFFSET”in“5.EBL1”will be set.

    Continue to press

    .

    “CENTER”in“5.EBL1”will be set.

    Note:For OFFSET of the EBL's starting point, it is possible to determine whether the
    starting point is fixed at specific latitude and longitude.
    3-43



  • Page 116

    ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●

    To offset the starting point of EBL2 during its operation:
    MAIN MENU

    [Ⅰ] Click MENU .
    1.IR

    The Main Menu will appear.

    Click “6.EBL2”.
    “OFFSET”in“6.EBL2”will be set.

    Move the starting point of EBL2 with the trackball.
    Click the trackball section left button to fix the starting point
    of EBL2.

    To reset the starting point of EBL2 to the center of the radar
    display.

    OFF
    ON
    2.TGT ENH
    ON
    OFF
    3.PROCESS
    2.PROC1
    4.FUNCTION
    1.FUNC OFF
    5.EBL1
    OFFSET
    CENTER
    6.EBL2
    CENTER
    OFFSET
    DATA OFF
    7.
    8.

    SUB1 MENU

    9.

    CODE INPUT

    0.

    EXIT

    Click “6.EBL2”.
    “CENTER”in“6.EBL2”will be set.

    Click 0.EBL .
    The Main Menu will be closed.

    [Ⅱ]

    Continue to press

    also allow you to set the starting point of EBL2.

    Continue to press

    .

    “OFFSET”in“6.EBL2”will be set.

    Continue to press

    .

    “CENTER”in“6.EBL2”will be set.

    3-44





  • Page 117

    ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●

    Set Floating EBL・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・
    When this function is turned on and the starting point of EBL is moved to a position, the starting
    point can be fixed at the latitude and longitude of that position. This function is effective when the
    bearing from a certain point is repeatedly measured.
    With this function OFF, the starting point of EBL is pasted on the radar display. When own ship is
    moved, the starting point will remain at the same point on the display.



    Procedures

    1

    Select in the following order:
    "MENU","MENU","SETTING1","SETTING2".
    The SETTING2 Menu will appear.

    2

    Click EBL OFFSET ORIGIN.
    The EBL OFFSET ORIGIN menu will appear.

    [I] Setting the Mode when the EBL1 Starting Point is Moved
    1

    Perform the operating procedure 1 .
    The EBL OFFSET ORIGIN Menu will appear.
    “EBL1 L/L FIX” is set to the initial mode “OFF”.
    When the EBL1 starting point is moved, the
    starting point of EBL1 will remain at the set
    position on the radar display.

    2

    SETTING2
    EBL OFFSET ORIGIN
    1.EBL1 L/L FIX
    OFF
    ON
    2.EBL2 L/L FIX
    OFF
    ON

    Select the "ON" radio button.
    “EBL1 L/L FIX” will switch from “OFF” to “ON”.
    When the EBL1 starting point is moved to
    another position, the starting point of EBL1 will
    be fixed at the latitude and longitude on that
    position.

    3

    Select "OFF".
    Place the cursor over the "OFF" radio button,
    and left-click.
    0.

    3-45

    EXIT



  • Page 118

    ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●

    [II]

    Setting the Mode when the EBL2 Starting Point is Moved
    1

    Perform the operating procedure 1
    and 2.
    The EBL OFFSET ORIGIN Menu will appear.
    “EBL2 L/L FIX” is set to the initial mode “OFF”.
    When the EBL2 starting point is moved, the
    starting point of EBL2 will remain at the set
    position on the radar display.

    2

    SETTING2
    EBL OFFSET ORIGIN
    1.EBL1 L/L FIX
    OFF
    ON
    2.EBL2 L/L FIX
    OFF
    ON



    Select the "ON" radio button.
    “EBL2 L/L FIX” will switch from “OFF” to “ON”.
    When the EBL2 starting point is moved to another
    position, the starting point of EBL2 will be fixed at
    the latitude and longitude on that position.

    3

    Left-click the "OFF" radio button.
    The setting will switch from “ON” to “OFF”.
    0.

    Exit

    1

    EXIT

    Click EXIT .
    The SETTING2 Menu will reappear.

    2

    Click EXIT .
    The SETTING2 Menu will be closed.

    Notes • The course data and the own ship’s latitude and longitude data are required
    to activate this function.
    • With this function ON, the starting point will be returned to the center if the
    starting point of EBL is moved to outside the radar display.

    3-46



  • Page 119

    ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●

    Select Range [RANGE]・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・
    Range scale (NM)

    - 12 +
    2



    Range marker (NM)
    Any range scale is selectable from 0.125, 0.25, 0.5, 0.75, 1.5, 3, 6, 12, 24, 48, and 96 (or 120)
    nautical
    miles. Pressing
    decreases the range and pressing
    increases the range in each
    step. The selected range scale is indicated at the upper left of the display together with the range
    ring interval with it.

    Set Maximum Range・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・
    The maximum range available may be set to 96nm or 120nm.

    Procedures

    1

    Select in the following order:
    "MENU","MENU","1.SETTING1".
    The SETTING1 menu will appear.

    2

    Select radio button of "8.RANGE
    SELECT".
    Each time this switch is pressed, the
    maximum range is changed between 96 nm or
    120 nm.

    Note: When the maximum range is set to 120nm, the next
    range of 48nm is 120nm and so the range of 96nm
    cannot be selected.

    Exit

    1

    Click EXIT .
    The Sub1 Menu will reappear.

    2

    Click EXIT .
    The Sub1 Menu will be closed.

    3-47

    SUB1 MENU
    SETTING1
    1.SET GYRO
    0.0
    0.0-359.9゜
    2.SELECT SPEED
    2.1AXIS
    3.

    SET MANUAL SPEED

    4.

    SELECT NAV

    5.

    SET/DRIFT

    6.

    TIME/DAY

    7.PRF
    2.HIGH
    8.RANGE SELECT
    96nm
    120nm
    9.

    SETTING2

    0.

    EXIT



  • Page 120

    ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●

    Select Pulse Length・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・
    Place the cursor over the

    SP , and left-click.

    The transmission pulse length can be changed over in three levels (『 SP』, 『
    MP』, and

    LP』) every time the [PL] switch is pressed. The selected pulse length is indicated at the
    upper left of the radar display. The pulse length can be changed only when the range is set to one
    of 0.75, 1.5, 3, and 6 and 12NM. If 『
    SP』 is selected, the range resolution increases, making
    small targets clearer. If 『
    LP』 is selected, the range resolution decreases, but the sensitivity
    increases, making small targets larger with higher definition.

    Select Bearing Display Mode [AZI MODE]・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・
    The bearing presentation mode is changed over in the order of [NORTH UP] (true bearing), [HEAD
    UP] (relative bearing), and [COURSE UP] (course-up bearing) mode every time the [AZI MODE]
    switch is pressed. When the currently selected mode is North-up or Course-up, it will be changed
    over to Head-up by pressing this switch, and to another mode by pressing this switch once again.
    (Example) RM H UP→PM N UP→RM C UP→RM H UP

    H

    UP

    N

    UP

    C

    UP

    The Bearing Mode [NORTH UP]
    The video is displayed so that the zenith of the PPI (0° on range rings) points to the
    due north. Fixed targets do not flicker and are easily identified on a chart, and the
    true bearing of a target can readily be read out.

    Relative Bearing Mode [HEAD UP]
    The video is displayed so that the ship’s heading line points to the zenith of the PPI
    (0° on range rings). Since targets are displayed in their directions relative to the
    ship’s heading line, the operator can watch the video in the same field of view as in
    operating the ship at sea.
    This mode is suitable for ocean sailing and for watching over other ships.

    3-48





  • Page 121

    ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●

    Course-Up Mode [COURSE UP]
    By pressing this switch, the ship’s heading line is fixed pointing to the zenith of the
    PPI (0° on range rings). In the same way as in the North-up mode, fixed targets do
    not flicker, but are stabilized even if the ship is yawing. The bearing of the heading
    line varies by the same shift of own ship’s course. If the course is changed, the
    heading line can be reset to the Course-up mode by pressing the switch several
    times.

    North

    North


    North-up Mode

    Head-up Mode

    Course-up Mode

    Cancel Ship’s Heading Line [HL OFF]・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・
    HL
    OFF

    HL OFF

    The ship’s heading line (HL) that presents the course of own ship is always displayed on the radar
    display. The heading line is canceled while this switch is being pressed, so that the targets on the
    heading lines can be seen easily.

    Cancel All Display Items Except HL and Cross Cursor Mark
    [+] [DATA OFF]・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・
    All display information such ARPA vectors, symbols and navigation data may be cancelled
    temporarily by the following operations, except VRMs, EBLs, HL, cross cursor mark [+] and range
    rings.

    Procedures

    1

    Click MENU on the screen.
    The MAIN Menu will appear.

    3-49



  • Page 122

    ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●

    2

    MAIN MENU

    Click DATA OFF .
    All the display items except radar display,
    VRMs, EBLs, HL, cross cursor mark [+] and
    range rings will disappear from the radar
    display.

    Cancellation

    1

    Click DATA OFF .
    7.DATA OFF will be reset and, the
    information temporarily cancelled will
    reappear.

    Exit

    1

    1.IR
    OFF
    ON
    2.TUNE
    ON
    OFF
    3.PROCESS
    2.PROC1
    4.FUNCTION
    1.FUNC OFF
    5.EBL1
    OFFSET
    CENTER
    6.EBL2
    CENTER
    OFFSET
    DATA OFF
    7.

    Click EXIT .

    8.

    SUB1 MENU

    The Main Menu will be closed.

    9.

    CODE INPUT

    0.

    EXIT

    Display PI(Parallel Index Lines )[PI]・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・
    Parallel index lines can be displayed in a semicircular area.

    Procedures

    1

    Click the

    PI

    on the screen.
    PI

    The PI Menu will appear.

    2

    Select "ON" radio button of "1.IR".
    “ON” in “1.MODE” will be set and parallel
    index lines will appear on the radar display.
    The direction of PI will be changed by rotating
    the [EBL] control, and the line intervals will be
    changed by rotating the [VRM] control.

    1.MODE
    OFF

    ON
    EXIT

    0.

    PI
    **.* °
    INTERVAL
    * * . * nm

    Cancellation

    1

    Select “OFF” of “1.MODE”.
    “OFF” in “1.MODE” will be set and the PI will
    disappear on the radar display.

    Exit

    1

    Click EXIT .
    The PI Menu will be closed.

    3-50





  • Page 123

    ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●

    Note: The bearing of the parallel index lines that are displayed in the PI menu
    represents the true value when the bearing display of the radar reads N UP or C
    UP and the relative value when it reads H UP.

    Operation of Parallel Index Lines



    ◎ Rotate the PL (Parallel Index Lines) in the same direction of rotating the [EBL] control
    (① and ②).
    ◎ The interval of the PI can be decreased as The [VRM] control is rotated anticlockwise
    (③ and increased as the [VRM] control is rotated anticlockwise (④).
    ◎ The rotation and interval of the PI are controlled effectively only from the PI Menu.
    When the PI Menu is closed, the parallel index lines are fixed.
    ◎ Repeat the above procedures from the first step to move the PI again.

    Display of Parallel Index Lines

    ◎ Click

    PI

    , and the PI Menu will be closed and the PI will be fixed.

    Press any of

    ,

    ,

    , and

    The PI will be fixed and the I Menu will be closed.

    3-51

    .



  • Page 124

    ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●

    Change Relative Motion (RM) Mode to True Motion (TM) Mode
    Procedures

    1

    Click the RM button on the upper left of the screen.
    The Relative Motion mode is changed to the True Motion mode. In the True
    Motion mode, the position of own ship on the display moves depending upon
    its course and speed and the influence of the current. Land and other fixed
    ranges are fixed on the display and only actually moving targets move on the
    radar display. When the True Motion mode is selected, own ship’s position
    will be set to about 66% of the display radius in the opposite direction to its
    course allowing for the influence of the current. Own ship will start moving
    depending upon its course and speed and the influence of the tide.
    Subsequently, when own ship arrives at the position of about 66% of the
    display radius, the ship will be automatically reset to its initial position at about
    65% of the display radius in the opposite direction to its course allowing for the
    influence of the current.

    Fixed on the radar display

    Moving depending on own ship’s speed
    True Motion Display

    Change True Motion (TM) Mode to Relative Motion (RM) Mode.
    Procedures

    1

    Click the TM button on the upper left of the screen.
    The True Motion mode is dhange to the Relative Motion mode.
    One ship nrill be reset to center position.

    3-52





  • Page 125

    ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●

    Move Own Ship’s Display Position [OFF CENTER]・・・・・・・・・・
    Own ship’s position at the display center can be moved to an off-centered position within 66% of the
    display radius. This function is convenient to observe a wide coverage in any direction.

    When the range is 96 (or 120)NM, this function cannot be used.



    OFF

    Procedures

    1

    CENTER

    Click the

    on the upper right of the screen.

    The bold cross cursor mark [+] will appear at the position of own ship on the
    radar display.

    2

    Move the cross cursor mark [+] (own ship’s position) to
    another position with the trackball.

    3

    Press the left button of the trackball.
    The own ship’s position will move to the position of the cross cursor mark [+],
    where it will be fixed.

    Press the left button of the
    trackball .

    Return Own Ship’s Position to the Center
    OFF

    Procedures

    1

    Click the

    CENTER

    on the upper right of the screen.

    3-53



  • Page 126

    ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●

    Display Other Ship’s Trails [TRAILS]・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・
    Other ship’s movement and speed can be monitored from the length and direction of its trail, serving
    for collision avoidance. The trail length can be changed over 4 levels of 0.5 min, 1 min, 3 min, and
    6 min.

    Procedures

    Click

    OFF

    The level 0.5min will be selected and “TRAIL 0.5min”
    will appear at the lower left of the radar display.
    The trails (of 0.5 min long) will appear after other ship’s symbols.

    Click

    0.5min

    The level 1min will be selected and “TRAIL 1min” will appear at
    the lower left of the radar display.
    The trails (of 1 min long) will appear after other ship’s symbols.

    Click

    1min

    The level 3min will be selected and “TRAIL 3min” will appear at
    the lower left of the radar display.
    The trails (of 3 min long) will appear after other ship’s symbols.

    Click

    3min

    The level 6min will be selected and “TRAIL 6min” will appear at
    the lower left of the radar display.
    The trails (of 6 min long) will appear after other ship’s symbols.

    Click

    6min

    “TRAIL OFF” will appear at the lower left of the radar display and
    the trails of other ships will disappear.

    Trail

    Other ship

    3-54





  • Page 127

    ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●

    Display Own Ship’s Tracks and Own Symbols [OWN TRACK]
    In the case that Any Navigation Equipment is Connected to This System
    When navigation equipment is connected, the own ship’s track data of up to 1024 points that is
    sent from the equipment can be stored and displayed. The data storage interval can be set
    over 4 levels, 3 minutes (distance that the own ship moves within 3 minutes), 10 minutes, 15
    minutes, and 30 minutes.



    Procedures

    The setting can be changed by
    left-clicking the button on the lower left
    of the screen (right figure①).

    GAIN
    SEA AUTO

    RAIN
    TRACK 3min
    TRAILS 0.5min T
    PROC PROC1

    ○ When setting from the mune:
    1

    Click the MENU button on the screen.
    The Main Menu will appear.

    SUB1 MENU
    TRACK

    2

    Click SUB1 MENU .
    The Sub1 Menu will appear.

    3

    Click TRACK .

    1.TRACK
    OFF

    ON

    2.INTERVAL TIME
    1. 3min
    3.

    CLR ALL

    The TRACK Menu will appear.

    4

    Select "ON" radio button of "1.IR".
    “ON”in“1.TRACK”will be set and own ship's
    past track originated its current position will
    appear. The current storage time interval will
    appear at lower left on the radar display.

    0.

    Cancellation

    1

    EXIT

    Select "OFF" radio button of "1.IR".
    “OFF”in“1.TRACK”will be set and own ship's track and the storage time interval
    will disappear.

    3-55



  • Page 128

    ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●

    In Case of Changing Storage Time Interval

    Procedures

    1

    2

    Repeat the above procedure up to
    Step 3.
    Click INTERVAL .

    3

    Select the interval time in the
    pull-down menu, select 1 through
    4 with the trackball, then left-click.

    1

    Click EXIT .
    The Sub1 Menu will reappear.

    2

    TRACK
    1.TRACK
    OFF

    2.INTERVAL TIME will be selected and the
    pull-down menu will appear.

    Exit

    SUB1 MENU

    Click EXIT .
    The Sub1 Menu will be closed.

    3-56

    ON

    2.INTERVAL TIME
    1. 3min
    1. 3min
    3.
    CLR ALL
    2. 10min
    3. 15min
    4. 30min

    0.

    EXIT





  • Page 129

    ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●

    Clear Own Ship’s Track Storage

    Procedures

    1

    Repeat the procedures of changing storage time interval of
    own ship up to step 1.
    SUB1 MENU
    TRACK

    2



    Click CLR ALL .
    CLR ALL will be selected. When clearing all
    the past track, click 1.YES to the question
    “CLR ALL OK?”. If 2.NO is clicked, all the
    track will be cleared.

    1.TRACK
    OFF

    ON

    2.INTERVAL TIME
    1. 3min
    3.

    CLR ALL
    CLR ALL OK?
    1.

    Exit

    1

    YES

    2.

    Click EXIT .
    The Sub1 Menu will reappear.

    2

    Click EXIT .
    The Sub1 Menu will be closed.

    3-57

    0.

    EXIT

    NO



  • Page 130

    ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●

    Marking [MARK]・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・
    A maximum of 20 marks can be displayed at arbitrary positions on the radar video.
    A mark created on the display holds the latitude and longitude.



    [I]

    Procedures

    Plotting Marks.

    1

    CURSOR(

    )

    Place the cursor over the upper right section of the screen
    (right figure), then right-click. Next, select "MARK".
    MARK will appear in the CURSOR( ) at the upper left of the radar display.

    2

    Put the cross cursor mark [ + ] on the position where the [□]
    mark is inserted.

    3

    Press trackball section left button.
    The cross cursor mark [ + ] will be changed into the [□] mark and fixed on the
    radar display. When entering more [□] marks, repeat the procedures from step
    2. Up to 20 marks can be entered.

    Note: If more than 20 marks are created, the oldest mark is cleared and the newly
    created mark is displayed.



    [II]

    Procedures

    Clearing Marks

    1

    CURSOR(

    )

    Place the cursor over the upper right section of the screen
    (right figure), then right-click. Next, select "MARK".
    MARK is displayed on CURSOR(

    ) at the upper right of the radar display.

    2

    Put the cross cursor mark [ + ] on the position where the [□]
    mark is inserted.

    3

    Press trackball section right button.
    The [□] mark will disappear. When clearing another [□] mark, repeat the
    procedure from step 2.

    3-58





  • Page 131

    ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●

    Display Range Rings [RANGE RINGS]・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・
    The range rings will appear.



    Procedures

    1



    Press the switch section (section
    indicated by the arrow in the right
    figure) of the fixed distance scale on
    upper left of the screen.

    6




    RM HUP the

    The range rings will appear and the interval of
    the range rings will be digitally indicated at the
    upper left of the radar display.

    Cancellation

    1

    When the fixed distance scale is displayed, press the switch
    on the right figure.
    The range rings will disappear.

    Display Variable Range Markers [VRM1/VRM2]・・・・・・・・・・・・・
    This function is to display and set up variable range marks (VRMs). Two VRMs are available.
    VRM1 is represented as a broken line and VRM2 as a dotted line. When EBL1 is displayed, VRM1
    marker appears on the EBL1. When EBL2 is displayed, VRM2 marker appears on the EBL2. If
    the starting point of an EBL is offset, the center of a VRM marker is positioned at the starting point of
    the EBL.

    VRM markers presented on EBL
    ●Mark: VRM1
    ○Mark: VRM2

    VRM1

    EBL1

    VRM2

    EBL1,VRM1:

    EBL2

    EBL2,VRM2:

    3-59



  • Page 132

    ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●

    VRM1 Operation
    If VRM2 is selected, press

    to select VRM1 before operation.

    (The currently selected VRM is displayed in reverse video at the lower right of the radar
    display.)

    Procedures

    1

    Press
    VRM1 will be selected.

    Press
    VRM1 will disappear.

    VRM2 Operation
    If VRM1 is selected, press

    to select VRM2 before operation.

    (The currently selected VRM is displayed in reverse video at the lower right of the radar
    display.)

    Procedures

    1

    Press
    VRM2 will be selected.

    Press
    VRM2 will disappear.

    VRM Range Display
    The values of the VRM1 and VRM2 that are currently displayed on the PPI will be
    indicated on the lower left of the radar display.
    The VRM1 or VRM2 that is currently operable will be selected close to its range value.

    VRM Operation
    The variable range markers are displayed centering on the own ship. When rotating the
    [VRM] control clockwise, the VRM will be larger. When rotating the [VRM] control
    counterclockwise, the VRM will be smaller.

    3-60





  • Page 133

    ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●

    Set Guard Zones [GUARD ZONE]・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・
    A fan-shape guard zone can be set up to keep a watch over the intrusion of other ships or targets, or
    to automatically acquire other ships that have intruded into the zone.
    By left-clicking the "GZ1, 2" section on the screen, it is possible to set on or off.
    In this case, the zone that was set the previous time will be turned on.



    [I]

    Creation of Fan-shaped Guard zone

    Procedures

    1

    Click

    GZ

    .
    GUARD ZONE

    The GUARD ZONE Menu will appear.

    2

    Select “ON” of “GUARD ZONE1” to
    create a guard zone 1 and “GUARD
    ZONE2” to create a guard zone 2.
    When Guard Zone 1 and 2 are set, “ON” will
    set.

    3

    Click MAKE GZ1 to create GUARD
    ZONE1.

    4

    Click MAKE GZ2 to create GUARD
    ZONE2.
    The cursor will move to the echo display
    section.

    1.GUARD ZONE1(GZ1)
    OFF
    ON
    2.GUARD ZONE2(GZ2)
    ON
    OFF
    MAKE GZ1
    (0.5NM-32NM)
    MAKE GZ2
    4.
    (0.5NM-32NM)
    3.

    5.SET ACQ AUTO KEY
    1.GZ1

    0.

    EXIT

    Note: Guard Zones 1 or 2 can be set in any area within a range of 0.5 to 32
    NM.

    5

    Use the [VRM] and [EBL] knobs to place VRM and EBL over
    the starting point of the guard zone, then left click the cursor.
    The starting point of the guard zone will be set.

    6

    Move the EBL to make fan-shaped zone enclosed by the
    current cross cursor position.
    Left-click when a desired guard zone is made.
    The shape of the guard zone will be set up.
    (The width of a guard zone is fixed to 0.5NM).

    3-61



  • Page 134

    ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●

    Exit

    1

    Click EXIT or GZ .
    The Guard Zone Menu will be closed.

    HL
    Check with the first [ENT] key.


    Check with the second [ENT] key.

    Operation of Guard Zones
    When a target appears within a fan-shaped guard zone, an alarm will sound and a mark
    ▽ will appear on the target. The track mode becomes effective after about 1 min.
    In creating a guard zone, a circular guard ring may be created if the start and end points
    of the guard zone are set to the same point by omitting step 5 above.
    The guard zone is displayed only during radar transmission, but also not appear during
    the standby operation.

    [II]

    Clearing Guard Zones from Radar Display

    Procedures

    Left-click the switch "GZ1, 2" on the screen and the guard zone.

    ○To turn this off from the menu,
    GUARD ZONE

    1

    Execute the procedures for [Ⅰ]
    Creation of Fan-shaped Guard
    Zone up to step 2.

    1.GUARD ZONE1(GZ1)
    OFF
    ON
    2.GUARD ZONE2(GZ2)
    ON
    OFF
    MAKE GZ1
    (0.5NM-32NM)
    MAKE GZ2
    4.
    (0.5NM-32NM)
    3.

    The GUARD ZONE Menu will appear.

    2

    Press 1 to clear Guard Zone 1
    from radar display, and press 2 to
    clear Guard Zone 2.
    “OFF”will be set for Guard Zone 1 or 2,
    which will be cleared from radar display.

    Exit

    1

    Execute the Exit step in the same
    procedures for [Ⅰ] Creation of
    Fan-shaped Guard Zone.
    3-62

    0.

    EXIT



  • Page 135

    ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●

    Reset Alarm Buzzer [ALARM ACK]・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・
    ALARM ACK is the function of acknowledging the alarm item when an alarm sounds and stopping
    an alarm sound as well as canceling flickering display. (If there are two or more alarms, it is
    necessary to operate the switch for each alarm indication.) The alarm sound can be stopped, but
    the alarm indication is not cancelled.

    Stopping Alarm Sound



    Procedures

    1

    Press

    ALARM
    ACK

    .

    Or left-click the alarm display area on the screen.
    The alarm sound will be stopped.

    Set Alarm Sound Level・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・
    This function sets the sound and volume level of the alarm (alarm sound) to be delivered from the
    keyboard.

    Setting Alarm Sound level

    Procedures

    1

    Click the MENU on the screen.
    The Main Menu will appear.

    SUB1 MENU
    LEVEL

    2

    Click SUB1 MENU .
    The Sub1 Menu will appear.

    3

    Click LEVEL .
    The LEVEL Menu will be selected.

    4

    Click BUZZER .
    5.BUZZER will be selected and the pull-down
    menu will appear.

    5

    Select any level from 1 to 7 for
    BUZZER volume level in the
    pull-down and click it.

    3-63

    1.RANGE RINGS
    4.LEVEL4
    2.VRM
    4.LEVEL4
    3.EBL
    4.LEVEL4
    4.CHARACTER
    4.LEVEL4
    5.VIDEO(ECHO)
    4.LEVEL4
    6.ARPA
    5.LEVEL4
    7.BUZZER
    7.LEVEL7
    1.LEVEL1
    2.LEVEL2
    3.LEVEL3
    EXIT
    4.LEVEL4
    0.
    5.LEVEL5
    6.LEVEL6
    7.LEVEL7



  • Page 136

    ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●

    Exit

    1

    Click EXIT .
    The Sub1 Menu will reappear.

    2

    Click EXIT .
    The Sub1 Menu will be closed.

    Note: Changing the “LEVEL”of the buzzer will cause the levels of all the
    alarms to be changed as well as the key touch sound.
    The level of any alarm cannot be set to 0 as well as the key touch
    sound.

    3-64





  • Page 137

    ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●

    FUNCTION・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・
    FUNCTION is a function of setting the process suited for each condition during navigation to
    enhance the target detection performance.



    Setting items: The following nodes can be switched over.
    FUNC1: Effective in observing the echoes on short ranges.
    FUNC2: Effective in observing the echoes on long ranges.
    FUNC3: Effective in observing the echoes in rough weather.
    FUNC4: Set by service personnel. The initial setting is the same as FUNC1.
    FUNC5: Set by service personnel. The initial setting is the same as FUNC1.

    Procedures

    1

    Click the MENU on the screen.
    The Main Menu will appear.

    2

    Click FUNCTION.
    4.FUNCTION will be selected and the
    pull-down menu will appear.

    3

    Select a desired process setting
    item from the click.
    The process setting item will be changed and
    the current setting state will appear at the
    lower right of the radar display.

    4

    Exit

    1

    For changing the setting item, open
    the pull-down menu in step 2 above
    again and select a desired process
    setting item.

    MAIN MENU
    1.IR
    OFF
    ON
    2.TGT ENH
    ON
    OFF
    3.PROCESS
    2.PROC1
    4.FUNCTION
    1.FUNC OFF
    5.EBL11.FUNC OFF
    2.FUNC1 OFFSET
    CENTER
    6.EBL23.FUNC2
    4.FUNC3 OFFSET
    CENTER
    5.FUNC4
    DATA OFF
    7.
    6.FUNC5
    SUB1 MENU
    8.
    9.

    DEGAUSS

    0.

    EXIT

    Click EXIT .
    The Main Menu will be closed.

    Cancellation

    1

    Execute the procedures to function up to step 2.
    4.FUNCTION will be selected and the pull-down menu will appear.

    2

    Click EXIT .
    1.FUNC OFF will be set and “FUNC OFF” will appear the lower right of the
    radar display.

    3-65



  • Page 138

    ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●

    The process setting items of FUNC4 and FUNC5 can be changed by service personnel.

    Setting gain of input target signal (sensitivity preset)

    Setting standard value of input target signal (noise level)

    Setting radar interference rejection (IR):IR1 to IR4 (Effective when IR is ON)

    Setting target enhancement (TGT ENH):EXP1 to EXP4 (Effective when TGT ENH is
    ON)

    Setting target processing (PROCESS):MODE1 to MODE8 (Effective when PROCESS
    is ON)

    Setting sensitivity range (Maximum and minimum values)

    Setting sea clutter suppression range (Maximum and minimum values)

    Setting rain/snow clutter suppression range (Maximum and minimum values)

    Note: Do not use FUNC2 and FUNC3 on short ranges. Otherwise, detection of ship targets
    moving high speeds may become poor.
    For FUNC1 to FUNC3, the recommended parameters have been preset by the
    manufacturer, but the preset parameters could no be changed after delivery. In using
    FUNC1 to FUNC3, IR, TGT ENH and PROCESS shall be set to ON (PROC1 to PROC3).

    Expand Targets・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・
    Targets displayed on the radar display can be expanded, regardless of the pulse length selected.

    Procedures

    The "ENH" section at the button left
    of the screen can be clicked to
    change the ON/OFF setting.
    1

    Click MENU.
    The Main Menu will appear.

    2

    Select "ON" radio button of
    TGT ENH .
    “ON”in“2TGT ENH”will be set and“ENH
    ON ”will appear at the lower left of the radar
    display.
    Then, the targets on the radar display will be
    expanded for higher definition.

    Cancellation

    1

    Click MENU.

    2

    Select "ON" radio button of TGT ENH.

    MAIN MENU
    1.IR
    OFF
    ON
    2.TGT ENH
    ON
    OFF
    3.PROCESS
    2.PROC1
    4.FUNCTION
    1.FUNC OFF
    5.EBL1
    OFFSET
    CENTER
    6.EBL2
    CENTER
    OFFSET
    DATA OFF
    7.
    8.

    SUB1 MENU

    9.

    CODE INPUT

    0.

    EXIT

    “OFF” in “2.TGT ENH” will be set and “ENH OFF” will appear at the lower left
    of the radar display.
    The expanded targets on the radar display will be reset to their original sizes.

    Exit

    1

    Click EXIT .
    The Main Menu will be closed.

    3-66





  • Page 139

    ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●

    Display Processed Videos・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・
    Unnecessary noise will be reduced to highlight targets.

    Attention
    In watching a radar beacon mark, SART signal or a fast moving target on the
    radar display, set the system to : PROCESS OFF (Processed Video OFF).
    It is most suitable to use this function in the TM mode.
    In using this function in the RM mode, use it in the NORTH UP or COURSE UP
    mode. In using the function in the HEAD UP mode, the video may be blurred.


    Procedures

    Clicking "PROC" on the screen will change the setting.

    ○ When setting from the menu:
    1

    Click MENU .
    The Main Menu will appear.

    2

    Click the setting section of
    “3.PROCESS”.
    3.PROCESS will be selected and the
    pull-down menu will appear.

    3

    Click a setting from 1 to 4.

    3-1 When “2.PROC1” is selected.
    2.PROC1 will be set and the targets moving
    at high speeds will be selected.

    MAIN MENU
    1.IR
    OFF
    ON
    2.TGT ENH
    ON
    OFF
    3.PROCESS
    2.PROC1
    1.OFF
    4.FUNCTION
    2.PROC1
    1.FUNC OFF
    3.PROC2
    5.EBL1 4.PROC3
    OFFSET
    CENTER
    6.EBL2
    CENTER
    OFFSET
    DATA OFF
    7.
    8.

    SUB1 MENU

    The targets moving at low speeds will be
    darkened.

    9.

    DEGAUSS

    This function is recommendable on the radar
    ranges of 1.5 NM or less.

    0.

    EXIT

    3-2 When “3.PROC2” is selected.
    3.PROC2 will be set.
    This processing speed is in a range between PROC1 and PROC3.

    3-3 When“4.PROC3” is selected.
    4.PROC3 will be set and the targets moving at low speeds will be selected.
    The targets moving at high speeds will be darkened.

    This function is recommendable on the radar ranges of 3 NM
    or more.
    3-67



  • Page 140

    ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●

    Cancellation

    1

    2

    Execute the procedures to display processed videos up to
    step 2.
    Click OFF .
    1.OFF will be set.

    1

    Exit

    Click EXIT .
    The Main Menu will be closed.

    Reduce Radar Interference・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・
    Attention
    In watching a radar mark or SART signal on the radar display, set the system to:
    IR OFF (Radar Interference Rejection OFF)
    This function is used when the interference from other ship's radar is strong.

    By left-clicking the
    button on the lower right of the screen,
    it is possible to set on or off.
    Procedures

    1

    Click MENU.
    The Main Menu will appear.

    2

    Click "ON" radio button of

    IR

    .

    “ON” in “1.IR” will be set and the radar interference rejection will be set to ON to
    reduce radar interference.

    Cancellation

    1
    2

    Click MENU.
    Click "OFF" radio button of

    IR

    .

    “OFF” in “1.IR” will be set and the radar interference rejection will be set to
    OFF.

    Exit

    1

    Click EXIT .
    The Main Menu will be closed.

    3-68





  • Page 141

    ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●

    Personal Information・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・
    The operating status of the radar equipment is recorded. If there are two or more operators to
    operate the radar, each operator can register and recall the operating status that is suitable for the
    operator. The operating status for up to 5 operators and each status can be named (using a
    maximum of 10 alphanumeric characters).



    * Personal Data to be Stored:
    • Bearing mode
    • DAY/NIGHT mode setting
    • Brilliance
    • Alarm level
    • Vector length/mode
    • Various video processing methods (IR, ENH, PROC, and FUNC)

    Recalling Operating Status
    Procedures

    Click the "PIN

    " on the lower right of the screen.

    Open the LOAD menu. Execute the procedure from step 5.

    1

    Click MENU .

    SUB1 MENU

    The Main Menu will appear.

    2

    Click SUB1 MENU .
    The Sub1 Menu will appear.

    3

    PIN
    1.

    LOAD

    2.

    SAVE

    3.

    ERASE

    0.

    EXIT

    Click PIN .
    The PIN Menu will appear.

    4

    Click LOAD .
    The PIN Menu will appear.

    5

    Select any number on the LOAD
    Menu and click any of 1 to 5.
    The registered operating status will be
    recalled.

    6

    Click 1.YES to the question “FILE ERASE OK?” to recall the
    registered operating status.
    Click 2.NO to stop the recall.

    3-69



  • Page 142

    ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●

    SUB1 MENU

    Exit

    1

    Click EXIT .

    PIN
    LOAD

    The PIN Menu will reappear.

    2

    2

    1.

    TOKYO

    Click EXIT .

    2.

    **********

    The Sub1 Menu will reappear.

    3.
    4.

    Click EXIT .
    The Sub1 Menu will be closed.

    Registering Operating Status
    Procedures

    5.


    EXIT

    0.

    1

    Execute the procedures to recalling operating status up to
    step 3.

    2

    Click SAVE .

    SUB1 MENU
    PIN

    The SAVE Menu will appear.

    SAVE

    3

    Click any of 1 to 5 to save the
    operating status item assigned by
    any number 1 to 5.
    The INPUT NME Menu will appear and the
    selected number to save will be set up.

    4

    5

    2.
    3.
    4.
    5.

    Use the trackball to select an
    alphabet character from A to Z that
    is displayed in the menu, press the
    left trackball button, and input one
    character or one number of the
    name used for saving.
    A maximum of 10 characters can be entered.

    TOKYO

    1.

    INPUT NAME
    **********
    0 1
    A B
    K L
    U V
    DE

    2
    C
    M
    W
    L

    3
    D
    N
    X

    4
    E
    O
    Y
    B

    5
    F
    P
    Z
    S

    6 7 8 9
    G H I J
    Q R S T
    < >
    ENTER

    USE TB&NUM
    EXIT :
    PRESS EXIT OR [CLR]

    0.

    EXIT

    Repeat step 4 until the name to save is made up, and select
    “ENTER” in INPUT NAME Menu by using the trackball and
    click the trackball section left button.
    The operating status will be saved.

    3-70



  • Page 143

    ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●

    Exit

    1

    Click EXIT .
    The PIN will reappear.

    2

    Click EXIT .
    The Sub1 Menu will reappear.

    2

    Click EXIT .
    The Sub1 Menu will be closed.



    Canceling Registered Operating Status

    Procedures

    1

    Execute the procedures to recalling operating status up to
    step 3.
    SUB1 MENU

    2

    Click ERASE .

    PIN
    ERASE

    The ERASE Menu will appear.

    3

    4

    1.

    TOKYO

    Click any of 1 to 5.

    2.

    **********

    The register number of the operating status to
    erased will be selected.

    3.

    Click YES to the question “FILE
    ERASE OK?” to erase the
    registered number.

    4.
    5.
    FILE ERASE OK?
    1. Y E S

    2. N O

    Click NO to stop the erasing.

    Exit

    1

    0.

    Click EXIT .
    The PIN Menu will reappear.

    2

    Click EXIT .
    The Sub1 Menu will reappear.

    3

    Click EXIT .
    The Sub1 Menu will be closed.

    3-71

    EXIT



  • Page 144

    ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●

    Display of Navigational Information・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・
    Navigational information such as waypoint marks, and a maximum of 256 point of NAV lines,
    coastlines, depth contours and NAV marks can be created, displayed, read out, saved, edited
    and cancelled. (This function is effective only when navigation equipment is connected to this
    system.)

    [I]

    Displaying Waypoint Marks
    If waypoint information is sent from navigation equipment, a waypoint mark will appear on the
    radar display. If the waypoint appears within the radar display, it is displayed as “○WP”.

    Procedures

    1

    Click the MENU on the screen.
    The Main Menu will appear.

    2

    Click SUB1 MENU .
    The Sub1 Menu will appear.

    3

    Click NAV/MAP INFO .
    The NAV/MAP INFO Menu will appear.

    4

    SUB1 MENU
    NAV/MAP INFO
    1.WPT
    OFF
    ON
    2.
    NAV DISP
    NAV/MAP

    3.

    4.GEODETIC
    0
    WGS-84

    Click "ON" radio button of WPT .
    “ON” in 1.WPT will be set and the selected
    waypoint mark will appear.

    Exit

    1

    Click EXIT .

    EXIT

    0.

    The Sub1 Menu will reappear.
    Geodetic system name display

    2

    Click EXIT .

    area:

    The Sub1 Menu will be closed.

    according

    The

    display
    to

    the

    changes
    geodetic

    system No. in the right input
    area.

    3-72





  • Page 145

    ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●

    [II]

    Setting NAV INFO to ON/OFF
    The following navigational information can be displayed or cancelled by pressing the
    corresponding switch.
    Own ship mark [OS MARK]
    NAV lines [NAV LINE]
    Coast lines [COAST]
    Depth contour [CONTOUR]
    Mark 1 [MARK1]
    Mark 2 [MARK2]
    Mark 3 [MARK3]
    Mark 4 [MARK4]



    Procedures

    1

    Click MENU .
    The Main Menu will appear.

    SUB1 MENU
    NAV/MAP INFO

    2

    Click SUB1 MENU .

    NAV DISP

    The Sub1 Menu will appear.

    3

    1.OS MARK
    2.NAV LINE

    Click NAV/MAP INFO .

    3.COAST

    The NAV/MAP INFO Menu will appear.

    4

    4.CONTOUR

    Click NAV DISP .

    5.MARK1

    The NAV DISP Menu will appear.

    6.MARK2
    7.MARK3

    5

    Click the check box next to the
    numbers 1 though 8 that are to be
    turned ON or OFF.
    The menu item set to ON will be marked with
    a check mark in the “□”.

    Exit

    1

    Click EXIT .
    The NAV/MAP INFO Menu will reappear.

    1

    Click EXIT .
    The Sub1 Menu will reappear.

    1

    Click EXIT .
    The Sub1 Menu will be closed.

    3-73

    8.MARK4

    0.

    EXIT



  • Page 146

    ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●

    [III] Making and Editing Navigation Information

    Procedures

    1

    Click MENU .
    The Main Menu will appear.

    2

    Click SUB1 MENU .
    The Sub1 Menu will appear.

    3

    Click NAV/MAP INFO .
    The NAV/MAP INFO Menu will appear.

    4

    Click NAV/MAP .
    The NAV/MAP Menu will appear.

    5

    Click EDIT .
    The EDIT Menu will appear.

    Note: Latitude and longitude data from the GPS and bearing data
    from the GYRO are required.

    SUB1 MENU
    NAV/MAP INFO
    NAV/MAP
    EDIT
    1.

    CLEAR

    2.

    MAKE

    3.

    CORRECT

    4.

    DELETE

    5.

    INSERT
    REMAIN POINT
    256

    0.

    EXIT

    Clear all NAV INFO or each NAV item on display
    Make up navigational information
    Correct one point in navigational information
    Delete one point navigational information
    Insert one element of NAV line, Coast line or Depth
    Contour
    Remain points of navigational information that can be
    created

    3-74





  • Page 147

    ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●



    CLEAR (Clear all NAV INFO or each NAV item on display)

    Procedures

    1

    Click CLEAR .
    The CLEAR Menu will appear.

    2



    Press any of 1 to 8 to clear any item navigation information.

    1 : Clear all navigational information on display.
    SUB1 MENU

    2 : Clear NAV LINE.

    NAV/MAP INFO
    NAV/MAP

    3 : Clear COAST Line.
    4 : Clear CONTOUR.
    5 : Clear MARK1.
    6 : Clear MARK2.
    7 : Clear MARK3.

    EDIT
    CLEAR
    1.

    ALL

    2.

    NAV LINE

    3.

    COAST

    4.

    CONTOUR

    5.

    MARK1

    6.

    MARK2

    7.

    MARK3

    8.

    MARK4

    0.

    EXIT

    8 : Clear MARK4.

    The NAV INFO to be cleared will be selected.

    3-75



  • Page 148

    ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●

    2

    MAKE (Make up navigational information)

    Procedures

    1

    Click MAKE .
    The MAKE Menu will appear.

    2

    Press any of 1 to 8 to clear any item navigation information.
    1 : Make NAV LINE.
    SUB1 MENU
    NAV/MAP INFO

    2 : Make COAST Line.

    NAV/MAP
    EDIT

    3 : Make CONTOUR.

    MAKE

    4 : Make MARK1.
    5 : Make MARK2.
    6 : Make MARK3.
    7 : Make MARK4.

    1.
    2.
    3.
    4.
    5.
    6.
    7.

    NAV LINE
    COAST
    CONTOUR
    MARK1
    MARK2
    MARK3
    MARK4

    8.

    ENT
    REMAIN POINT
    256

    0.

    EXIT

    When one of 1 to 7 is selected, NAV MAKE will appear in the CURSOR ( ) at
    the upper right of the radar display.

    3

    Move the cross cursor mark to the starting point of a line or
    any element of a mark using the trackball, and click the
    trackball section left button.
    The starting point of a line or the element of a mark to mark will be set up.

    4

    Repeat step 3 above. If a line or mark is completed, click the
    ENT .
    Then, a line or a mark will be made.

    5

    Repeat the steps 2 to 4 to make another line or mark.

    6

    Click EXIT when all NAV INFO item is made.
    The EDIT Menu will reappear.

    3-76





  • Page 149

    ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●

    Note: Navigation information can have a maximum of 256 points
    plotted. Note that the value of REMAIN POINTS (the number
    of points that can be still plotted) is decreased whenever
    lines and marks are plotted.
    3

    CORRECT (Correct one position of navigational information)
    SUB1 MENU



    Procedures

    1

    NAV/MAP INFO

    Click CORRECT .
    CORRECT will be selected. CORRECT will
    appear in the CURSOR( ) at the upper right of
    the radar display.

    2

    Move the cross cursor mark to any
    line element or mark to correct using
    the trackball, and click the trackball
    section left button.

    NAV/MAP
    EDIT
    1.

    CLEAR

    2.

    MAKE

    3.

    CORRECT

    4.

    DELETE

    5.

    INSERT

    A dotted-line starting from the line or mark will be
    drawn as the cross cursor moves.

    3

    Move the cross cursor to the point to
    correct using the trackball, and click
    the trackball section left button.

    REMAIN POINT
    256

    0.

    EXIT

    One element of the line or the mark will be
    moved.

    4

    DELETE (Delete one point in navigational
    information)

    SUB1 MENU
    NAV/MAP INFO
    NAV/MAP
    EDIT

    Procedures

    1

    2

    Click DELETE .

    1.

    CLEAR

    DELETE will be selected. NAV DEL will appear
    in the CURSOR( ) at the upper right of the radar
    display.

    2.

    MAKE

    3.

    CORRECT

    4.

    DELETE

    Move the cross cursor mark to any
    line element or mark to delete using
    the trackball, and click the trackball
    section left button.

    5.

    INSERT
    REMAIN POINT
    256

    One element of the line or the mark will be
    deleted.
    0.

    3-77

    EXIT



  • Page 150

    ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●

    (Example)

    5

    INSERT (Insert one element of NAV line, Coast line or Depth Contour)

    Procedures

    1

    Click INSERT .

    SUB1 MENU

    INSERT will be selected. NAV INS will appear
    in the CURSOR ( ) at the upper right of the
    radar display.

    2

    3

    Move the cross cursor mark to any
    line element to which another
    element is to add, using the
    trackball, and click the trackball
    section left button.
    Move the cross cursor to the point
    at which another line element is to
    be inserted, using the trackball, and
    click the trackball section left
    button.
    One line element will be inserted.

    (Example)





    3-78

    NAV/MAP INFO
    NAV/MAP
    EDIT
    1.

    CLEAR

    2.

    MAKE

    3.

    CORRECT

    4.

    DELETE

    5.

    INSERT
    REMAIN POINT
    256

    0.

    EXIT





  • Page 151

    ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●

    6

    EXIT (End making and editing navigational information)

    Exit

    1

    Click EXIT .
    The NAV/MAP Menu will reappear.

    2



    Click EXIT .
    The NAV/MAP INFO Menu will reappear.

    3

    Click EXIT .
    The Sub1 Menu will reappear.

    4

    Click EXIT .
    The Sub1 Menu will be closed.

    [Ⅳ] Setting Navigational Information

    Procedures

    1

    Click MENU .
    The Main Menu will appear.

    2

    Click SUB1 MENU .
    The Sub1 Menu will appear.

    3

    Click NAV/MAP INFO .
    The NAV/MAP INFO Menu will appear.

    4

    Click NAV/MAP .
    The NAV/MAP Menu will appear.

    3-79



  • Page 152

    ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●

    SUB1 MENU
    NAV/MAP INFO
    NAV/MAP

    Enter own ship's position manually

    1.OS POSN
    N 00' 00. 000'
    W 00' 00. 000'
    2.

    LOAD

    3.

    SAVE

    4.

    ERASE

    5.

    EDIT

    6.

    SHIFT

    7.

    SHIFT CLEAR



    Read out navigational information
    Save navigational information
    Erase saved navigational information
    Make, cancel,
    information

    add

    and

    move

    navigational

    Shift navigational positions except own ship's mark
    0.

    1

    EXIT

    Clear shifted navigational positions

    OS POSN (Enter own ship's position manually)
    Set this function to use the navigational information at any other position than
    own ship's position.

    Procedures

    1

    Click the latitude and longitude numeric section under
    "OS POSN".
    1.OS POSN will be selected.
    The numeric input dialogue box will be displayed.

    2

    Press

    or

    .

    N (north latitude) or S (south latitude) will be selected.

    3

    Enter a latitude value (XX゜XXX.XX’) using any of 0 to 9.

    4

    Press SET .
    The latitude value entered manually will be set up.

    5

    Press

    or

    .

    E (east longitude) or W (west longitude) will be selected.

    3-80



  • Page 153

    ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●

    6

    Enter a longitude value (XX゜XXX.XX’) using any of 0 to 9.

    7

    Press SET .
    The longitude value entered manually will be set up.

    Note: The own ship's position entered manually is effective only in the NAV/MAP
    INFO Menu.


    2

    Select Equipment to Load the Read-out Navigational Information
    In the case that any electronic positioning equipment such as GPS is
    connected to the system, or that own ship's position is entered manually, the
    data can be read out.

    Procedures

    1

    Click LOAD .
    SUB1 MENU

    The LOAD Menu will appear.

    NAV/MAP INFO

    2

    Click DEVICE .

    NAV/MAP
    LOAD

    1.DEVICE will be selected and the pull-down
    menu will appear.

    3-81

    2.

    1.DEVICE
    1.INTERNAL
    1.INTERNAL
    LODE

    0.

    EXIT



  • Page 154

    ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●

    3

    Readout Navigational Information Display (Radar Internal Data)
    Only when navigational equipment is connected to the system or when own
    ship's position is entered manually, the readout files can be selected. The
    selecting method is different depending upon the type of device to load the
    readout data.

    When Setting DEVICE to INTERNAL

    Procedures

    1

    Click LOAD .

    SUB1 MENU

    The LOAD Menu will appear.

    NAV/MAP INFO
    NAV/MAP

    2

    3

    Place the cursor over the
    navigation information file name
    (0 through 9) to be read, then
    double click.
    Click YES to the question “FILE
    LOAD OK?” if the file name is right.
    The selected number of
    information will be read out.

    navigational

    To cancel file loading, click NO .
    4

    LOAD
    LOAD DATA
    1.
    2.
    3.
    4.
    5.
    6.
    7.
    8.
    9.
    0.

    EXIT :
    PRESS EXIT

    The selected file name will appear at the lower right of the
    radar display.

    3-82





  • Page 155

    ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●

    4

    SAVE (Save navigational information)
    In the case that any electronic navigation equipment is connected to the system,
    or that own ship's position is entered manually, the data can be saved.



    Procedures

    1

    Click SAVE .
    The SAVE Menu will appear.

    2

    Use the trackball to select an
    alphabet character from A to Z that
    is displayed in the menu, press the
    left trackball button, and input one
    character or one number of the
    name used for saving.
    A maximum of 10 characters can be entered.

    4

    NAV/MAP INFO

    Place the cursor over one of the
    numbers 1 through 0 (ten in all),
    then click.
    The INPUT NAME Menu will appear and the
    selected number to save will be set up.

    3

    SUB1 MENU
    NAV/MAP
    SAVE
    1.

    TOKYO

    2.

    *****

    3.

    INPUT NAME
    **********

    4.
    5.
    6.
    7.
    8.
    9.

    0 1
    A B
    K L
    U V
    DE

    2
    C
    M
    W
    L

    3
    D
    N
    X

    4
    E
    O
    Y
    B

    5
    F
    P
    Z
    S

    6 7 8 9
    G H I J
    Q R S T
    SPC L R
    ENTER

    USE TB&NUM
    EXIT :
    PRESS EXIT

    0.
    EXIT :

    PRESS EXIT
    Repeat step 3 until the name to
    save is made up, and select “ ENTER” in INPUT NAME
    Menu by using the trackball and click the trackball section
    left button.

    The currently displayed navigational information will be saved.

    3-83



  • Page 156

    ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●

    5

    ERASE (Erase saved navigational information)
    SUB1 MENU

    Procedures

    1

    NAV/MAP INFO

    Click ERASE .

    NAV/MAP

    The ERASE Menu will appear.

    2

    Place the cursor over one of the
    numbers 1 through 0 (ten in all),
    then click.

    ERASE
    1.

    TOKYO

    2.

    *****

    3.
    4.

    3

    Click YES to the question “FILE
    ERASE OK?” to erase the
    information.

    5.

    FILE ERASE OK?
    1. Y E S

    2. N O

    6.
    7.
    8.

    The elected number of navigational
    information will be erased.

    9.
    0.
    EXIT :
    PRESS EXIT

    Click NO to stop erasing the information.
    6

    SHIFT (Shift navigational positions except own ship's mark)
    The position of any navigational information
    such as NAV lines, coast lines, depth
    contours, and other marks except own ship's
    mark can be corrected manually.

    Procedures

    1

    3

    NAV/MAP INFO
    NAV/MAP
    1.OS POSN
    N 00' 00. 000'
    W 00' 00. 000'

    Click SHIFT .
    SHIFT will be selected. NAV SHIFT will
    appear in the CURSOR ( ) at the upper right
    of the radar display.

    2

    SUB1 MENU

    Move the cross cursor mark to an
    element of a line such as NAV line,
    coast line, depth contour line, or a
    mark using the trackball.
    Click the trackball section left
    button.

    2.

    LOAD

    3.

    SAVE

    4.

    ERASE

    5.

    EDIT

    6.

    SHIFT

    7.

    SHIFT CLEAR

    0.

    EXIT

    A line or mark to correct will be set up.

    4

    Move the cross cursor mark to any point to which a line or
    mark will be shifted, using the trackball.

    3-84





  • Page 157

    ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●

    5

    Click the trackball section left button.
    The point to which a line or mark is to be shifted will be set up, and all lines and
    marks will be shifted.

    7

    SHIFT CLEAR (Clear the corrected positions of navigation information)

    Procedures

    1

    Click SHIFT CLEAR .
    SHIFT CLEAR will be selected.



    The latest correction to navigation information (only one correction) will be
    cleared.

    Note: Only the latest correction is cleared and the previous
    navigation information is restored.
    The information cannot be further restored.

    8

    EXIT (Exit from setting of navigational information)

    Exit

    1

    Click EXIT .
    The NAV/MAP INFO Menu will reappear.

    2

    Click EXIT .
    The Sub1 Menu will reappear.

    3

    Click EXIT .
    The Sub1 Menu will be closed.

    3-85



  • Page 158

    ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●

    [Ⅴ] Setup and Display of Geodetic System
    In making up any navigational information, it is necessary to set up the geodetic
    system used by the connected navigation equipment. When any saved
    navigational information is loaded, the geodetic system used when the
    navigational information was saved will also be displayed. Then, check that the
    geodetic system on display is the same as that for the connected navigation
    equipment. If both geodetic systems are different, the positions of the
    navigational information on radar display may be deviated. Therefore, it is
    important to set the same geodetic system as the navigation equipment.

    Procedures

    1

    The Main Menu will appear.

    2

    Click SUB1 MENU .
    The Sub1 Menu will appear.

    3

    NAV/MAP INFO
    1.WPT
    OFF
    ON
    2.
    NAV DISP
    NAV/MAP

    3.

    4.GEODETIC
    0

    Click NAV/MAP INFO .

    WGS-84

    The NAV/MAP INFO Menu will appear.

    4



    SUB1 MENU

    Click MENU .

    Click GEODETIC .
    4.GEODETIC will be selected.

    5

    Select by pressing
    in the
    menu.
    This is set by
    or the numeric
    input dialogue box.
    Select the number of geodetic
    system.
    (See Table of Geodetic Systems)
    When the number of geodetic system is
    entered, its name is changed.

    Exit

    1

    Click EXIT .
    The Sub1 Menu will reappear.

    2

    Click EXIT .
    The Sub1 Menu will be closed.

    3-86

    EXIT

    0.

    Geodetic system name display
    area:

    The

    according

    display
    to

    the

    changes
    geodetic

    system No. in the right input
    area.



  • Page 159

    ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●

    NO.



    0
    1
    2
    3
    4
    5
    6
    7
    8
    9
    10
    11
    12
    13
    14
    15
    16
    17
    18
    19
    20
    21
    22
    23
    24
    25
    26
    27
    28
    29
    30
    31
    32
    33
    34
    35
    36
    37
    38
    39
    40
    41
    42
    43
    44
    45
    46
    47

    TABLE OF GEODETIC SYSTEM
    NAME

    WGS-84
    WGS-72
    Japan
    North American 1927 (U.S)
    North American 1927 (Canada & Alaska)
    European 1950 (Europe)
    Australian geodetic 1966 (Australia)
    Ordnance Survey of Great Britain (England)
    NAD-83
    ADINDAN (Ethiopia & Sudan)
    ARC (Botswana)
    AUSTRALIAN GEODETIC 1984 (Australia)
    BERMUDA 1957 (the Bermudas)
    BOGOTA OBSERVATORY (Columbia)
    CAMPO INCHAUSPE (Argentine)
    CHATHAM 1971 (Chatham Island)
    CHUA ASTRO (paraguay)
    CORREGO ALEGRE (Brazil)
    DJAKARTA (VATAVIA)(Sumatra)
    EUROPEAN 1979 (Europe)
    GEODETIC DATUM 1949 (New Zealand)
    GUAM 1963 (Guam)
    HAYFORD 1910 (Finland)
    HJORSEY 1955 (Iceland)
    INDIAN (India & Nepal)
    IRELAND 1965 (Ireland)
    KERTAU 1948 (West Malaysia)
    L.C.5 ASTRO (Cayman Black Island)
    LIBERIA 1964 (Liberia)
    LUZON (Philippines)
    MERCHICH (Morocco)
    MINNA (Cameroon)
    NAHRWAN (Oman)
    NAPARIMA, BWI (Trinidad and Tobago)
    OLD EGYPTIAN (Egypt)
    OLD HAWAIIAN (the Hawaii Islands)
    PICO DE LAS NIEVES (the Canary Islands)
    PROVISIONAL SOUTH AMERICAN 1956 (South America)
    PROVISIONAL SOUTH CHILEAN 1963 (South Chile)
    PUERTO RICO (Puerto Rico and Virgin Islands)
    QORNOQ (South Greenland)
    RT90 (Sweden)
    SANTA BRAZ (Sao Maguel, santa Maria Islands)
    SOUTH AMERICAN 1969 (South America)
    SOUTHWEST BASE (Faial, Graciosa, Pico.Sao Jorge and terceira Islands)
    TIMBALAI 1948 (Brunei and East Malaysia)

    3-87

    REPRESENTATION

    WGS-84
    WGS-72
    Japan
    1927 North America
    1927 Canada, Araska
    European 1950
    Austrarian geodetic 1966
    UK
    NAD-83
    no use
    no use
    ADINDAN
    ARC 1950
    AUSTRALIAN GEODETIC 1984
    BERMUDA 1957
    BOGOTA OBSERVATORY
    CAMPO INCHAUSPE
    CHATHAM 1971
    CHUA ASTRO
    CORREGO ALEGRE
    DJAKARTA
    EUROPEAN 1979
    GEODETIC DATUM 1949
    GUAM 1963
    HAYFORD 1910
    HJORSEY 1955
    INDIAN
    IRELAND 1965
    KERTAU 1948
    L.C.5 ASTRO
    LIBERIA 1964
    LUZON
    MERCHICH
    MINNA
    NAHRWAN
    NAPARIMA, BWI
    OLD EGYPTIAN
    OLD HAWAIIAN
    PICO DE LAS NIEVES
    PROVISIONAL S-AMERICAN 1956
    PROVISIONAL S-CHILEAN 1963
    PUERTO RICO
    QORNOQ
    RT90
    SANTA BRAZ
    SOUTH AMERICAN 1969
    SOUTHWEST BASE
    TIMBALAI 1948



  • Page 160

    ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●

    Function of USER Switch / OPTION Switch................................
    USER Switch
    In the initial setting, the vector length maximum ON/OFF is registered.
    These funcions can be changed only by service personnel.

    Functions Registerable in USER Switch:
    ①Vector Length Maximum: ON/OFF
    ON: Vector length
    OFF: Vector length

    60 min (max)
    Time set on VECTOR TIME Menu.

    ②NAV/MAP INFO Menu: ON/OFF
    ON: The NAV/MAP INFO Menu will appear.
    OFF: The NAV/MAP INFO Menu will be closed.
    ③Parallel Index Line Display: ON/OFF
    ON: The parallel index lines set on the PI Menu will appear on the radar
    display.
    OFF: The displayed parallel index lines will be cleared.

    OPTON Switch
    ①OPTON1 Switch
    The registered function is called. Also, if an option is connected, then this is used to
    operate that option.
    The call of a MENU is assigned at the time of factory shipments.
    ②OPTON2 Switch
    The registered function is called. Also, if an option is connected, then this is used to
    operate that option.
    The call of a TEST is assigned at the time of factory shipments.

    3-88





  • Page 161

    ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●

    Operation of Performance monitor・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・
    This function con be used only when the radar equipment is equipped with the NJU-63/64
    Performance Monitor.

    1

    Method of Operation
    In the case that the equipment is provided with radar interswitch, the interswitch
    shall be set to the Master Radar mode.



    Procedures

    1

    Click TEST.

    TEST MENU

    The MAIN Menu will appear.

    2

    Click "ON" radio button of
    "5.PM".
    “ON” in “5.PM” will be set and the radar will
    automatically be set to RM, OFF CENTER
    OFF, IR OFF, PROCESS OFF, TGT ENH
    OFF, FUNCTION OFF and 24 NM range.
    The PM pattern for checking the receiving
    system will appear and the [PM] indicator
    bar-graph will also be in the TEST Menu to
    be used for checking the transmitted power.

    Exit

    1

    Click EXIT .

    1.

    SELF CHECK

    2.

    PANEL TEST

    ARPATEST
    3.
    4.MAG CURRENT
    OFF
    ON
    5.PM
    OFF
    ON
    6.

    ERROR LOGGING

    7.

    SYSTEM INFO

    PM

    0.

    EXIT

    The TEST Menu will be closed.

    Note: All target acquisitions by ARPA functions will be cancelled.
    The target acquisition cancelled when PM is ON will not be
    recovered.
    The radar image is suppressed to make the PM image easy to
    see.
    So, the test menu should be always closed after the PM has
    been checked.

    3-89



  • Page 162

    ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●
    ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●
    12●
    to ●
    18NM

    PM Pattern



    2

    Checking Transmitter System
    The value of the TRANSMIT POWER indicator bar graph in the test menu indicates the
    value corresponding to the transmission output power. If the indicated value becomes
    extremely short against the bar length checked at the initial time, it is necessary to
    request for checking of the transmitter system by a service engineer.

    3-90



  • Page 163

    ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●

    Checking procedure





    Read a current value A on the bar indicator.



    Referring to the Calibration Curve I, obtain a relative attenuation d(B) for the initial bar
    indicator length B that is specified in the INFORMATION LABEL.



    Then, obtain a relative attenuation d(A) for the value A referring to the Calibration Curve I.
    The value given by d(A) - d(B) represents the attenuation of the current transmission
    output power compared with the value at the initial time.



    If the attenuation value given by d(A) - d(B) is 10 dB or more (due to the life of the
    magnetron), it is necessary to request for checking of the transmitter system by a service
    engineer.

    Calibration Curve I

    Relative Attenuation d

    Initial bar
    length
    Date and time of
    initial setting
    Maximum range
    pattern

    Measurement precision

    Length of Bar Indicator l
    Figure 1

    3-91



  • Page 164

    ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●

    (Example)
    Assuming that the initial bar indication is B = 8 and the current bar indication A = 6, the relative
    attenuation is d(B) = 3.5 dB, d(A) = 7 dB. Thus, d(A) - d(B) = 3.5dB.
    This clearly indicates that the current transmission output power is attenuated by approximately 3.5
    dB.

    Example of Checking Transmitter System
    Current bar indication A=6


    Initial bar indication B=8

    Relative Attenuation d

    Calibration Curve I

    Measurement precision

    Length of Bar Indicator l

    Figure 2
    3-92



  • Page 165

    ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●

    3

    Checking Receiver System
    The maximum range of the PM pattern on display indicates a deterioration of the
    sensitivity of the receiver system.

    Checking Procedure





    Measure the PM pattern displayed on the display using the VRM of the maximum range
    ‘max’ from the PPI sensor.



    Obtain the degree of sensitivity deterioration R (rmax) corresponding to ‘rmax’ using the
    calibration curve II and indicate the degree of sensitivity deterioration of the current
    receiver system.

    Sensitivity deterioration R (rmax)

    Calibration curve II

    Maximum range of RM pattern (rmax)
    Figure 3

    3-93



  • Page 166

    ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●

    (Example)
    Assuming that the maximum range of the initial PM pattern is rBmax = 18 NM according to the
    INFORMATION LABEL, and if that of the current PM pattern is rAmax = 16 NM, the deterioration
    value is ∆R (rmax) = 5dB, referring to Calibration Curve II.
    This means that the receiver system has sensitivity deterioration of approximately 5dB.

    Example of Checking Receiver System

    Sensitivity deterioration value R(rmax)

    Initial PM
    pattern

    8-18NM

    Current PM
    pattern

    Calibration curve II

    PM pattern maximum range (rmax)
    Figure 4

    3-94

    16-18NM





  • Page 167

    ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●

    EBL Maneuvering・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・
    Menu Composition
    SUB1 MENU
    EBL MANEUVER
    1.EBL MANEUVER
      ON 
    OFF
    2.REACH
    0



    3.TURN MODE
    OFF
      ON 
    4.TURN SET
    *. * *

    0.10-2.00nm

    EXIT

    0.
    HEADING

    T

    *. * *

    R

    *. * *

    WOL
    *. * *

    [Ⅰ]Initial Setting
    Procedures

    1

    Click MENU , then SUB1 MENU and SUB1 MENU .
    The EBL MANEUBER Menu will appear.

    2

    Click the numeric section of REACH.
    REACH will be selected.
    The numeric input dialogue box is opened.

    3

    Set the numeric value in the dialogue box.

    4

    Press END .

    3-95



  • Page 168

    ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●

    5

    Click TURN MODE.
    TURN MODE will be selected.

    Select any turn mode.
    RADIUS: Constant turn diameter (NM)
    RATE:

    6

    Constant turn speed (deg/min)

    Click the numeric setting section of TURN SET .
    TURN SET will be selected.
    The numeric input dialogue box is opened.

    7

    Set the numeric value in the dialogue box.

    8

    Press END .

    Note: If the initial setting is not correct, the maneuver curve will be
    affected.

    3-96





  • Page 169

    ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●

    [Ⅱ]Creating Maneuver Curve
    Procedures

    1

    Click MENU , then SUB1 MENU and SUB1 MENU .
    The EBL MANEUBER Menu will appear.

    2

    Click "ON" radio button of EBL MANEUVER.
    “ON” in “1.EBL MANEUBER” will be set and a supplemental line, a maneuver
    curve and WOL will appear on the radar display.



    3

    Set the starting point of the supplemental line using the
    trackball and click to fix it.
    The position of WOL (steering point) will change depending upon the starting
    point of the supplemental line. If the WOL is behind own ship's position, the line
    color of the WOL sill change.

    4

    Set the bearing of the supplemental line using the [EBL]
    control.
    The bearing of the supplemental line will be the bearing in which own ship will
    finally move. The position of WOL will change depending upon the bearing of
    the supplemental line. If WOL is behind own ship's position, the line color of the
    WOL will change.

    5

    Select by left-clicking the trackball.
    The setting will be established. However, if the WOL is behind own ship's
    position, the entry of Click will be rejected and the setting will not be
    established.

    Note: If the [EBL] is pressed during the EBL MANEUVER operation,
    the Menu will be closed and the maneuver curve creating
    operation will be stopped.

    3-97



  • Page 170

    ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●

    Procedures

    1

    Click "OFF" radio button of EBL MNEUVER.
    “OFF”in “1.EBL MANEUVER”will be set and the EBL MANEUVER function will
    set to OFF.

    Exit

    1

    Click EXIT .
    The Sub1 Menu will be closed.


    HL

    Supplemental Line

    Maneuver Curve

    REACH
    R
    WOL
    Own Ship's Position

    O
    Scheduled Route

    WOL:Steering point
    REACH:Distance between when the wheel is steered and when the ship begins to turn
    R:Turning radius
    3-98



  • Page 171

    ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●



    3-99



  • Page 172

    SECTION 4
    MEASUREMENT OF RANGE
    AND BEARING

    Measurement by Trackball ................................... 4-1
    Measurement by Range Rings............................. 4-2
    Measurement by EBLs and VRMs ....................... 4-2
    Measurement between Two Optional Points ...... 4-4



  • Page 173

    Measurement by Trackball
    Procedures

    1.

    Check the target echoes on the radar display.

    2.

    Move the cross cursor mark to a target by the trackball.
    The [CURSOR] on the radar display indicates the bearing and range of the
    target.
    The range is a distance from own ship’s position.

    Fig. 4.1

    4-1



  • Page 174

    Measurement by Range Rings
    Procedures

    1.

    Press
    The Range Rings will appear on the radar display.
    The range between the target and own ships can be determined by visually
    measuring the target’s position that lies between two range rings.
    (The range ring interval is fixed and indicates at the upper left of the radar
    display.)

    Measurement by EBLs and VRMs
    Procedures

    1.

    Press

    to select EBL1 display and operation.

    The “EBL1” indication at the lower right of the radar display will be selected and
    the EBL1 will appear as a broken-line on the PPI display.

    2.

    Turn the [EBL] control to put EBL1 on a target.
    The bearing of the EBL1 will appear at the lower right of the radar display.
    The EBL1 bearing represents the target’s bearing.

    3.

    Press

    to select VRM1 display and operation.

    The “VRM1” indication at the lower right of the radar display will be selected
    and the VRM1 will appear as a broken-line circle on the PPI display.

    4.

    Move the broken-line VRM1 to the target by using the
    trackball.
    The range of the VRM1 from own ship will appear at the lower right of the radar
    display. The range of VRM1 signifies a distance between the target and own
    ship.
    Refer to Fig. 4.2 in the next page.
    In this figure, the range and bearing are;
    Range: 5.0 nm
    Bearing: 45.0°

    4-2



  • Page 175

    Fig. 4.2

    4-3



  • Page 176

    Measurement between Two Optional Points
    Procedures

    1.

    Press

    to select EBL2 display and operation.

    The “EBL2” indication at the lower right of the radar display will be selected and
    the EBL2 will appear as a dotted-line on the PPI display.

    2. Left-click the C switch at the lower right of the EBL2.

    3.

    Using the trackball, move the starting point of EBL2 to one
    (A) of the two points.
    (See Fig. 4.3.)

    4.

    Turn the [EBL] control to move EBL2 to the other point (B).
    (See Fig. 4.3.)

    5. Press

    to select VRM2 display and operation.

    (● VRM marker) will appear on a dotted-line of the EBL2.

    6. Using the trackball, move the VRM2 marker on a dotted-line of
    EBL2 to the point B.
    The VRM2 marker ● moves away from the center of the display by turning the
    trackball clockwise, and closer to the center.
    The bearing and range between the two points will appear in the “VRM2” and
    “EBL2” area on the lower right of the radar display.

    4-4



  • Page 177

    Fig. 4.3
    It is also possible to use EBL1 instead of EBL2 in measuring the bearing and
    range between two optional points. In the procedures above, change EBL2
    into EBL1 and VRM2 into VRM1, and left-click C of the EBL2 in step 2.

    4-5



  • Page 178

    4-6



  • Page 179

    SECTION 5
    OPERATION OF ARPA

    Using ARPA ...........................................................................5-1
    5.1 INITIAL SETTING .........................................................5-2
    Setting Collision Decision Criteria: SAFE LIMIT...............5-2
    Automatic Setting Mode (System Start) ..............................5-4
    Setting Range Scale: RANGE SCALE .............................5-4
    Setting Own Ship’s Speed...................................................5-5
    5.2 DISPLAY MODE SETTING...........................................5-7
    Setting Motion Display Mode [TM/RM] ...............................5-7
    Setting Bearing Display Mode [AZI MODE] ........................5-7
    5.3 TARGET ID No. DISPLAY.............................................5-8
    5.4 TARGET ACQUISITION ...............................................5-9
    Automatic Acquisition [AUTO] .............................................5-9
    Manual Acquisition [MANUAL] ..........................................5-11
    Use of Automatic and Manual Acquisition Modes [GZ1 GZ2]
    [ACQ MANUAL] ................................................................5-12
    5.5 ARPA DATA DISPLAY.................................................5-13
    Display of Vectors .............................................................5-13
    Display of Past Positions [PAST POSN] ...........................5-16

    5.6 DATA DISPLAY ...........................................................5-18
    Types of Data Display .......................................................5-18
    Method of Displaying Target Data [TGT DATA].................5-19
    Cancellation of Displaying Target Data [TGT DATA].........5-19
    5.7 ALARM DISPLAY .......................................................5-20
    Dangerous Target Alarm: CPA/TCPA .............................5-20
    Guard Zone Alarm [GUARD ZONE]..................................5-21
    Lost Target Alarm [LOST TARGET] ..................................5-22
    System Function Alarm [ARPA (DATA)] ............................5-23
    Gyro Set Alarm [SET GYRO] ............................................5-23
    5.8 TRIAL MANEUVERING ..............................................5-24
    Trial Maneuvering in the True Vector Mode ......................5-24
    Trial Maneuvering in the Relative Vector Mode ................5-25
    Using the TRIAL Function .................................................5-26
    5.9 DELETING UNWANTED TARGETS ..........................5-27
    Deleting Targets ................................................................5-27
    5.10 ARPA SETTING ........................................................5-29
    Simulation .........................................................................5-30
    Gate Size ..........................................................................5-32
    Test Video .........................................................................5-34



  • Page 180

    Using ARPA
    Attention
    There are the following limitations on use of the target acquisition and tracking
    functions of ARPA:
    [I]

    Resolution between adjacent targets and swapping during automatic
    tracking
    DepENTing on the particular distance and echo size, resolution between
    adjacent targets during automatic tracking usually ranges somewhere
    between 0.03 and 0.05 nm. If multiple targets approach each other,
    resolution will become about 0.03 nm and this may cause the system to
    regard them as one target and thus to swap between them or lose one or
    more of them. Such swapping or loss of targets may also occur if the
    target image is affected by rain or snow clutter, sea clutter or if the target
    moves close to land.

    [II] Intensity of echoes and the tracking function
    The intensity of echoes and the tracking function are correlated, and thus
    the target will be lost if no echoes are detected for six consecutive scans.
    Therefore, if there is a lost target, radar gain must be increased to improve
    target detection. If, however, radar gain is increased too much, sea clutter
    or other noise may be mistakenly detected and tracked as a target, and a
    false alarm may result. In such cases, do not apply strong impact to the
    touch panel, trackball or gain, because doing so may cause a malfunction.
    [III] Adverse effects of error sources on automatic tracking
    To execute accurate tracking, it is necessary to accurately adjust the
    [GAIN], [SEA] and [RAIN] controls of the radar so that the target to be
    acquired and tracked is clearly displayed. Inappropriate settings for these
    controls will reduce the reliability and accuracy of automatic tracking.

    5-1



  • Page 181

    5.1

    INITIAL SETTING

    The initial settings for using the ARPA functions are described in this section.

    Setting Collision Decision Criteria:

    SAFE LIMIT

    See sections 3.4 “Basic Operations” and 4 “Measurement of Range and Bearing” for descriptions of
    operation.

    Attention
    Set the optimum values of collision decision conditions, depENTing on the vessel
    type, water area, weather and oceanographic conditions. (For the relations
    between those conditions and alarms, refer to section 5.7 “ALARM DISPLAY.”)

    Before starting, check the collision decision criteria settings.

    Procedures

    1

    Press MENU or OPTION2 key on the
    screen.
    The Main Menu will appear.

    2

    Click SUB1 MENU , then ARPA/AIS.
    The ARPA Menu will appear.

    3

    Set CPA LIMIT (Closest Point of
    Approach).
    (1) Left-click the“CPA LIMIT”edit box.
    The numeric input dialogue box will be
    opened.

    (2) Set the number by pressing the“+”or“
    (3) Press ENT to set up the value entry.
    The input number will be fixed.

    5-2

    ”keys in dialogue box.



  • Page 182

    4

    Display the CPA LIMIT ring.

    (1) Click the "ON" of "3.CPA RING".
    “ON”in“3.CPA RING”will
    be
    set
    and“CPA RING”will appear on the
    radar display.

    (2) Should the CPA ring not appear, click
    the "OFF" of "3.CPA RING".
    "OFF" in "3.CPA RING" will be set.

    Attention: The CPA RING is not appear in the TRUE Vector mode.
    5

    Set TCPA LIMIT (Time to CPA)
    (1) Click the numeric section of

    "2.TCPA

    LIMIT".
    The numeric input dialogue box will be
    opened.

    (2)

    Set the number by pressing
    the“+”or“ ”keys in the dialogue box.
    (3) Press ENT to set up the value entry.

    Exit

    1

    Click EXIT .
    The Sub1 Menu will reappear.

    2

    Click EXIT .
    The Sub1 Menu will be closed.

    Attention: The set values of CPA LIMIT/TCPA
    LIMIT will appear on the radar display.

    5-3



  • Page 183

    Automatic Setting Mode (System Start)
    See sections 3.4 “Basic Operations” and 4 “Measurement of Range and Bearing” for descriptions
    of operation.
    Fig. 5-1
    Mode

    Mode Setting at System Start
    Initial setting

    Refer to Section

    DISPLAY MODE

    RM (relative motion)

    3.4

    ACQUIRE

    AUTO OFF

    5.3

    TRIAL

    OFF

    5.7

    GUARD ZONE

    OFF

    3.4, 5.6

    Setting Range Scale: (RANGE SCALE)
    The ARPA functions can operate on all range scales. Usually, set the range between 1.5 to 24 NM
    depENTing on the area of operation.

    Attention:

    The ARPA acquisition range is 0.1 to 32 NM.

    5-4



  • Page 184

    Setting Own Ship’s Speed
    [

    ]

    When the LOG is not in operation (Manual Setting)
    If the LOG is not in operation, set the estimated ship’s speed manually.

    Procedures

    1

    Press the MENU or OPTION2 key on
    the screen.
    The Main Menu will appear.

    2

    Click SUB1 MENU , then SETTING1 .
    The SETTING1 Menu will appear.

    3

    Left-click the
    box.

    2.SELECT SPEED

    edit

    The “2.SELECT SPEED” edit box will be
    selected.

    4

    Click MANUAL .
    1.MNUAL will be set.

    5

    Click SET MANUAL SPEED .
    “3.SET MANUAL SPEED”will be set.
    The numeric input dialogue box will be
    opened.

    6

    Set the number by pressing the

    +

    keys in the dialogue box.
    7

    Press ENT to set up the value entry.
    Own ship's speed will be set.

    5-5

    or



  • Page 185

    Exit

    1

    Click EXIT .
    The Sub1 Menu will reappear.

    2

    Click EXIT .
    The Sub1 Menu will be closed.

    [

    ]

    When the LOG is operating
    When the system is set to the LOG mode, the speed signal will be entered automatically and the ship’s
    speed will appear on the radar display.
    The speed devices which are displayed on the screen are as follows:
    LOG...............1-axis log
    2AXW ............2-axis log Speed against water
    2AXG.............2-axis log Speed against ground
    GPS...............Speed from GPS

    5-6



  • Page 186

    5.2

    DISPLAY MODE SETTING

    Setting Motion Display Mode [TM/RM]
    Press RM(R) / TM button on the upper left of the screen, then select the true motion (TM) display
    mode or the relative motion (RM) display mode.
    In the initial state, the mode is set to RM.

    Note
    For further details on the TM/RM modes, refer to section 3.4 “Select True/Relative Motion
    Display Mode.”

    Setting Bearing Display Mode [AZI MODE]
    Set the bearing display mode by pressing N UP/H UP/C UP on the upper left of the screen.

    Note
    For further details on the TM/RM modes, refer to section 3.4 “Select True/Relative Motion
    Display Mode.”

    5-7



  • Page 187

    5.3

    TARGET ID No. DISPLAY

    The target ID number is a number displayed next to the symbol when a target ship is acquired.
    This number is allocated to target ships from 1 to 50 in the order that they are acquired. This number
    is used to identify each target ship until the target ship is lot or released.

    Attention:

    Whether the Target ID No. display is turned ON or OFF can be checked only
    with a target acquired. For a description of acquisition, refer to 5.4 “Target
    Acquisition.”
    Depress

    to turn Target ID No. Display ON or OFF.

    With this display ON, the target ID NO. is displayed next to the capture symbol.
    With this display OFF, all the target ID Nos. are non-displayed.
    However, the numbers remain displayed for captured targets of which numeric data
    display is specified.

    Note
    For a description on how to specify the numeric data display, refer to 5.6 “Data Display.”

    5-8



  • Page 188

    5.4

    TARGET ACQUISITION
    Attention
    It is important to adjust the controls [SEA] and [GAIN] properly in the automatic
    target acquisition mode to minimize the effect of sea clutter.
    Target acquisition can be performed in two modes, AUTO and MANUAL, and both
    modes can be used at the same time.

    Automatic Acquisition [AUTO]
    Attention
    If untracked targets enter the guard zone when the maximum number of targets
    (50 targets) is already being tracked, targets with lower levels of danger will be
    cancelled and replaced.

    Procedures

    1

    Click GZ1 or GZ2 on the screen.
    Automatic target acquisition will start. The target acquired will be marked with
    “ ” and its target ID No., which will move with the target. Its vector will appear
    within one minute.

    Attention:

    When the Target ID No. display is set to OFF, any acquired target ship will not
    be given a target ID No.

    5-9



  • Page 189

    In the ACQ AUTO mode, the targets within a guard zone will be acquired
    automatically. The guard zone can be set arbitrarily. If a guard zone is not set,
    a guard zone of 3 NM and ±45 degrees in the direction of the own ship will be set.
    (Guard Zone 1: Heading direction, Guard Zone 2: Sternward direction)
    For the setting method, refer to section 3.4 “Set Guard Zones.”

    Guard zone 1 will come on when GZ1 is clicked. When GZ1 is pressed again,
    automatic tracking will turn off and the guard zone will be erased from the radar
    screen, but other ships that were being tracked shall continue to be tracked.

    Guard Zone

    Target that has entered the guard zone.
    The guard zone intruder symbol is displayed.

    Target that has continued to intrude in the guard
    zone for one minute.
    The guard zone intruded symbol, acquired symbol
    and vector are displayed.

    Target that has moved outside the guard zone.
    The capture symbol and vector are displayed.
    The guard zone intruder symbol is cleared.

    5-10



  • Page 190

    Manual Acquisition [ACQ MANUAL]
    Attention
    If the maximum number of targets (50) is already acquired, then new targets
    cannot be acquired. To do so, cancel any current targets that are not required.

    Procedures

    1

    Press

    .

    2

    Move the cross cursor on to the target to be acquired, then
    press the left trackball button .
    The acquired target will be marked with “
    appear within one minute.

    Attention:

    ” and it’s target ID No. Its vector will

    When the Target ID No. display is set to OFF, any captured target ship will not
    be given a target ID No.

    Number of Targets and Acquisition Area
    Target to be acquired

    To use the manual acquisition mode only without the automatic mode on concurrently,
    press [ACQ AUTO] to turn Automatic Acquisition OFF.

    5-11



  • Page 191

    Manually acquired target.
    The initial acquisition symbol is displayed.

    Target that has intruded into the zone for one minute.
    The acquisition symbol and vector are displayed.

    Use of Automatic and Manual Acquisition Modes [GZ1
    [ACQ MANUAL]

    GZ2]

    Method of Operation
    Execute manual target acquisition in the automatic acquisition mode, that is, in the state in
    which the Automatic Acquisition mode [GZ1, GZ2] is ON.
    Use of Combined Auto/Manual Mode
    When both automatic and manual acquisition modes are used concurrently, important
    targets should be acquired manually, and the rest should be acquired automatically. If
    new targets enter the zone and they exceed the maximum number of targets that can be
    acquired, manual targets will continue to be displayed until they leave the guard zone, but
    automatically acquired targets will be cancelled according to their degree of importance.

    5-12



  • Page 192

    5.5

    ARPA DATA DISPLAY

    (Refer to the Display Example on page 2-1.)

    Display of Vectors
    Attention
    When a targeting or the own ship changes course or when a target is acquired,
    the vector may not reach a given level of accuracy until three minutes or more has
    passed after such a course change or target acquisition.
    Even if three minutes or more have passed, the vector may include an error
    depENTing upon the tracking conditions.

    A vector representing a target’s predicted position can be presented in the TRUE vector or RELATIVE
    vector mode.

    In each mode, a vector length can be freely changed for a time interval of 1 to 60

    minutes.

    [I]

    Vector Mode Selection
    True Vector Mode
    In the true vector mode, the direction of a target vector indicates the true course of the
    target and its vector length is proportional to its speed.
    In this mode, the own ship’s vector is displayed as shown below.
    In this mode, the movements of other ships around own ship can be accurately and easily
    monitored. However, no CPA RING can be displayed in this mode.

    The relative vector is not displayed.

    Own ship’s vector
    True vector

    5-13



  • Page 193

    Relative Vector Mode
    In order to display the relative vector of a target, press the T/R VECT switch to select
    the Relative Vector mode.
    The relative vector does not represent the true motion of a target, but its relative relation
    with the own ship. This means that a target with its relative vector directed at the own ship
    (passing through the CPA LIMIT ring) is a dangerous target.
    In the Relative Vector mode, the CPA LIMIT of targets can be seen at a glance.

    The true vector is not displayed.
    CPA RING
    Relative vector

    Therefore, the TRUE/REL modes can be used in the following way: The TRUE vector can
    be used to know the true aspect of a target, and the REL vector can be used to know the
    closest point of approach (CPA) of a target.

    5-14



  • Page 194

    [II] Vector Length:

    VECTOR TIME

    The vector length of a target is proportional to its speed, and the vector time can be
    changed from 1 to 60 minutes.
    The figure below illustrates a vector length of a target of six minutes. The tip of the vector
    represents the target’s expected position in six minutes.

    Current position

    Future predicted position
    (Six minutes later in this example)

    Setting Vector Time
    In order to display the relative vector, press the [TRUE/REL] key to select it.

    Procedures

    1

    Click the numeric section
    of VECTOR .
    The numeric input dialogue box is
    opened.

    2

    When changing vector constants, left-click the numbers 0 to 9
    keys to change the vectors.
    or the + or

    3

    Click ENT .
    The number input will be applied as the vector time.

    5-15



  • Page 195

    Display of Past Positions [PAST POSN]
    Press the [PAST POSN] switch to display the past position of targets.
    A maximum of six past positions for each target can appear. Every time the [PAST POSN]
    switch is pressed, the time interval is changed between 0.5, 1, 2 and 4 minutes. When the
    interval is 4 and the switch is pressed again, the past positions on display will be turned
    OFF.
    The interval is displayed under PAST POSN in the
    ARPA information screen.
    When OFF is
    displayed, the past position display is turned off.
    The trail mode is interlocked with the vector mode
    to allow the past positions of a target to appear in
    the True or Relative Vector mode. In the Relative
    Vector mode, the target’s relative past positions
    are displayed. In the True Vector mode, the
    target’s true past positions are displayed after
    calculating them from its relative bearing and
    range, and the course and speed of the own ship.
    Fig. 5-2 shows an example of a screENTisplay,
    and Table 5-1 shows the meanings of the symbols on the radar screen.

    Fig. 5.2 Example of Display (In North Up and True Vector Mode)
    In addition to the marks and symbols shown above, fixed/variable range markers, electronic
    bearing lines and other symbols are shown in an actual image.

    5-16



  • Page 196

    Table 5.1
    Vector/Symbol

    Definitions of Symbols

    Definition

    Remarks

    Tracked target
    Dangerous target
    (CPA/TCPA)

    Alarm characters (CPA/TCPA) appear and
    an alarm sounds. The vector and symbol
    blink.

    Initial acquisition
    mark

    Displayed after a target is acquired and until
    its vector is displayed.

    Target with its data
    indicated

    WhENTesignating a target’s data indication
    with the trackball, the target’s symbol is
    changed into
    and the target’s ID is
    indicated. However, in case of a lost target
    or a dangerous target, its corresponding
    symbol is displayed instead of
    .

    Lost target
    (This symbol appears
    when a target cannot
    be tracked for any
    reason.)

    Alarm characters (LOST) appear and an
    alarm sounds. No vector is displayed, but
    the symbol blinks.

    Target that has entered
    the guard zone

    Alarm characters (GZ) appear and an alarm
    sounds.
    The symbol blinks.

    Trackball cross cursor

    This cursor is used to select a target when
    acquiring manually, canceling targets and
    for setting numerical data.

    Post positions of
    targets

    The symbols and vectors are only displayed
    when [PAST POSN] is ON.
    The position interval can be set to 0.5, 1, 2 or
    4 minutes.

    5-17



  • Page 197

    5.6

    DATA DISPLAY
    Attention
    When a target or the own ship changes course or when a target is acquired, the
    vector may not reach a given level of accuracy until three minutes or more has
    passed after such a course change or target acquisition.
    Even if three minutes or more have passed, the vector may include an error
    depENTing upon the tracking conditions.

    Types of Data Display
    Target Data
    Target identification (ID)

    ID number of the target

    True bearing: T BRG

    0.1 degree units

    Range:

    RNG

    0.01 NM units

    True course:

    T CSE

    0.1 degree units

    True speed:

    T SPD

    0.1 knot units

    Closest point of approach (CPA)

    0.1 NM units

    Time to CPA (TCPA)

    0.1 minute units

    Bow crossing range (BCR)

    0.1 NM units

    Bow crossing time (BCT)

    0.1 minute units

    Targets that have their numeric data displayed are indicated with the symbol “□” to
    distinguish them from other targets.

    Note
    If a target’s data is displayed, but without the symbol “ ”, such a target exists
    outside the currently shown radar display.

    5-18



  • Page 198

    Method of Displaying Target Data [TGT DATA]
    Procedures

    1

    Press

    .

    TGT DATA will appear in the CURSOR (
    screen.

    2

    ) at the upper right of the radar

    Move the cross cursor to a target (being tracked) to indicate its
    data using the trackball. Next, press the left trackball button
    to select it. (Up to two targets can be selected.)
    The data of the designated target will be displayed, and the symbol will change to
    “ ”. The target data will remain on the radar display until the target is lost and
    its vector disappears, or until another target is designated.
    If a target with the “
    ” symbol is designated, only its true bearing (BRG) and
    range (RNG) will appear until its vector appears.

    Cancellation of Displaying Target Data [TGT DATA]
    Procedures

    1

    Press

    .

    TGT DATA will appear in the CURSOR (
    screen.

    2

    )at the upper right of the radar

    Move the cross cursor to a target (being target) to indicate its
    data using the trackball. Next, press the right trackball button
    to select it.
    The data of the designated target will be deleted, and the symbol will, change to
    acquisition mark.

    5-19



  • Page 199

    5.7

    ALARM DISPLAY
    The ARPA system provides the following alarms:
    Dangerous target alarm:
    CPA/TCPA
    Guard zone intrusion alarm: GZ
    Lost target alarm:
    LOST
    System function alarm:
    ARPA (DATA)
    Gyro set alarm:
    SET GYRO

    Dangerous Target Alarm: (CPA/TCPA)

    CAUTION
    If either the CPA LIMIT or TCPA LIMIT is set to zero, then the
    dangerous target alarm will not operate.
    Since these alarms may include some errors depENTing on the
    target tracking conditions, the navigation officer himself should
    make the final decision for ship operations such as collision
    avoidance.
    In the ARPA system, targets are categorized into two types: tracked targets and
    dangerous targets. The degree of danger can easily be recognized on the display at a
    glance, so that an officer can easily decide to which target he should pay attention.
    The types of targets and alarms are shown below.
    Dangerous Target Alarm
    Status

    Symbol on
    CRT

    Alarm
    characters

    Tracking
    target

    (OFF)

    Dangerous
    target

    CPA/
    TCPA

    Alarm sound

    (OFF)
    Beeping
    (pee-poh)
    Acknowledgeable

    Conditions
    • CPA>CPA LIMIT
    • 0>TCPA
    • TCPA>TCPA LIMIT
    • CPA≤CPA LIMIT
    0≤TCPA≤TCPA LIMIT

    CPA LIMIT and TCPA LIMIT: The setting values

    5-20



  • Page 200

    Guard Zone Alarm [GUARD ZONE]

    CAUTION
    In setting a guard zone, it is necessary to adjust radar tuning,
    gain, sea clutter suppression and rain/snow clutter suppression
    to ensure that target echoes are displayed in the optimum
    conditions. The guard zone alarm is not generated for the
    targets that are not detected by radar.

    The guard zone function is used to set a zone at an arbitrary range and to sound an alarm if
    a target intrudes into this zone.
    Refer to section 3.4 “Set Guard Zones” on how to set guard zones.

    Guard zone

    Guard Zone Alarm
    Status
    Target
    entering the
    guard zone

    Symbol on
    CRT

    Alarm
    characters

    Alarm sound
    Beeping (pipipi)
    Acknowledgeable

    GZ

    5-21

    Conditions
    An alarm sound is
    generated when a target
    enters the 0.5 NM range
    between the outer and inner
    rings.



  • Page 201

    Lost Target Alarm [LOST TARGET]
    Attention
    If the radar tuning, gain, sea clutter suppression and rain/snow clutter suppression
    are not appropriate, the lost target alarm may be generated frequently, so that
    adjustments should be made carefully.

    When it is impossible to continue tracking any acquired and tracked target, the LOST target
    alarm will be generated. The typical causes for this alarm are shown below, but they are
    not limited to these:
    • The target echo is very weak;
    • The target has entered the shadow of land or a large ship and its echo is not being
    received;
    • The target echo is hidden by sea clutter.

    Lost target

    Lost Target Alarm
    Status
    Lost target

    Symbol on
    CRT

    Alarm
    characters
    LOST

    Alarm sound
    Beep sound (pee)
    Acknowledgeable

    5-22

    Conditions
    The alarm will sound once
    when a lost target symbol is
    displayed.



  • Page 202

    System Function Alarm [ARPA (DATA)]
    When an abnormal state of an input signal or a problem in the processing circuitry occurs, a
    character string or alarm is generated. When an alarm occurs for any ARPA function,
    ARPA (DATA) will appear in the WARNING display area, but no indication is made in the
    ARPA information display. The cause of the alarm may be an operational error in ARPA,
    so please contact the service depot or manufacturer.

    Gyro Set Alarm [SET GYRO]
    The North Stabilizing Kit (NSK) in this system receives signals from a gyro. Even if the
    power is turned off, the system will track gyro motions. However, the system stops
    tracking the gyro if the power of the master gyro is turned off or if there are any problems
    with the line. When the power of the master gyro is turned back on, the SET GYRO alarm
    will be generated.
    If this alarm is sounded, set the gyro.

    Gyro Set Alarm
    Alarm
    characters

    Alarm sound

    SET GYRO

    Beep sound (pipi)

    Conditions
    The signals from the gyro are stopped, but the gyro is
    recovered.

    5-23



  • Page 203

    5.8

    TRIAL MANEUVERING
    Attention
    In trial maneuvering, a simulation is executed with the current course and speed
    of the target ship. Since the situation is different from actual ship maneuvers, the
    CPA LIMIT and TCPA LIMIT should be set with ample leeway.

    Trial maneuvering is used to simulate the course and speed necessary to avoid a collision
    when a dangerous target appears. When the ship’s course and speed are manually
    entered against the data of the acquired target, a check is made to determine whether there
    is any danger.
    The ranges of course and speed to be entered manually are as follows:
    Course: 360 degrees (0.1 degree intervals) .................. [EBL] control
    Speed: 0 to 100 knots (0.1 knot steps)......................... [VRM] control

    Trial Maneuvering in the True Vector Mode
    In the True Vector mode, calculations are made according to the values set by TRIAL
    SPEED and TRIAL COURSE, and the result is displayed as a bold-line that represents the
    change of the own ship’s vector as shown in the figure below (an example of the course
    changed to starboard).
    In this figure, the dangerous target that is ahead to the port side becomes safe as a result of
    the simulation.
    The target data display field indicates the current CPA LIMIT and TCPA LIMIT values
    regardless of the result of the simulation.

    5-24



  • Page 204

    Trial Maneuvering in the Relative Vector Mode
    The result of trial maneuvering in the Relative Vector mode is shown by a change in target
    vector. In the figure below (with the same conditions as in the True Vector mode on the
    previous page), it is seen that the acquired target is a dangerous one because its vector is
    crossing the CPA RING.

    The above figure shows that the relative vector of the target has changed as shown in the
    figure as a result of simulation (course and speed), so that the target’s symbol is changed to
    “ ”; i.e., a safe target. As was the case in the True Vector mode, the data display field
    indicates the current values of CPA LIMIT and TCPA LIMIT, not those as the result of the
    simulation.
    The course change of own ship is displayed as a dotted line.

    5-25



  • Page 205

    Using the TRIAL Function
    Procedures

    1

    Press the MENU or OPTION2 key on the screen.
    The ARPA menu will be opened.

    2

    Click SUB1 MENU , then ARPA/AIS and TRIAL .
    The ARPA TRIAL menu will be opened.

    3

    Left-click

    ON

    under

    1.TRIAL .

    “1.TRIAL” will be turned “ON” and the character “T” will blink below the own ship
    display in the radar screen, indicating that the system is conducting a trial.

    Cancellation

    4

    Make the settings with the course [EBL] control and speed
    [VRM] control.

    5

    The plot data symbols are “
    for safe targets.

    1

    Select OFF under TRIAL in the ARPA TRIAL menu.

    ” for dangerous targets and “

    “OFF” will be set for “TRIAL” and the system will return to the normal display.

    Exit

    1

    Click EXIT .
    The ARPA TRIAL menu will be closed.

    2

    Click EXIT .
    The ARPA menu will be closed.

    5-26





  • Page 206

    5.9

    DELETING UNWANTED TARGETS
    When it is no longer necessary to continue tracking acquired and tracked targets with their
    symbols and vectors displayed, or when it necessary to reduce the number of vectors to
    make the screen easier to observe, unnecessary targets can be cancelled one by one.
    When all targets are reacquired from the beginning, all the targets on display can be
    cancelled at once.

    Deleting Targets
    Deleting one target
    Procedures

    1

    Press

    .

    The ARPA menu is opened.

    2

    Place the cross cursor over the target to be deleted.

    3

    Press the left trackball button.
    The symbol and vector of the target will be deleted, and only the target echo will
    remain.

    Or,
    Procedures

    1

    Press

    .

    The ARPA menu is opened.

    2

    Place the cross cursor over the target to be deleted.

    5-27



  • Page 207

    3

    Press the left trackball button.
    The symbol and vector of the target will be deleted, and only the target echo will
    remain.

    Target to be deleted.

    Attention
    When all targets are deleted, the system stops tracking all the targets and they
    must be acquired again, either automatically or manually. Therefore, do not use
    this method except when it is necessary to delete all targets.

    Deleting all targets
    Procedures

    1

    Press

    continuously for 2 seconds or more.

    All the symbols and vectors of all targets will be deleted.

    5-28



  • Page 208

    5.10

    ARPA SETTING

    CAUTION
    This simulation is a function to check whether the ARPA system is
    operating normally. Do not use this function except to check
    ARPA operation.
    Especially, avoid using this mode during actual navigation
    because it will display pseudo targets on the radar screen which
    may be confused with actual targets. Using this function during
    actual navigation can lead to accidents.

    The following constants used for ARPA can be referred to and modified:

    [I]

    SIMULATOR:

    Pseudo targets are generated on the radar display to check
    whether the ARPA functions are operating normally.
    [II] VD LEVEL:
    Quantizing level for the video to be input to the target
    detection circuit.
    [III] VECTOR CONSTANT: Constant to calculate the ARPA vectors.
    [IV] GATE:
    Gate size to acquire and track targets.
    [V] TEST VIDEO:
    Test video for use in checking the operation of the target
    detection circuit.

    5-29



  • Page 209

    Simulation

    CAUTION
    Do not change the VD LEVEL and VECTOR CONSTANT,
    because they are already set to the optimum values. Making
    any changes to these may cause deterioration in the ARPA
    performance.

    Pseudo targets are generated in certain known positions to check whether the ARPA
    processing circuits are operating normally. Since the pseudo targets move according to
    known parameters, the values for these pseudo targets can be compared with the known
    values by acquiring, tracking and displaying them, and thereby checking whether the ARPA
    system is operating normally.
    This function should be used only in the standby
    mode.

    Procedures

    1

    Press

    to set

    the standby mode.
    2

    Click TEST on the screen.
    Or press OPTION1 key.
    The TEST Menu will appear.

    3

    Click ARPA TEST .
    The ARPA TEST menu will appear.

    4

    Click the
    box.

    1.SIMULATOR

    edit

    SIMULATOR is selected, and the pull down
    menu is displayed.

    5-30



  • Page 210

    5
    [

    When moving the pseudo target:
    ] SCENARIO1
    Click SCENARIO1 , then

    to set the transmission mode.

    2.SCENARIO1 will be set to generate a pseudo target at the true bearing
    of 18°and the relative range of 3.2NM. The target will then approach true
    bearing of 90°and the relative range of 1NM at a relative speed of
    20kts .Characters“XX”appear blinking at the lower of the radar display,
    showing that the system is executing the simulation mode.

    [

    ] SCENARIO2
    Click SCENARIO2 , then

    to set the transmission mode.

    3.SCENARIO2 will be set to generate a pseudo target at the true bearing of
    0°and the relative range of 6NM. The target will then approach own ship at
    a relative speed of 10 kts in a relative course of 180°.
    Characters“XX”appear blinking at the lower of the radar display, showing
    that the system is executing the simulation mode.

    Note: When the range between own ship and the pseudo target is 0,
    the target will disappear.
    6

    When finishing the simulation, press
    mode, then click OFF .

    to set the standby

    1.OFF will be set.

    Exit

    1

    Click EXIT or TEST .
    The TEST Menu will be closed.

    Pseudo Target Parameters
    SCENARIO
    NUMBER
    1
    2
    3
    4
    5
    6

    Start point
    Distance
    Direction
    18
    3.2NM
    0
    6NM
    18
    6NM
    45
    6NM
    45
    6NM
    45
    6NM

    5-31

    End point
    Distance
    Direction
    90
    1NM
    0
    0NM
    18
    1NM
    45
    1NM
    150
    6NM
    150
    6NM

    Target
    speed
    20kts
    10kts
    10kts
    105kts
    20kts
    20kts



  • Page 211

    Gate Size

    CAUTION
    Do not change the preset gate size carelessly. If the gate value is
    improper, the ARPA acquisition and tracking functions may
    deteriorate.
    Otherwise, this may cause accidents to occur.

    The Gate Size is defined as an“Area Within which targets are watched by the ARPA”processing
    circuit.
    If the gate size is too large, targets are not lost but may be swapped with other close targets.
    If the gate size is too small, targets are not easily swapped, but may be lost.
    The ARPA processing circuit is designed to detect target sizes and set an accurate gate size
    depENTing on the ranges and sizes of those targets (NARROW is the standard size). However,
    change the setting parameters to select the best size in the following conditions:

    Set 2.NARROW in normal operation.
    When acquiring and tracking targets that spread widely in the angular direction
    (The angular direction of the gate aperture is important)
    1.WIDE
    When many targets are densely congested and swapped within 3NM in a port
    (The gate size should be reduced)

    5-32

    3.SMALL



  • Page 212

    Procedures

    1

    Press the MENU or OPTION2 key on the screen.
    The Main Menu will appear.

    2

    Click SUB1 MENU , then
    ARPA/AIS.
    The ARPA Menu will appear.

    3

    Click the

    5.GATE

    edit box.

    The “2.SELECT SPEED” edit box
    will be selected.

    4

    Press any of 1 to 3.
    Enter the number of gate type to
    change.

    Exit

    1

    Click EXIT .
    The Sub1 Menu will reappear.

    2

    Click EXIT .
    The Sub1 Menu will be closed.

    5-33



  • Page 213

    Test Video
    Attention
    TEST VIDEO may not appear for targets that are not acquired or tracked, or if the
    controls [GAIN] and [SEA] are not adjusted appropriately.

    Test Video is used to check whether the video signals under target acquisition and tracking
    are inputted to and processed in the target processing circuit normally.
    However, it is sufficient to check that 3.VDH in TEST VIDEO is displayed.
    The start of the Test video mode is available only in the Standby mode.

    Procedures

    1

    Press

    to set

    the standby mode.
    2

    Click TEST on the screen.
    Or press OPTION1 key.
    The TEST Menu will appear.

    3

    Click ARPA TEST .
    The ARPA TEST Menu will appear.

    4

    Click the

    2.TEST VIDEO

    edit box.

    “2.TEST VIDEO” is selected and the pull down
    menu is displayed.

    5

    Click

    3.VDH

    to select it.

    3.VDH will be set.
    Test video for 3.VDH (video input in quantizing HIGH level) will appear on the
    radar display.

    6

    Press

    to set

    the transmission state.
    7

    In order to change the test video type, press

    to enter

    the standby mode, then select the test video type from the pull
    down menu.
    Attention:

    If

    OFF

    is set, test video will not be displayed.
    5-34



  • Page 214

    Exit

    1

    Click EXIT or TEST.
    The TEST Menu will be closed.
    Execute TEST VIDEO in 3.VDH normally.

    Attention:

    If any target displayed clearly in the radar display is not displayed in the
    Test Video mode, the target detection circuit og te ARPA system may
    have a trouble.

    5-35



  • Page 215

    SECTION 6
    TRUE AND FALSE ECHOES
    ON DISPLAY

    Radar Wave with the Horizon .......................................... 6-1
    Strength of Reflection from the Targets ......................... 6-3
    Sea Clutters....................................................................... 6-3
    False Echoes..................................................................... 6-3
    Display of Radar Transponder (SART) ........................... 6-6



  • Page 216



  • Page 217

    The radar operator has a role of interpreting the radar displays to provide his best aid in
    maneuvering the ship. For this purpose, the operator has to observe the radar displays after fully
    understanding the advantages and disadvantages that the radar has. For better interpretation of
    radar displays, it is important to gain more experiences by operating the radar equipment in fair
    weathers and comparing the target ships watched with the naked eyes and their echoes on the
    radar display.
    The radar is mainly used to monitor the courses of own ship and other ships in open seas, to
    check buoys and other nautical marks when entering a port, to measure own ship’s position in the
    coastal waters relative to the bearings and ranges of the shore or islands using a chart, and to
    monitor the position and movement of a heavy rain if it appears on the radar display.
    Various types of radar display will be explained below.

    Radar Wave with the Horizon
    Radar beam radiation has the nature of propagating nearly along the curved surface of the earth.
    The propagation varies with the property of the air layer through which the radar beam
    propagates.
    In the normal propagation, the distance (D) of the radar wave to the horizon is approximately 10%
    longer than the distance to the optical horizon. The distance (D) is given by the following
    formula:
    D = 2.23( h1 + h 2 )(nm)

    h1: Height (m) of radar scanner above sea level
    h2: Height (m) of a target above sea level
    Fig. 6.1 is a diagram for determining the maximum detection range of a target that is limited by the
    curve of the earth surface in the normal propagation.

    6-1



  • Page 218

    D (nm)

    Height of Scanner

    Detective Range

    Height of Target

    Fig. 6.1
    When the height of own ship’s scanner is 10 m for instance,
    (a) A target that can be detected at the radar range of 64 nm on the radar display is required to
    have a height of 660 m or more.
    (b) If the height of a target is 10 m, the radar range has to be approx. 15 nm. However, the
    maximum radar range at which a target can be detected on the radar display depends upon
    the size of the target and the weather conditions, that is, the radar range may increase or
    decrease depending upon those conditions.

    6-2



  • Page 219

    Strength of Reflection from the Targets
    The signal intensity reflected from a target depends not only on the height and size of the target
    but also on its material and shape. The echo intensity from a higher and larger target is not
    always higher in general.
    In particular, the echo from a coast line is affected by the geographic conditions of the coast.
    If the coast has a very gentle slope, the echo from a mountain on the inland appears on the radar
    display.
    Therefore, the distance to the coast line should be measured carefully.

    Fig. 6.2

    Sea Clutters
    When the sea surface ruffles, bright echo returns spread around the center of the radar display.
    The higher the waves are, the echo returns are larger.
    Swirling currents may appears as a smooth line like a coastal line.

    False Echoes
    The radar observer may be embarrassed with some echoes that do not exist actually. These
    false echoes appear by the following caused that are well known:

    [I]

    Shadow

    When the radar scanner is installed near a funnel or mast, the echo of a target that exists in the
    direction of the funnel or mast cannot appear on the radar display because the radar beam is
    reflected on the funnel or mast. Whether there are some false echoes due to shadows can be
    checked by monitoring the sea clutter returns, in which there may be a part of weak or no returns.
    Such shadows appear always in the same directions, which the operator should have in mind in
    radar operation.

    6-3



  • Page 220

    [II]

    Side Lobe Effect

    A broken-line circular arc may appear at the same range as the main lobe of the radar beam on
    the radar display. This type of false echo can easily be discriminated when a target echo
    appears independent. (See Fig. 6.3)

    Fig. 6.3

    [III]

    False Echo by Secondary Reflection

    When a target exists near own ship, two echoes from the single target may appear on the radar
    display. One of those echoes is the direct echo return from the target and the other is the
    secondary reflection return from a mast or funnel that stands in the same direction as shown in Fig.
    6.4.

    Fig. 6.4

    [IV] False Echo by Multiple Reflection

    When there is a large structure or ship with a high vertical surface near own ship as shown in Fig.
    6.5, multiple reflection returns may appear on the radar display. These echoes appear in the
    same intervals, of which the nearest echo is the true echo of the target.

    Fig. 6.5
    6-4



  • Page 221

    [V]

    Abnormal Propagation

    The maximum radar detection range depends upon the height of the scanner and the height of a
    target as described in the section of “The Horizon for Radar Beam Radiation”. If a so-called
    “duct” occurs on the sea surface due to a certain weather condition, however, the radar beam may
    propagate to an abnormally long distance, at which a target may be detected by the radar.
    For instance, assuming that the radar range is 6 NM (on the repetition frequency of 1100 Hz), the
    first pulse is reflected from a target at about 76 NM or more and received during the next pulse
    repetition time. In this case, a false echo appears at a position that is about 76 NM shorter than
    the actual distance. If the false echo appears at 5 NM on the radar display, the true distance of
    the target is 5 + 76 = 81 NM. On the radar range scale of 1.5 NM (on the repetition frequency of
    1900 Hz), a false echo may appear at a position that is about 43 NM shorter than the actual
    distance.
    This type of false echo can be discriminated by changing over the range scale (the repetition
    frequency), because the distance of the target changes accordingly.

    [VI] Radar Interface

    When another radar equipment using the same frequency band as that on own ship is near own
    ship, a radar interference pattern may appear on the radar display. This interference pattern
    consists of a number of spots which appear in various forms. These spots do not always appear
    at the same places, so that they can be discriminated from the target echoes. (See Fig. 6.6)

    Fig. 6.6

    6-5



  • Page 222

    Display of Radar Transponder (SART)
    The SART (Search and rescue Radar Transponder) is a survival device authorized by the GMDSS
    (Global Maritime Distress and Safety System), which is used for locating survivors in case that a
    distress accident occurs at sea. The SART is designed to operate in the 9 GHz frequency band.
    When receiving the 9 GHz radar signal (interrogating signal) transmitted from the radar equipment
    on a rescue ship or search aircraft, the SART transmit a series of response signals to inform the
    distress position to the rescue and search party.
    The SART position can be displayed on the radar video by setting the radar as follows:
    Radar range scale:
    6 NM or 12 NM
    Sea clutter control:
    Minimum (Most counterclockwise)
    AUTO SEA function:
    OFF
    TUNE control:
    No tuning (to weaken clutter echoes)
    Interference rejector (IR):
    OFF
    PROCESS:
    OFF
    SART code
    Position of SART
    Position of the rescue craft

    Land
    Other ships

    [Example of Display]
    Attention
    When the radar is set as in
    to
    above to detect the SART signal, the targets
    around own ship will disappear from the radar display. So it is necessary to
    exercise full surveillance over the conditions around own ship by visual watch in
    order to avoid any collision or stranding.
    If two or more sets of radar equipment are installed on own ship, use one set of 9
    GHz band radar for detection of the SART signal and operate others as normal
    radars for monitoring targets around own ship, checking on own ship’s position
    and avoidance of stranding.
    After end of detecting the SART signal, it is necessary to readjust the radar for
    normal navigation.

    6-6



  • Page 223

    SECTION 7
    MAINTENANCE

    7.1

    ROUTINE MAINTENANCE .................................... 7-1

    7.2

    MAINTENANCE ON EACH UNIT .......................... 7-2

    Scanner NKE-1079/1075A/1089/1087 .............................. 7-2
    Transmitter-receiver Unit NTG-3037/3037A/3028........... 7-4
    Display Unit NCD-4263 ..................................................... 7-5
    Coaxial Cable (JMA-9933-SA).......................................... 7-5
    Wave Guide (JMA-9923-7XA/9XA)................................... 7-6



  • Page 224



  • Page 225

    7.1

    ROUTINE MAINTENANCE

    WARNING
    Never carry out internal inspection or repair work of the
    equipment by a user.
    Inspection or repair work by unauthorized person may cause a
    fire or an electric shock.
    Ask your nearest branch, business office or a dealer for
    inspection and repair.
    Turn off the main power source before starting maintenance.
    Otherwise, an electric shock may result.

    For operating the radar equipment in the good conditions, it is necessary to make the
    maintenance work as described below. If maintenance is made properly, troubles will
    reduce. It is recommended to make regular maintenance work as often as possible.
    Common points of maintenance for each unit are as follows:
    Clean the equipment
    Remove the dust, dirt and sea water rest on the equipment cabinet with a piece of dry
    cloth.
    Especially, clean the air vents with a brush for good ventilation.

    7-1



  • Page 226

    7.2 MAINTENANCE ON EACH UNIT
    Scanner NKE-1079/1075/1089/1087

    WARNING
    Turn off the main power source before starting maintenance.
    Otherwise, an electric shock or injury may result.
    Set the Safety Switch for Stopping the Scanner to cents [OFF].
    Otherwise, an accidental contact with the rotating scanner may
    result in injury.
    Otherwise, an electric shock may result.

    After finishing the maintenance work, set the safety switch for stopping the scanner to
    “ON”.

    Precautions on Mounting the Cover
    When the cover is removed for regular checkup and replacement of parts and refitted
    after such work, the procedures of fastening bolts shall be taken with the following
    precautions:
    (a) The proper fastening torque of the fitting bolts (M8) is 1176 to 1470 N•cm (120 to 150
    kgf•cm) (which makes the inside water-tight and protects the packings against
    permanent compressive strain).
    The packings start producing from the cover at the torque of approximately 1470
    N•cm (150 kgf•cm) or more.
    Do not fasten the bolts with a torque exceeding the specified value. Otherwise, the
    screws may be broken.
    (b) Use an offset wrench of 11 mm × 13 mm or a double-ended wrench of 13 mm × 17
    mm (not longer than 200 mm).
    (c) Screw all the bolts by hand first to prevent them playing, then fasten them evenly in
    order not to cause one-sided fastening. (Fasten the bolts with 25% of the required
    torque at the first step.)
    *: Fasten the bolts in the diagonal order.

    7-2



  • Page 227

    Cover of NKE-1089
    Bolt Tightening Procedure

    Cover of NKE-1079
    Bolt Tightening Procedure

    (1) Radiator
    Attention
    If the radiator front face (radiation plane) is soiled with smoke, salt, dust, paint or
    birds’ droppings, wipe it with a piece of soft cloth wetted with alcohol or water and
    try to keep it clean at all times. Otherwise, radar beam radiation may attenuate
    or reflect on it, resulting in deterioration of radar performance.
    Never use solvents of gasoline, benzine, trichlorethylene and ketone for cleaning.
    Otherwise, the radiation plane may deteriorate.

    Check up and clean the radiator.

    7-3



  • Page 228

    (2) Scanner Mechanism
    (a) Supply Oil Seal
    When there is not a grease nipple, the replenishment of grease oil is
    unnecessary.
    Remove the cap of the grease nipple on the front of the S band radiator support
    and supply it with a grease gun. Make the oiling every six months. The oil
    quantity shall be approximately 100 g that is as much as the grease comes out
    of the oil seal. Use the grease of Mobilux 2 or EP2 of Mobil Oil.
    (b) Oiling gears
    Apply grease evenly to the tooth surfaces of the main shaft drive gear and the
    encoder drive gear with a spreader or brush. Greasing in short intervals is
    more effective to prevent the gears from wear and tear and extend their service
    life, but grease those at least every six months. Use Mobilux2 or EP2 of
    Mobile Oil.
    (c) Mounting legs
    Check the mounting legs and mounting bolts of the scanner unit case on
    corrosion sometimes and keep them in order not to cause any danger. Apply
    paint to them once a half year because painting is the best measure against
    corrosion.

    Transmitter-receiver Unit NTG-3037/3028
    Wipe dust on the transmitter and receiver sections with a piece of dry cloth or
    feather.

    7-4



  • Page 229

    Display Unit NCD-4263

    WARNING
    Do not wipe the radar display surface strongly with a piece of dry
    cloth or do not use gasoline or thinner for cleaning. Otherwise,
    the display surface may be damaged.
    Dust accumulated on the radar display will reduce clarity and darken the video. For
    cleaning it, wipe it with a piece of soft cloth (flannel or cotton). Do not wipe it strongly
    with a piece of dry cloth nor use gasoline or thinner.

    Coaxial Cable (JMA-9933-SA)
    (1) The coaxial pipe gland of the coaxial cable will be provided with perfect water-tight
    treatment at the time of installation. Check it and ensure that not water leak occurs
    from the connection parts. In particular it is recommended to apply paint to the
    coaxial pipe gland every six months.

    WARNING
    Do not give strong impact to the coaxial cable by hitting it with
    any tool or hammer.
    Otherwise, it may be broken.
    Do not put any heavy article on the coaxial cable.
    may be broken.
    Do not twist or pull the coaxial cable.
    broken.

    Otherwise, it

    Otherwise, it may be

    (2) For further details, refer to the Coaxial Cable Connection Procedures for the S band
    Radar.

    7-5



  • Page 230

    Wave Guide (JMA-9923-7XA/9XA)
    Attention
    Connect the wave guide properly with no gaps.
    cause water leaks or corrosion later.

    7-6

    Otherwise, such gaps may



  • Page 231

    SECTION 8
    COUNTERMEASURES FOR
    TROUBLE AND ADJUSTMENT

    8.1 FUNCTION CHECK ......................................................8-1

    Vector Constant...............................................................8-38

    Function Check on Test Menu .........................................8-2

    Quantization Level ..........................................................8-39

    List of Alarms and other Indications .............................8-14

    Adjustment of NSK Unit to Gyro Compass and Log ...8-40

    8.2 TROUBLESHOOTING ................................................8-17

    Main Bang Suppression Adjustment ............................8-42

    8.3 COUNTERMEASURES TO TROUBLE ......................8-18

    8.6 SETTING .....................................................................8-44

    8.4 REPLACEMENT OF MAJOR PARTS.........................8-24

    True Bearing Setting.......................................................8-44

    Replacement of PARTS Periodically…………………..8-26

    Ship Speed Setting .........................................................8-45

    Replacement of the Liquid-Crystal Monitor..................8-32

    Navigation Equipment Setting.......................................8-47

    8.5 ADJUSTMENTS..........................................................8-33

    Current Correction (SET/DRIFT) Setting.......................8-48

    Tuning Adjustment..........................................................8-34

    Time/Day Display Setting ...............................................8-50

    Bearing Adjustment ........................................................8-35

    Adjustment of Performance Monitor (NJU-63/64)........8-52

    Range Adjustment ..........................................................8-36

    Adjustment of Inter switch ...........................................8-54

    Antenna Height Adjustment ...........................................8-37



  • Page 232

    ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●

    8.1

    FUNCTION CHECK

    Make operational check on the radar equipment regularly and if any problem is found, investigate it
    immediately. Pay special attention to the high voltage sections in checking and take full care that no
    trouble is caused by any error or carelessness in measurement. Take note of the results of checking,
    which can be used effectively in the next check work.
    Operational check shall be made in accordance with Table 8.1 Function Check List in the order as
    specified in it.

    Table 8.1
    Equipment
    Transmitterreceiver Unit

    Function Check List

    Check Item

    Criteria

    Tuning LED of Receiver

    The LED is lighting during
    operation

    Video and echoes on the
    screen

    Can be correctly controlled

    Sensitivity
    CRT brilliance can be
    controlled correctly
    Various markers
    Various numerical
    indications
    Lighting

    Display Unit



    Safety switch and various
    currents and voltages

    (1)

    Refer to Check of Safety
    Switch, Various Currents
    and Voltages, and Signals.

    Communication lines

    (2)

    Refer to Check of
    Peripheral Units.

    Panel

    (3)

    Refer to Check of Panel.

    ARPA

    (4)

    Refer to Check of ARPA.

    Magnetron current

    (5)

    Refer to Check of
    Magnetron Current.

    Performance Monitor

    (6)

    Refer to Check of
    Performance Monitor.

    Error Logging Display

    (7)

    Refer to Check of Error
    Logging Display.

    System Information Display

    (8)

    Refer to System
    Information Display.

    8-1

    Remarks
    48 NM range



  • Page 233

    ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●

    Function Check on Test Menu・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・
    The function status of this radar equipment can be checked on the TEST Menu.

    Procedures

    1

    Click TEST on the screen. Or click OPTION1 key.
    The TEST Menu will appear.

    2

    Left-click at any test item.
    A click of the left mouse button at any test item displays detailed information on
    the selected test item.

    (1) Check of Memory, Safety Switch, Various
    Currents
    and
    Voltages,
    and
    Communication Lines
    (2) Check of Panel
    (3) Check of ARPA
    (4) Check of Magnetron Current

    TEST MENU
    1.

    SELF CHECK

    2.

    PANEL TEST

    ARPATEST
    3.
    4.MAG CURRENT
    OFF
    ON
    5.PM
    OFF
    ON
    6.

    ERROR LOGGING

    7.

    SYSTEM INFO

    0.

    EXIT

    (5) Check with Performance Monitor
    (6) Error Logging Display
    (7) System Information Display


    EXIT

    1

    Click

    EXIT

    .

    The TEST Menu will be closed.

    8-2



  • Page 234

    ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●

    1 SELF CHECK
    1-1 SENSOR
    Procedures

    1

    Click TEST on the screen. Or click OPTION1 key.
    The TEST Menu will appear.

    2

    Click

    SELF CHECK .

    The SELF CHECK Menu will appear.

    3

    Click

    SENSOR .

    The SENSOR Menu will appear.

    4

    Check OK on each item.
    If any item is no good, NG will be selected.
    In the standby mode, ** will be selected for VIDEO.
    If the safety switch on the scanner is OFF, OFF will be selected.

    TEST MENU
    SELF CHECK
    SENSOR

    Scanner Rotation Signal

    * SAFETY SWITCH
    OK



    * AZI PULSE

    OK

    * HL PULSE

    OK

    * MH CURRENT

    OK

    * TRIGGER

    OK

    * VIDEO

    OK

    * FAN1

    OK

    * FAN2

    OK

    0.

    EXIT

    1

    Safety Switch on the Scanner
    Ship's Heading Line Signal
    Load Current of High Voltage in Modulator
    Radar Trigger Signal
    Radar Video
    Fan 1
    Fan 2

    EXIT

    Click

    EXIT

    .

    The SELF CHECK Menu will reappear.

    2

    Click

    EXIT

    .

    The TEST Menu will reappear.

    2

    Click

    EXIT

    .

    The TEST Menu will be closed.

    8-3



  • Page 235

    ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●

    1-2 LINE CHECK
    Procedures

    1

    Click TEST on the screen. Or click OPTION1 key.
    The TEST Menu will appear.

    2

    Click

    SELF CHECK .

    The SELF CHECK Menu will appear.

    3

    Click

    LINE CHECK .

    The LINE CHECK Menu will appear.

    4

    Check whether each communication line is connected.
    ・When the device is connected:
    CONNECT
    ・When the device is not connected: DISCONNECT
    ・When the not recognition:
    *****
    TEST MENU
    SELF CHECK
    LINE CHECK

    CONNECT
    * MTR
    * SIG.PROC.
    CONNECT
    * ARPA

    CONNECT

    * SERI I/F

    CONNECT

    ARPA Processing Circuit
    Serial Interface Circuit

    * NSK

    CONNECT

    NSK Unit

    * ISW

    CONNECT

    * NAV1

    CONNECT

    * NAV2

    CONNECT

    * 2AXIS

    CONNECT

    Interswitch (Option)
    Navigation Equipment 1
    Navigation Equipment 2
    2-axis Log



    EXIT

    0.

    EXIT

    Transmitter-receiver Unit
    Signal Processing Circuit

    1

    Click

    EXIT .

    The SELF CHECK Menu will reappear.

    2

    Click

    EXIT .

    The TEST Menu will reappear.

    3

    Click

    EXIT .

    The TEST Menu will be closed.

    8-4



  • Page 236

    ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●

    1-3 MONITOR CHECK
    Keep off condition.
    This function is useful for monitor adjustment with service man.

    NOTE: Keep off condition.
    If the test pattern of the monitor is displayed, it can be returned to the
    previous screen with "OPTION2" or by left-clicking the mouse.

    2 PANEL TEST
    2-1 KEY
    Refer to (2) Checking panel in Section 8.1.1 Function Check on Test Menu.

    Procedures

    1

    Click the TEST on the screen.
    TEST MENU

    The TEST menu will appear.

    PANEL TEST

    2

    3

    Click PANEL TEST .

    1.

    KEY

    The PANEL TEST Menu will appear.

    2.

    BUZZER

    3.

    LAMP

    0.

    EXIT

    Click KEY .
    “1.KEY” is set and the control panel
    diagram will appear on the display.
    When a key on the control panel of the
    actual equipment is pressed, the portion
    corresponding to the pressed key in the
    panel diagram will turn the color.

    Exit

    1

    Click EXIT .
    The TEST Menu will be finished.

    2



    Click EXIT .
    The TEST Menu will be closed.

    8-5



  • Page 237

    ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●

    2-2 BUZZER
    Refer to (2) Checking Panel in Section 8.1.1 Function Check on Test Menu.
    TEST MENU

    Procedures

    1

    Click the TEST on the screen.
    The TEST menu will appear.

    2

    Click PANEL TEST .

    PANEL TEST
    1.

    KEY

    2.

    BUZZER

    3.

    LAMP

    0.

    EXIT

    The PANEL TEST Menu will appear.

    3

    Click BUZZER .
    The BUZZER Menu will appear. A beep of
    the buzzer indicates that the operation is
    normal..

    1

    Exit

    Click EXIT .
    The TEST Menu will be closed.

    2-3 LAMP
    Refer to (2) Checking Panel in Section 8.1.1 Function Check on Test Menu.

    Procedures

    1

    Click the TEST on the screen.

    TEST MENU
    PANEL TEST

    The TEST menu will appear.

    2

    3

    1.

    KEY

    Click PANEL TEST .

    2.

    BUZZER

    The PANEL TEST Menu will appear.

    3.

    LAMP



    Click LAMP .
    The LAMP Menu will appear. The key
    backlight is turned on, the operation is
    normal.

    Exit

    1

    Click TEST .
    The TEST Menu will be closed.

    0.

    EXIT

    Note: When performing a LAMP test, the operation cannot be checked if the
    8-6



  • Page 238

    ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●

    brilliance level of the key backlight is at maximum. (The brilliance will not
    change)
    3 ARPA TEST

    3-1 SIMULATOR
    Refer to (3) Checking ARPA in Section 8.1.1 Function Check on Test Menu.

    Procedures

    1

    Press
    mode.

    TX
    STBY

    to set the standby

    TEST MENU
    ARPA TEST

    2

    Click the TEST on the screen.
    The TEST menu will appear.

    3

    Click RPA TEST.
    The ARPA TEST Menu will appear.

    4

    Click SIMULATOR .

    1.SIMULATOR
    1.OFF
    2.TEST VIDEO
    1.OFF
    1.OFF
    STATUS
    3.
    2.VDG
    3.VDH
    4.VDL
    5.VDIN

    “1.SIMULATOR”will be selected and the
    pull-down menu will appear.

    5

    6

    Exit

    1

    Select any setting item of ARPA
    Simulator in the pull-down menu
    and press any of 1 to 7.
    Press

    TX
    STBY

    0.

    EXIT

    to set the transmission mode.

    Click TESE .
    The TEST Menu will be closed.



    Note: In normal operation, it is necessary to turn off the "SIMULATOR".

    8-7



  • Page 239

    ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●

    3-2

    TEST VIDEO
    Refer to (3) Checking ARPA in Section 8.1.1 Function Check on Test Menu.

    Procedures

    1

    Press
    mode .

    TX
    STBY

    to set the standby
    TEST MENU
    ARPA TEST

    2

    Click the TEST on the screen.
    The TEST menu will appear.

    3

    Click ARPA TEST .
    The ARPA TEST Menu will appear.

    4

    Click TEST VIDEO .
    2.TEST VIDEO will be selected and the
    pull-down menu will appear.

    5

    1.SIMULATOR
    1.OFF
    2.TEST VIDEO
    1.OFF
    1.OFF
    STATUS
    3.
    2.VDG
    3.VDH
    4.VDL
    5.VDIN

    Select any setting item in the
    pull-down menu and press any of 0
    to 7 numbers.
    0.

    6

    Exit

    1

    Press

    TX
    STBY

    EXIT

    to set the transmission mode.

    Click TEST .
    The TEST Menu will be closed.



    8-8



  • Page 240

    ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●

    3-3 STATUS
    Procedures

    1

    Click TEST on the screen. Or click OPTION1 key.
    The TEST Menu will appear.

    2

    Click

    ARPA TEST .

    The ARPA TEST Menu will appear.

    3

    Click

    STATUS .

    The STATUS Menu will appear to indicate the ARPA setting values and
    conditions.
    Vector Constant
    (Refer to Vector Constant in Section 8.5
    ADJUSTMENTS)
    Quantization Level in Automatic Acquisition
    (Refer to Quantization Level in Section
    8.5 ADJUSTMENTS)
    Quantization Level on medium and Short
    Ranges (Refer to Quantization Level in
    Section
    8.5 ADJUSTMENTS)
    Quantization Level on Long Range
    (Refer to Quantization Level in Section
    8.5 ADJUSTMENTS)
    Gate Size
    (Refer to Gate Size in Section 5.10 ARPA
    SETTING)
    Current Numbers of Targets Under Tracking

    TEST MENU
    ARPA TEST
    STATUS
    * CONSTANT

    4

    * VID LEVEL TD

    45

    * VID LEVEL HI

    40

    * VID LEVEL LOW

    35

    * GATE SIZE

    NARROW

    * TRACKING

    0

    EXIT

    0.



    EXIT

    1

    Click

    EXIT .

    The ARPA TEST Menu will reappear.

    2

    Click

    EXIT .

    The TEST Menu will be reappear.

    3

    Click

    EXIT .

    The TEST Menu will be closed.
    8-9



  • Page 241

    ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●

    4 MAG CURRENT

    Procedures

    1

    Click TEST on the screen. Or click OPTION1 key.
    The TEST Menu will appear.

    2

    Select "ON" radio button of MAG CURRENT .
    “ON”in“4.MAG CURRENT”will be set. The magnetron current is displayed
    at the bar-graph on the TEST Menu.
    TEST MENU

    1.

    SELF CHECK

    2.

    PANEL TEST

    ARPATEST
    3.
    4.MAG CURRENT
    OFF
    ON
    5.PM
    OFF
    ON
    6.

    ERROR LOGGING

    7.

    SYSTEM INFO

    Magnetron current

    MAG

    0.

    EXIT

    Check“5-9.5”in the 24 NM range.

    EXIT

    1

    Click

    EXIT .

    The TEST Menu will be closed.

    8-10





  • Page 242

    ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●

    5 PM (Performance Monitor)
    Refer to (5) Checking Performance Monitor in Section 8.1.1 Function Check
    on Test Menu.

    Procedures

    1

    Click the TEST on the screen.
    The TEST menu will appear.

    2

    Exit

    TEST MENU
    1.

    SELF CHECK

    Select "ON" radio button of PM .

    2.

    PANEL TEST

    If the Performance Monitor is installed,
    “ON” in “5.PM” will be set and the status
    performance monitor will appear by the
    [PM] bar-graph in the TEST Menu.
    Press 5 again. “5.PM” will be set to “ON”
    and the [PM] indicator in the menu will
    disappear.

    ARPATEST
    3.
    4.MAG CURRENT
    OFF
    ON
    5.PM
    OFF
    ON

    1 Click EXIT or TEST .
    The TEST Menu will be closed. If “5.PM” is
    set to “ON”, the status will be set to “OFF”
    automatically.



    8-11

    6.

    ERROR LOGGING

    7.

    SYSTEM INFO

    PM

    0.

    EXIT

    of



  • Page 243

    ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●

    6 ERROR LOGGING
    If any system error occurs, the communication line in which the error is caused will be
    indicated by the selected characters. The errors that are released will also be
    indicated in time sequence.

    Procedures

    1

    Click TEST on the screen. Or click OPTION1 key.
    The TEST Menu will appear.

    2

    Click

    ERROR LOGGING .

    The ERROR LOGGING Menu will appear and the location in which an
    error has occurred will appear by selected characters..
    TEST MENU
    ERROR LOGGING

    EXIT

    1

    1.

    ALL CLEAR

    0.

    EXIT

    Click

    EXIT .

    The ERROR LOGGING Menu will be closed.

    2

    Press

    EXIT .

    The TEST Menu will be closed.

    8-12





  • Page 244

    ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●

    7 SYSTEN INFO
    The current system information will be indicated.

    Procedures

    1

    Click TEST on the screen. Or click OPTION1 key.
    The TEST Menu will appear.

    2

    Click

    SYSTEM INFO .

    The SYSTEM INFORMATION Menu will appear to display the current
    system information.

    TEST MENU
    SYSTEM INFO
    * INDICATOR
    Ver.01.00
    Ver.02.10

    * MTR
    * SYSTEM

    Ver.01.00

    * TX TIME
    1 hours
    * TOTAL TIME
    2 hours
    0.



    EXIT

    1

    Click

    EXIT

    EXIT .

    The TEST Menu will reappear.

    2

    Click

    EXIT .

    The TEST Menu will be closed.

    8-13



  • Page 245

    ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●

    List of Alarms and other Indications・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・
    Table 8.2

    List of Gyro Alarms

    Message

    Description

    SET GYRO

    Requires initialization of NSK or setting of initial values for gyro.

    TM RESET

    Own ship’s position has reached at approx. 60% of the radar PPI
    radius in the TM mode.

    POSN RST

    Change the latitude and longitude sentence.

    Table 8.3

    List of ARPA Alarms

    Message

    Description

    CPA/TCPA

    CPA/TCPA of a target (ARPA)

    GZ

    A target approaching own ship exists in a guard zone.

    LOST

    A target under acquisition can not be tracked.

    Table 8.4

    List of Operational Error Messages and Warnings

    Error Message

    Description

    OUT OF RANGE

    Tried to create a guard zone outside the specified range.

    CHANGE RANGE

    The range is set outside the specified in creating a guard zone.

    MAX POINT

    Tried to enter navigation information beyond the specified.

    CAN’T TRANSMIT

    Tried to transmit within 1 second after standby or when the
    transmitter-receiver has any trouble.

    MAX MARK

    Tried to enter more than 20 plot marks.

    CAN’T CHANGE

    Key in with the [+] or [-] at any place where only a numerical value
    can be entered.

    NO GYRO DATA

    Any operation requiring Gyro data was made without it.

    INVALID DATA

    Tried to enter any data beyond its range.

    NO POSITION DATA

    Any operation requiring position data was made without it.

    CHG REL VECTOR

    Tried to display a CPA ring in TRUE mode.

    MAX TARGET

    The maximum number of targets (50 targets) is under acquisition.

    SELECT STRAIGHT

    The operator set PM to ON without selecting straight.

    NOT ALLOWED

    Improper operation

    8-14





  • Page 246

    ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●

    Table 8.5

    List of Interswitch Alarms and Messages

    Error Message

    Description

    MASTER RANGE CHG

    Tried to change the master range.

    ALREADY SELECTED

    Selected the already selected pattern.

    ISW END!

    The switchover of the Interswitch ended normally.

    ISW BUSY!

    Access to the ISW menu was made during interswitching.

    MTR ST-BY!

    The master MTR is in the standby mode.

    ISW STRAIGHT

    Failed in straight connection when the Interswitch system stops
    operating.

    ISW STAND-BY!

    The Interswitch recovered normally.

    ISW TIME OUT

    Communication error occurred between interswitch and display.

    ISW ERROR!

    The interswitch is disabled.

    Note:━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━
    An error message and a warning are displayed at lower right (shown below) in radar
    display mode.

    EBL1
    EBL2
    VRM1
    VRM2

    DISPLAY INFO
    PANEL
    FUNC3
    TOKYO
    NAV
    T 037.0 °C PIN
    T 135.0 °O MENU
    PI
    GZ
    TEST
    1.70 nm
    ACK
    2.20 nm
    No Alarm



    Display position

    8-15



  • Page 247

    ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●

    Table 8.6

    List of System Alarms

    Message

    Description

    MTR(AZI)

    Bearing signal error

    MTR(HL)

    Ship’s heading line signal error

    MTR(MHV)

    Modulator’s high voltage error

    MTR(DATA)

    Communications error with the transmitter-receiver unit

    MTR(HEATER)

    Magnetron heater voltage is abnormal

    MTR(REVERSE)

    Antennal rotation is reversed

    MTR STATUS

    Transceiver status error

    SSW OFF

    The safety switch is OFF during switchover of the scanners

    NSK(GYRO)

    Gyro signal OFF

    ISW(DATA)

    Communications error with the interswitch

    LOG

    Log signal OFF

    NAV(DATA)

    Date from navigation equipment OFF

    DLOG

    2-axis log signal OFF

    ARPA(DATA)

    Communications error with the ARPA unit

    NSK(DATA)

    Communications error with NSK unit

    VIDEO

    Radar video OFF

    TRIGGER

    Trigger signal OFF

    FAN1

    Fan alarm 1

    FAN2

    Fan alarm 2

    PROC(DATA)

    Signal processing circuit error

    SERI(DATA)

    Serial interface circuit error

    LAN(DATA)

    LAN I/F circuit error

    232C(DATA)

    RS-232C communications error

    MTR(VID)

    Abnormal scanner vibrations

    MTR(TMP)

    Abnormal scanner temperature

    MAG(HDG)

    Data from Mag compass have been cut off

    PROC(AZI)

    Bearing pulse is abnormal



    8-16



  • Page 248

    ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●

    8.2

    TROUBLESHOOTING

    In case of semiconductor circuits, it is deemed that there is few cases in which the used
    semiconductor devices have inferior quality or performance deterioration except due to insufficient
    design or inspection or by other external and artificial causes. In general, the relatively many causes
    are disconnection in a high-value resistor due to moisture, a defective variable resistor and poor
    contact of a switch or relay.
    Some troubles are caused by defective parts, imperfect adjustment (such as tuning adjustment) or
    insufficient service (such as poor cable contact). It will also be effective to check and readjust these
    points.
    Melted fuses are caused by any clear cause. When a fuse is replaced, it is necessary to check the
    related circuits even if there is no trouble. In this case, note that there is some dispersion in the
    fusing characteristics. Table 8.7 shows a list of fuses used in the equipment.

    Table 8.7
    Location
    Transmitterreceiver Unit
    Display Unit
    (NSK)

    Fuse List

    F1

    Nominal
    Current
    1A

    Rectifier circuit PC1001

    MF51NN-1A

    F1 to F4

    0.5A

    LOG.NSK circuit PC4201

    MF60NR-0.5A

    Parts No.



    8-17

    Protection Circuit

    Type



  • Page 249

    ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●

    8.3

    COUNTERMEASURES TO TROUBLE

    As this radar equipment includes complicated circuits, it is necessary to request a specialist engineer
    for repair or instructions for countermeasure if any circuit is defective.
    There are also troubles by the following causes, which should be referred to in checking or repair
    work.

    1

    Poor Contact in Terminal Board of Inter-Unit Cables
    a)
    b)
    c)

    2

    Poor contact in terminal board
    The cable end is not fully treated, so that it is earthed or contacts with another
    terminal.
    Disconnected cable wire

    Poor Contact of Connector within Unit

    Reference:━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━
    This radar equipment is provided with the standard spares as shown in
    Table 8.8.
    Table 8.8 Spares (6ZXRD00198)
    Name
    Fuse

    Type/Code

    Shape (mm)

    MF51NN-1A

    In
    use

    Spare

    1

    3

    F1

    Transmitterreceiver
    PC1001

    4

    12

    F1 to F4

    Display
    NSK Circuit

    Parts No.

    φ5.2

    (5ZFAD00042)

    20
    Fuse

    MF60NR-0.5A

    φ6.4

    (5ZFAD00013)

    Location



    30

    8-18



  • Page 250

    ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●

    Table 8.9 Special Parts

    [Ⅰ] JMA-9933-SA
    Parts No.
    V201

    Name
    Magnetron

    Type
    M1302

    Manufacturer
    NJRC

    Location
    Transmitterreceiver
    Transmitterreceiver
    Transmitterreceiver

    Code
    5VMAA00032

    A201

    Circulator

    NJC3310

    NJRC

    A202

    TRHPL

    TL378A

    NJRC

    Type
    M1302
    NJC3320
    TL378A

    Manufacturer
    NJRC
    NJRC
    NJRC

    Location
    Scanner
    Scanner
    Scanner

    Code
    5VMAA00032
    5AJBV00004
    5VLAA00032

    Location
    Transmitterreceiver
    Transmitterreceiver
    Transmitterreceiver
    Transmitterreceiver

    Code
    5VMAA00082

    5AJBV00002
    5VLAA00032

    [Ⅱ] JMA-9932-SA
    Parts No.
    V101
    A101
    A303

    Name
    Magnetron
    Circulator
    TRHPL

    [Ⅲ] JMA-9923-7XA/9XA
    Parts No.
    V1

    Name
    Magnetron

    Type
    M1568B(J)

    Manufacturer
    NJRC

    A201/A202

    Circulator

    FCX68

    A203

    Diode Limiter

    NJS6930

    TOSHIBA
    CORPORATION
    NJRC

    A302

    Pin Attenuator

    NJS6926

    NJRC

    Manufacturer
    NJRC
    TOSHIBA
    CORPORATION
    NJRC

    6AJRD00001
    5EZAA00024
    5ENAC00019

    [Ⅳ] JMA-9922-6XA/9XA



    Parts No.
    V1
    A101

    Name
    Magnetron
    Circulator

    Type
    M1568B(J)
    FCX68

    A303

    Diode Limiter

    NJS6930

    8-19

    Location
    Scanner
    Scanner

    Code
    5VMAA00082
    6AJRD00001

    Scanner

    5EZAA00019



  • Page 251

    ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●

    Table 8.10 Repair Circuit Block (JMA-9933-SA)
    Location

    Circuit Block

    Type

    Remarks

    Scanner

    Motor with gear

    MPEM30030

    AC220/230V3φ

    Scanner

    Motor with gear

    MPEM30110

    AC220/230V1φ

    Scanner

    Motor with gear

    MPEM30092

    AC100/110V1φ

    Transmitterreceiver

    Modulator

    NMA-1253-1

    Including PC210 (CPA-209)
    Excluding Magnetron

    Transmitterreceiver

    Receiver

    NRG-88

    PC301(CEA-334-1)
    PC302(CEA-424)
    PC303(CEA-205)
    Including PC304 (CBD-1274)

    Transmitterreceiver

    Power supply circuit

    CBA-1682

    Transmitterreceiver

    T/R control circuit

    CMC-1205

    Display

    Power supply circuit

    CBD-1661

    Display

    Terminal board circuit

    CQD-1949

    Display

    NSK/LOG I/F circuit

    CMJ-462A

    Display

    Mother board

    CMC-1094

    Display

    Panel circuit-1

    CCK-900

    Display

    Panel circuit-2

    CCK-901

    Display

    Panel circuit-3

    CCK-902

    Display

    Display control circuit

    CMC-1218

    Display

    Signal processing circuit

    CDC-1209

    Display

    Interswitch circuit

    NQE-3141

    (Option)



    8-20



  • Page 252

    ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●

    Table 8.11 Repair Circuit Block (JMA-9932-SA)
    Location

    Circuit Block

    Type

    Remarks

    Scanner

    Motor with gear

    MPEM30030

    AC220/230V3φ

    Scanner

    Motor with gear

    MPEM30110

    AC220/230V1φ

    Scanner

    Motor with gear

    MPEM30092

    AC100/110V1φ

    Transmitterreceiver

    Modulator

    NMA-534-1

    Including PC210 (CPA-209)
    Excluding Magnetron

    Transmitterreceiver

    Receiver

    NRG-222

    PC301(CEA-334-4)
    PC302(CEA-424)
    PC303(CEA-205)
    Including PC304 (CBD-1274)

    Transmitterreceiver

    Power supply circuit

    CBA-1682

    Transmitterreceiver

    T/R control circuit

    CMC-1205

    Display

    Power supply circuit

    CBD-1661

    Display

    Terminal board circuit

    CQD-1949

    Display

    NSK/LOG I/F circuit

    CMJ-462A

    Display

    Mother board

    CMC-1094

    Display

    Panel circuit-1

    CCK-900

    Display

    Panel circuit-2

    CCK-901

    Display

    Panel circuit-3

    CCK-902

    Display

    Display control circuit

    CMC-1218

    Display

    Signal processing circuit

    CDC-1209

    Display

    Interswitch circuit

    NQE-3141



    8-21

    (Option)



  • Page 253

    ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●

    Table 8.12 Repair Circuit Block (JMA-9923-7XA/9XA)
    Location

    Circuit Block

    Type

    Remarks

    Scanner

    Motor with gear

    MDBW10645

    AC220/230V3φ

    Scanner

    Motor with gear

    MPEM30177

    AC220/230V1φ

    Scanner

    Motor with gear

    MPEM30176

    AC100/110V1φ

    Transmitterreceiver

    Modulator

    NMA-1252-1

    Including PC210 (CPA-209)
    Excluding Magnetron

    Transmitterreceiver

    Receiver

    NRG-98

    Transmitterreceiver

    Power supply circuit

    CBA-1682

    Transmitterreceiver

    T/R control circuit

    CMC-1205

    Display

    Power supply circuit

    CBD-1661

    Display

    Terminal board circuit

    CQD-1949

    Display

    NSK/LOG I/F circuit

    CMJ-462A

    Display

    Mother board

    CMC-1094

    Display

    Panel circuit-1

    CCK-900

    Display

    Panel circuit-2

    CCK-901

    Display

    Panel circuit-3

    CCK-902

    Display

    Display control circuit

    CMC-1218

    Display

    Signal processing circuit

    CDC-1209

    Display

    Interswitch circuit

    NQE-3141

    (Option)



    8-22



  • Page 254

    ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●

    Table 8.13 Repair Circuit Block (JMA-9922-6XA/9XA)
    Location

    Circuit Block

    Type

    Remarks

    Scanner

    Motor with gear

    MDBW10645

    AC220/230V3φ

    Scanner

    Motor with gear

    MPEM30177

    AC220/230V1φ

    Scanner

    Motor with gear

    MPEM30176

    AC100/110V1φ

    Transmitterreceiver

    Modulator

    NMA-499-1

    Including PC210 (CPA-209)
    Excluding Magnetron

    Transmitterreceiver

    Receiver

    NRG-154

    Transmitterreceiver

    Power supply circuit

    CBA-1682

    Transmitterreceiver

    T/R control circuit

    CMC-1205

    Display

    Power supply circuit

    CBD-1661

    Display

    Terminal board circuit

    CQD-1949

    Display

    NSK/LOG I/F circuit

    CMJ-462A

    Display

    Mother board

    CMC-1094

    Display

    Panel circuit-1

    CCK-900

    Display

    Panel circuit-2

    CCK-901

    Display

    Panel circuit-3

    CCK-902

    Display

    Display control circuit

    CMC-1218

    Display

    Signal processing circuit

    CDC-1209

    Display

    Interswitch circuit

    NQE-3141



    8-23

    (Option)



  • Page 255

    ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●

    8.4

    REPLACEMENT OF MAJOR PARTS

    DENGER
    In this INTER-SWITCH system, even if it turns OFF
    a Indicator power supply, the power supply may
    be supplied to the scanner.
    Turn off the main power source of the radar before
    open the scanner unit.



    8-24



  • Page 256

    ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●

    CAUTION
    Turn off the main power source before replacing parts.
    electric shock or injury may result.

    Otherwise, an

    Before replacing the magnetron, turn off the main power source and wait for
    5 minutes or more until the high voltage circuits are discharged.
    Otherwise, an electric shock may result.
    Take off your wrist watch when bringing your hands close to the magnetron.
    Since the magnetron is a strong magnet, your wrist watch may be damaged
    if not taken off.
    Replacement of the LCD unit requires two persons.
    If one person attempts replacing the LCD unit, he/she may drop it and get
    injured.
    High voltage will temporarily remain inside, even after the main power has
    been turned off. Do not touch the inverter circuit of the LCD unit with wet
    hands.
    Failure to observe this precaution may result in electrical shock.



    8-25



  • Page 257

    ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●

    Replacement of PARTS Periodically・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・
    The parts shown below, it is need to exchang periodically.

    Parts
    1. Magnetron
    2. Motor
    3. LCD
    4. Fan Motor
    5. Lithium battery

    Exchange Standard
    4,000 hours
    10,000 hours
    50,000 hours
    20,000 hours
    3 years

    Replacement of Magnetron (V1/V101/V201)・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・
    Remove the shield cover of the modulator and check that no charge remains in the
    high-voltage modulator circuit. Then, remove the socket of the magnetron. The
    magnetron can be demounted by removing the screws fixing it. When mounting a
    new magnetron, do not touch the magnet with a screwdriver or put it on an iron place.
    After replacement, connect the lead wire correctly.
    Handling of Magnetron under Long-Time Storage
    The magnetron that has been kept in storage for a long time may cause sparks and
    operate unstably when its operation is started. Perform the aging in the following
    procedures:
    (1) Warm up the cathode for a longer time than usually. (20 to 30 minutes in the
    STBY state.)
    (2) Start the operation from the short pulse range and shift is gradually to the longer
    pulse ranges. If the operation becomes unstable during this process, return it to
    the standby mode immediately. Keep the state for 5 to 10 minutes until the
    operation is restarted.
    (3) After transmission is made for about 15 minutes, conduct the tuning adjustment.
    (4) Adjust RV1 within the receiver so that the bar graph of the tuning indicator on the
    display reaches the reading 10 without saturation.

    8-26





  • Page 258

    ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●

    < Scanner: NKE-1075A

    Magnetron Exchange Procedure

    Open portside cover.

    Magnetron

    Heading

    ・Remove the reads of magnetron on
    terminal.
    ・Loosen 9 bolts A.
    And remove 2 attached plates.

    Terminal

    Caution)
    Be careful of the handling of a
    magnetron.
    ・Exchange Magnetron.
    Attach Magnetron, plates, reads.



    Setting up scanner unit.

    Bolt A

    Magnetron
    Attached Plate

    8-27



  • Page 259

    ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●

    < Scanner: NKE-1087

    Magnetron Exchange Procedure

    Open starboard cover of
    scanner.
    Loosen 4 screws A.
    And remove
    magnetron-cover.

    Screw: A

    Heading
    Remove Magnetron-cover

    ・Remove Magnetron-leads at the
    terminal.
    ・Remove 4 screws B.
    Remove The Magnetron.
    Caution)
    Be careful of the handling of a
    magnetron and screws.
    ・Exchange Magnetron.
    Attach Magnetron, leads and
    cover.
    Setting up scanner unit.

    Screw: B

    Magnetron
    Terminal

    8-28





  • Page 260

    ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●

    < Transmitter Receiver: NTG-3037A Magnetron Exchange Procedure
    Screw:A

    ・Remove outer-cover.
    ・Loosen 6 screws A.
    ・Remove inner cover.

    Inner cover

    Terminal

    ・Remove Magnetron leads
    from terminal.
    ・Remove 9 bolts B.
    Remove Magnetron.
    ・Exchange Magnetron.
    Attach Magnetron, leads
    and cover.
    Setting up TR control
    unit.


    Bolt: B

    8-29



  • Page 261

    ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●

    < Transmitter Receiver: NTG-3028

    Screw: B

    Magnetron Exchange Procedure
    Remove outer cover.
    Loosen screw A.
    And slide and remove
    attach plate.

    Screw: C

    Screw: C
    PIN
    Screw: C

    Loosen 4 screws B
    about 4-5 turns.
    The pin falls.
    When pin is not fall, push
    the pin by Philips.

    Screw: B
    Screw: A

    Screw: C
    Attach plate

    Screw: C
    Modulator

    Screw: C
    Remove 4 screws C.
    Pulls out rotating Modulator
    in the direction of an arrow
    for a while.

    8-30





  • Page 262

    ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●

    Magnetron

    Remove Magnetron cover.
    Remove Magnetron leads
    on the terminal.

    Termial

    Screw: D

    Loosen 4 screws D.
    Remove the Magnetron.
    Exchange the Magnetron.
    Attach the leads and cover.
    Setting up TR control
    unit.



    8-31



  • Page 263



  • Page 264

    ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●

    Replacement of the Liquid-Crystal Monitor・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・
    Attention
    z The liquid-crystal monitor is easily damaged, even by a slight shock. When
    handling this monitor for replacement, be extra careful so as not to hit a hard
    object against the monitor. In addition, do not place the monitor on a hard
    object.

    1

    JMA-9933-SA, JMA-9923-7XA/9XA (Display unit: NCD-4263)
    (1) Four screws of the front of a processing part are loosened.
    (2) The cable connected from the liquid crystal (LCD) part is removed. (Three)
    The band which is fixing the cable is removed.
    A cable is drawn out upwards.
    (3) Four bolts which have stopped the liquid crystal display part to the case are
    removed..
    (4) A display part is removed.
    (5) Four screws of a liquid crystal top and six screws (rotation part) stopped from the
    lower side are removed. (It becomes only the display part of liquid crystal.)
    (6) A reverse procedure performs attachment of a new liquid crystal display monitor.



    8-32



  • Page 265

    ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●

    8.5

    ADJUSTMENTS

    This section describes the electrical adjustments of the equipment as the
    adjustment procedures to be carried out by service persons at the time
    of installation.

    CAUTION
    Do not carry out the adjustments of the equipment except authorized
    service persons. Otherwise, an accident or trouble may result.
    Do not carry out the adjustments during navigation. Otherwise, the radar
    performance may be affected, resulting in an accident or trouble.
    Tuning adjustments, bearing adjustments, and range adjustments can be performed from
    the keyboard.
    The following procedure must be used to enter the equipment into adjustment mode:

    Procedures

    1

    Click MENU on the screen. Or press OPTION2 key.
    The MAIN Menu will appear.

    2

    3



    Click

    CODE INPUT .

    ADJUST
    1.TUNE
    0-127

    The CODE INPUT Menu will appear.

    2.BEARING
    0.0-359.9゜

    Click

    3.CPA RING
    10
    0-999
    4.ANTENNA HEIGH

    0

    , then END .

    The ADJUST Menu will appear.

    EXIT

    1

    Click

    EXIT .

    The ADJUST Menu will be closed.

    2

    Click

    Click

    EXIT .

    The TEST Menu will be closed.
    8-33

    000.0

    3.OVER 25m
    5.

    ARPA/AIS

    6.

    SECTOR BLANK

    7.

    MBS

    0.

    EXIT

    EXIT .

    The CODE INPUT Menu will be closed.

    3

    1.5



  • Page 266

    ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●

    Tuning Adjustment・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・
    Procedures

    1

    If the AUTO TUNE mode is ON, change the mode to the Manual
    mode.

    2

    Set the range scale to 24 NM and
    adjust the [TUNE] control to the
    center.

    3

    Click MENU on the screen. Or
    press OPTION2 key.
    The MAIN Menu will appear.

    4

    Click CODE INPUT .

    ADJUST
    1.TUNE
    0-127

    1.5

    2.BEARING
    0.0-359.9゜

    000.0

    3.CPA RING
    10
    0-999
    4.ANTENNA HEIGH
    3.OVER 25m
    5.

    ARPA/AIS

    6.

    SECTOR BLANK

    7.

    MBS

    0.

    EXIT

    The CODE INPUT Menu will appear.

    5

    Click

    0

    , then END .

    The ADJUST Menu will appear.

    6

    Click the “1.TUNE”edit box.
    The numeric input dialogue box is opened.

    7

    Using



    and



    , adjust the bar-graph of the tuning

    indicator on the upper left of the display so that it becomes
    the longest, and press END to set it.
    EXIT

    1

    Click

    EXIT .

    The ADJUST Menu will be closed.

    2

    Click

    EXIT .

    The CODE INPUT Menu will be closed.

    3

    Click

    EXIT .

    The MAIN Menu will be closed.

    8-34





  • Page 267

    ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●

    Bearing Adjustment・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・
    Adjust the bearing so that bearing of the target measured with the ship’s compass
    corresponds to that of the target echo on the radar display.

    Procedures

    1

    Press the “N UP/H UP/C UP” button on the upper left of the
    screen, then change the bearing display to relative display
    (H UP) .

    2

    Measure the bearing of an adequate target (for example, a ship
    at anchor, a breakwater or a buoy) relative to own ship’s
    heading. (For instance, assume that the bearing of the target
    is 25°.)
    ADJUST

    3

    Click MENU on the screen. Or press

    1.TUNE
    0-127

    OPTION2 key.

    2.BEARING
    0.0-359.9゜

    The MAIN Menu will appear.

    4

    5

    Click

    0

    , then END .

    000.0

    3.CPA RING
    10
    0-999
    4.ANTENNA HEIGH

    Click CODE INPUT .
    The CODE INPUT Menu will appear.

    1.5

    3.OVER 25m
    5.

    ARPA/AIS

    6.

    SECTOR BLANK

    7.

    MBS

    0.

    EXIT

    The ADJUST Menu will appear.

    6

    Click the “2.BEARING”edit box.
    2.BEARING will be selected.



    7

    The EBL for bearing adjustment will appear.
    Rotate the [EBL] control and adjust EBL to the target selected
    in Step 2 above.
    Press [EBL] control to set it.

    8

    Rotate the [EBL] control and adjust the EBL for bearing
    adjustment to the bearing of the target selected in Step 2
    above.
    Press [EBL] control to set it.
    (Adjust the EBL bearing to 25°as the instance in Step 2 above)

    9

    Repeat the procedures from step 5 above if the bearing is not
    completely coincident with the target's actual bearing.
    8-35



  • Page 268

    ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●

    EXIT

    1

    Click

    EXIT .

    The ADJUST Menu will be closed.

    Range Adjustment・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・
    Adjust the range that the range of the target on the radar video is indicated correctly.

    Procedures

    1

    Click MENU on the screen. Or press OPTION2 key.
    The MAIN Menu will appear.

    2

    3

    ADJUST

    Click CODE INPUT .

    1.TUNE
    0-127

    The CODE INPUT Menu will appear.

    2.BEARING
    0.0-359.9゜

    Click

    3.CPA RING
    10
    0-999
    4.ANTENNA HEIGH

    0

    , then END .

    The ADJUST Menu will appear.

    4

    5

    000.0

    3.OVER 25m
    5.

    ARPA/AIS

    Click the “3.RANGE”edit box.

    6.

    SECTOR BLANK

    3.RANGE will be selected.

    7.

    MBS

    0.

    EXIT

    Find a target on the radar display the
    range of which is already known.
    (For example, assume that the actual range of
    the target is 0.33NM)

    6

    1.5

    Using

    +

    and

    -

    , adjust the target echo's position to the

    position of the target selected in step 4 above. Press END to
    set it.
    Move the target echo upward by

    EXIT

    1

    Click

    +

    EXIT .

    The ADJUST Menu will be closed.

    2

    Click

    EXIT .

    The CODE INPUT Menu will be closed.

    3

    Click

    EXIT .

    The MAIN Menu will be closed.
    8-36

    and downward by

    -

    .





  • Page 269

    ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●

    Antenna Height Adjustment・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・
    Set the height of the antenna above the sea level.
    Do not change this setting inadvertently.

    Procedures

    1

    Click MENU on the screen. Or press OPTION2 key.
    The MAIN Menu will appear.
    ADJUST

    2

    1.TUNE
    0-127

    Click CODE INPUT.
    The CODE INPUT Menu will appear.

    3

    Click

    0

    , then END .

    The ADJUST Menu will appear.

    4

    Click the “4.ANTENNA HEIGHT”edit
    box.
    4.ANTENNA HEIGHT will be selected.

    5

    Measure the height from the sea
    surface to the top of the antenna,
    then select the corresponding
    antenna height from the pull-down
    menu.
    The selected antenna height value will be set.

    EXIT

    1

    Click EXIT .
    The ADJUST Menu will be closed.



    2

    Click EXIT .
    The CODE INPUT Menu will be closed.

    3

    Click EXIT .
    The MAIN Menu will be closed.

    8-37

    1.5

    2.BEARING
    0.0-359.9゜
    3.CPA RING
    0-999

    000.0
    10

    4.ANTENNA HEIGH
    3.OVER 25m
    1.UNDER 15m
    ARPA/AIS
    5.
    2.15m-25m
    3.OVER
    25m
    SECTOR
    BLANK
    6.
    7.

    MBS

    0.

    EXIT



  • Page 270

    ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●

    Vector Constant・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・
    Attention
    z Do not change the set value carelessly.
    The vector constant shall be set to 4 normally. If the vector constant value is
    higher, a target’s vector will be better followed up when the target and own ship
    change their course or speed, but the vector accuracy will be lower on the

    Procedures

    1

    Click MENU on the screen. Or press OPTION2 key.
    The MAIN Menu will appear.

    2

    ADJUST
    ARPA/AIS

    Click CODE INPUT.

    1.VECT CONST
    4
    1-8
    VIDEO LEVEL

    The CODE INPUT Menu will appear.

    3 Click

    0

    3.LIMIT RING
    OFF

    , then END .

    ON

    The ADJUST Menu will appear.

    4 Click ARPA/AIS .
    The ARPA/AIS Menu will appear.

    5

    Click the “1. VECT CONST”edit box.
    1.VECT CONST will be selected.

    EXIT

    0.

    6 Input the new value by pressing the 0
    to 8 number buttons or by using the

    +

    or

    -

    buttons, then

    press END to input.


    EXIT

    1

    Click EXIT .
    The ADJUST Menu will be closed.

    2

    Click EXIT .
    The CODE INPUT Menu will be closed.

    3

    Click EXIT .
    The MAIN Menu will be closed.
    8-38



  • Page 271

    ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●

    Quantization Level・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・

    CAUTION
    Do not change the set quantization level carelessly. If the level deviates
    from the proper value, the ARPA acquisition and tracking functions will
    deteriorate.
    Otherwise, this may cause accidents to occur.

    The quantization level determines the minimum signal level of the input video to the ARPA
    target detection circuit. In this test, the value of the quantization level can be set in a
    range of 1 to 63.
    If the value is set to a lower level, weak target echoes will be inputted to the ARPA target
    detection circuit, but much radar noise will also be inputted to the circuit together, and
    target acquisition and tracking may be disabled. Therefore, it is important to set a value
    that is 4 or 5 higher than the detected noise level.

    Procedures

    1

    Click MENU on the screen. Or press OPTION2 key.
    The MAIN Menu will appear.

    ADJUST
    ARPA/AIS

    2

    Click CODE INPUT .
    The CODE INPUT Menu will appear.

    3 Click



    0

    , then END .

    The ADJUST Menu will appear.

    VIDEO LEVEL
    1.TD LEVEL
    45
    1-63
    2.LOW LEVEL
    35
    1-63
    3.HIGH LEVEL
    1-63
    40

    4 Click ARPA/AIS .
    The ARPA/AIS Menu will appear.

    5 Click VIDEO LEVEL .
    The VIDEO LEVEL Menu will appear.

    6

    Click the “3.HIGH LEVEL”edit box.
    3.HIGH LEVEL will be selected.
    8-39

    0.

    EXIT



  • Page 272

    ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●

    7

    To change the quantization level, enter a new value using any
    of 0 to 9 or

    EXIT

    1

    Click

    +

    and

    -

    , and press END to set it.

    EXIT .

    The ADJUST Menu will be closed.

    2

    Click

    EXIT .

    The CODE INPUT Menu will be closed.

    3

    Click

    EXIT .

    Control will be returned to the MAIN Menu.

    Do not change the quantization level LOW LEVEL.

    Adjustment of NSK Unit to Gyro Compass and Log・・・・・・・・・・
    The NSK Unit of the radar equipment is of solid-state type and designed to be compatible
    with almost all types of gyro compass by switch operation (For the step motor type, 35 V
    DC to 100 V DC, and for the synchro-motor type, the primary excitation voltage is 50 V AC
    to 115 V AC). Before power-on operation, the switches S1, S2, S6 and S7 on the NSK
    Unit (CMJ-462) shall be set to the type of gyro compass in use in accordance with the
    procedures as described below. The gyro select switch on the NSK Unit is set to the
    gyration ratio of 360X and to be compatible with the synchro type before delivery from
    factory. Check the type of the gyro compass used in own ship and make settings in the
    procedures below. For further details, refer to Fig. 127 Setting Table of Gyro Compass
    and Gyro Select Switches of Display Unit, Type NCD-4263.
    ① Set the switches and jumper of the NSK Unit (CMJ-462) before tuning on the radar
    equipment.



    S5: Set it to [OFF].
    S6, 7: Set this switch assembly according to the particular type of gyro.
    S6, S7・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・ 「UP」・・・・・・・・・ Step signal
    「DOWN」・・・・・ Synchro signal



    S1-1 to 4: Set this switch assembly according to the particular type of gyro.
    S1-1・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・ Set this switch assembly according to the
    particular type of gyro.
    「UP」・・・・・・・・・ Step signal
    「DOWN」・・・・・ Synchro signal
    S1-2, 3・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・ Gyration ratio
    Gyration ratio
    36×

    8-40

    S1-2
    ON

    S1-3
    ON





  • Page 273

    ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●

    OFF

    ON

    180×

    ON

    OFF

    360×

    OFF

    OFF

    90×

    S1-4・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・ Gyration direction
    「ON」・・・・・・・・・ Reverse (counterclockwise)
    「OFF」・・・・・・・・ Normal (clockwise)


    S1-5-8: Set this switch assembly according to the particular type of log.
    S1-5・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・ Log type-1
    「ON」・・・・・・・・・ Synchro signal
    「OFF」・・・・・・・・ Pulse signal
    S1-6・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・ Log type-2
    「ON」・・・・・・・・・
    「OFF」・・・・・・・・
    S1-7,8・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・

    1-axis
    2-axis

    Log ratio
    Log ratio
    100P/30×

    S1-7
    ON

    S1-8
    ON

    200P/90×

    OFF

    ON

    400P/180×

    ON

    OFF

    800P/360×

    OFF

    OFF

    ② Connect the gyro signal and the log signal cables to the Terminal Board Circuit.
    ③ Set S7 to [ON].
    After power-on operation, the switch S1-4 shall be set to [ON] if the radar video and
    the indicated value of COPURSE (own ship’s true bearing) is reversed.
    Table 8.14 Gyro and Log Select Switches (S1 Dip Switch)
    S1 Setting Table



    GYRO
    SIG.
    /
    GYRO
    SIGNAL
    SET

    S1
    STEP TYPE
    SYNC TYPE

    RATIO

    DIRECTION
    LOG SIG.
    /
    LOG
    SIGNAL
    SET

    TYPE1
    TYPE2
    PULSE

    2

    3

    ON
    OFF
    36×

    1

    ON

    ON

    90×

    OFF

    ON

    180×

    ON

    OFF

    ON
    360×
    REV (Reverse)
    NORM (Normal)
    SYNC
    PULSE
    1AXIS

    OFF

    4

    5

    6

    7

    8

    ON

    ON

    ON
    OFF
    ON
    OFF
    ON
    OFF

    2AXIS
    100P/30×

    8-41



  • Page 274

    ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●

    /NM

    200P/90×

    OFF

    ON

    400P/180×

    ON

    OFF

    800P/360×

    OFF

    OFF

    S2 Setting Table
    1
    LOG ALM
    S2

    5
    GYRO ALM
    ON=5S,OFF=0.5S

    2
    GYRO
    SIMULATOR
    6

    3
    LOG
    SIMULATOR
    7

    4
    N/A

    N/A

    N/A

    N/A

    8

    Main Bang Suppression Adjustment・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・
    The adjustment is intended for suppressing the main bang that is an echo signal from the
    microwave circuit such as waveguide appearing as a circular echo at the radar video
    center. It is the optimum level in which the main bang suppression is adjusted so that the
    main bang remains weak on the video.
    Attention
    z Do not change the adjusted level carelessly. If the adjustment is improper, the
    target signals on the short ranges may be cleared.

    Procedures

    1

    Set the radar range scale to the minimum 0.125 NM, set
    PROCESS, TGT ENH and FUNCTION to OFF, and set the
    system to the Transmit mode.
    ADJUST

    2

    3

    Adjust the operation controls as
    follows:
    [GAIN] control: Maximum
    [SEA] control: Center (MANUAL)
    [RAIN] control: Minimum (MANUAL)

    MBS
    1.MBS LEVEL
    0-255

    0

    2.MBS AREA
    0-255

    0

    Click MENU on the screen.
    Or press OPTION2 key.
    The MAIN Menu will appear.

    4

    Click

    CODE INPUT .

    The CODE INPUT Menu will appear.
    0.

    8-42

    EXIT





  • Page 275

    ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●

    5 3 Click

    0

    , then END .

    The ADJUST Menu will appear.

    6

    Click MBS .
    The MBS Menu will appear.

    7

    Click the “1.MBS LEVEL” edit box.
    1.MBS LEVEL will be selected.

    8

    Enter any value to adjust the suppression range using 0 to 9
    or

    9

    +

    and

    -

    , and press END to set it up.

    Click “2.MBS AREA” edit box in the state of step 5.
    2.MBS AREA will be selected.

    ADJUST
    MBS

    10 Enter any value to adjust the
    suppression level using 0 to 9 or
    and
    EXIT

    1

    Click

    +

    - , and press END to set it up.

    1.MBS LEVEL
    0-255

    0

    2.MBS AREA
    0-255

    0

    EXIT .

    The ADJUST Menu will reappear.

    2

    Click

    EXIT .

    The ADJUST Menu will be closed.

    3



    Click

    EXIT .

    The CODE INPUT Menu will be closed.

    4

    Click

    EXIT .

    The MAIN Menu will be closed.

    8-43

    0.

    EXIT



  • Page 276

    ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●

    8.6

    SETTING

    True Bearing Setting・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・
    Adjust the bearing that the bearing angle of the radar is the same as that of the gyro.

    Procedures

    1

    SUB1 MENU

    Click MENU on the screen.

    SETTING1
    1.SET GYRO
    0.0
    0.0-359.9゜
    2.SELECT SPEED
    1.MANUAL

    Or press OPTION2 key.
    The MAIN Menu will appear.

    2

    Click

    SUB1 MENU

    , then

    SETTING1 .
    The SETTING1 Menu will appear.

    3

    4

    3.

    SET MANUAL SPEED

    4.

    SELECT NAV

    5.

    SET/DRIFT

    6.

    TIME/DAY

    7.PRF

    box.

    1.HIGH
    8.RANGE SELECT
    96nm
    120nm
    SETTING2
    9.

    The GYRO SETTING edit box will be
    selected.

    0.

    Click in the “GYRO SETTING” edit

    Enter any value using 0 to 9 or

    +

    and

    EXIT

    -

    to adjust the

    radar bearing to the gyro bearing, and press END to set it up.
    EXIT

    1

    Click

    EXIT .

    The SUB1 Menu will reappear.

    2

    Click

    EXIT .

    The SUB1 Menu will be closed.

    3

    Click

    EXIT .

    The MAIN Menu will be closed.

    8-44





  • Page 277

    ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●

    Ship Speed Setting・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・
    The ship’s speed and various other related values, and manual speed can be set.
    SUB1 MENU

    Procedures

    1

    Click MENU on the screen.
    Or press OPTION2 key.
    The MAIN Menu will appear.

    2

    Click SUB1 MENU , then SETTING1 .
    The SETTING1 Menu will appear.

    SETTING1
    1.SET GYRO
    0.0
    0.0-359.9゜
    2.SELECT SPEED
    1.MANUAL
    1.MANUAL
    3. SET MANUAL SPEED
    2.1AXIS
    4.
    3.2AXISNAV
    W
    SELECT
    4.2AXIS G
    SET/DRIFT
    5.
    6.

    3

    Click the “2.SELECT SPEED” edit box.
    The SPEED edit box will be selected.

    4-1 Manual Speed Setting

    7.PRF
    1.HIGH
    8.RANGE SELECT
    96nm
    120nm
    SETTING2
    9.
    0.

    (1)

    TIME/DAY

    EXIT

    Click MANUAL .
    1.MANUAL will be set.

    (2)

    above is completed.
    The SET MANUAL SPEED Menu will appear.

    (3)

    SUB1 MENU

    Click SET MANUAL SPEED after step 2

    SETTING1
    SET MANUAL SPEED
    1.MANUAL SPEED
    0-60.0kts
    30

    Click the“1.MANUAL SPEED”edit box.
    The numeric input dialogue box is opened.



    (4)

    Press any of 0 to 9 or

    +

    and

    -

    and press END.
    The speed (max. 100.0 kts) will be set.

    0.

    EXIT

    Note: The manually entered speed is effective only when MANUAL
    is set in SELECT SPEED.
    8-45



  • Page 278

    ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●

    4-2 LOG Setting
    (1)

    Click 1AXIS for 1-axis log.
    2.1AXIS will be set.

    4-3 Selection of Data against Water for 2-axis Log (NMEA Signal)
    (1)

    Click 2AXIS W .
    3.2AXIS W will be set.

    4-3 Selection of Data against Ground for 2-axis Log (NMEA Signal)
    (1)

    Click 2AXIS G .
    4.2AXIS G will be set.

    Attention
    z The speed data cannot be selected when the sentence VBW of NMEA0183
    is not entered.

    EXIT

    1

    Click

    EXIT .

    The SUB1 Menu will reappear.

    2

    Click

    EXIT .

    The SUB1 Menu will be closed.

    3

    Click

    EXIT .

    The MAIN Menu will be closed.

    8-46





  • Page 279

    ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●

    Navigation Equipment Setting・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・
    The data from the navigation equipment such as GPS will be selected.

    Procedures

    1

    Click MENU on the screen.

    SUB1 MENU
    SETTING1

    Or press OPTION2 key.
    The MAIN Menu will appear.

    2

    Click SUB1 MENU , then SETTING1 .
    The SETTING1 Menu will appear.

    3

    Click

    SELECT NAV
    1.L/L (GPS)
    1.NONE
    1.NONE
    2.NAV1
    3.NAV2

    SELECT NAV .

    The SELECT NAV Menu will appear.

    4

    Click the “1.L/L (GPS)”edit box.
    The“1.L/L (GPS)”edit box will be selected.
    0.

    - When using no navigation
    equipment 5-1 Select and set “NONE” by clicking .
    - When using navigation equipment 1 5-2 Select and set “NAV1” by clicking .
    - When using navigation equipment 1 5-3 Select and set “NAV2” by clicking .



    EXIT

    1

    Click

    EXIT .

    The PORT Menu will be closed.

    2

    Click

    EXIT .

    The SETTING Menu will be closed.

    3

    Click

    EXIT .

    The MAIN Menu will be closed.

    8-47

    EXIT



  • Page 280

    ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●

    Current Correction (SET/DRIFT) Setting・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・
    The current set and drift will be set.
    Attention
    z Setting with this function is valid only when MANUAL or 1AXIS is selected for
    ship’s speed setting (SPEED).

    Procedures

    1

    Click MENU on the screen.
    Or press OPTION2 key.
    The MAIN Menu will appear.

    2

    Click SUB1 MENU, then STTING1 .
    The STTING1 Menu will appear.

    3

    SUB1 MENU
    SETTING1
    SET/DRIFT
    1.CORRECTION
    OFF
    2.SET
    0.0-359.9゜
    3.DRIFT
    0.0-15.0kts

    ON
    0.0
    0.0

    Click SET/DRIFT .
    The SET/DRIFT Menu will appear.

    4

    Click “1.CORRECTION” to “ON” .
    EXIT

    0.
    “ON” in “1.CORRECTION” will be set to
    operate the current correction mode.
    If the current correction mode is not operated, press “1.CORRECTION”to set
    it to “OFF”.

    5

    Set “1.CORRECTION” to “ON” and click the “2.SET” edit
    box.



    The numeric input dialogue box will be opened.

    6 Enter any angle of the current set using 0 to 9 or

    +

    and

    -

    and press END to set it up.
    The current set will be set.

    7

    Set “1.CORRECTION” to “ON“ and click the “3.DRIFT” edit
    box.
    The numeric input dialogue box will be opened
    8-48

    ,



  • Page 281

    ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●

    8

    Enter any angle of the current set using 0 to 9 or
    and press END to set it up.
    The current drift will be set.

    EXIT

    1

    Click

    EXIT .

    The PORT Menu will be closed.

    2

    Click

    EXIT .

    The SETTING Menu will be closed.

    3

    Click

    EXIT .

    The MAIN Menu will be closed.



    8-49

    +

    or

    -

    ,



  • Page 282

    ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●

    Time/Day Display Setting・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・
    In displaying the time, it is necessary to set the LOCAL TIME, LOCAL DATA and GMT +/-.

    Procedures

    1

    Click MENU on the screen.

    SUB1 MENU
    SETTING1

    Or press OPTION2 key.
    The MAIN Menu will appear.

    2

    3

    TIME/DAY

    The STTING1 Menu will appear.

    1.UTC/LOCAL
    1.OFF
    2.CPA RING1.OFF
    2.UTC
    3.LOCAL
    3.LOCAL DATE

    Click TIME/DAY .

    4.GMT +/+/- 12:00

    Click SUB1 MENU, then STTING1 .

    1999/01/27
    0:00

    The TIME/DAY Menu will appear.

    4

    Click “1.UTL/LOCAL” edit box.
    The UTL/LOCAL pull-down menu will appear.
    EXIT

    0.

    - If the time of day is not to be displayed 5-1 Left-click on “OFF” to select no time display.
    - If UTC (Universal Coordinated Time) is to be displayed 5-2 Left-click on “UTC” to select UTC display.
    - If LOCAL (Location Time) is to be displayed 5-3 Left-click on “UTC” to select local time display.
    1)

    2)

    3)

    4)

    5)

    Left-click in the“2.LOCAL TIME”edit
    box.
    The numeric input dialogue box will be
    opened.
    Enter any local time using 0 to 9 and
    press END to set it up.
    The LOCAL TIME will be set.
    Left-click in the“3.LOCAL DATE”edit
    box.
    The numeric input dialogue box will be
    opened.
    Enter any local date sing 0 to 9 and
    press END to set it up.
    The LOCAL DATE will be set.
    Left-click in the“4.GMT + / -”edit box.
    The numeric input dialogue box will be
    opened.
    8-50

    SUB1 MENU
    SETTING1
    TIME/DAY
    1.UTC/LOCAL
    1.OFF
    2.CPA RING
    00:00
    3.LOCAL DATE
    1999/01/27
    4.GMT +/+/- 12:00
    0:00

    0.

    EXIT





  • Page 283

    ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●

    6)

    EXIT

    1

    Enter the time difference between the local time and the UTC
    using + and - , and press END to set it up.
    The“GMT + / -”will be set.

    Click

    EXIT .

    The TIME/DATE Menu will be closed.

    2

    Click

    EXIT .

    The SETTING Menu will be closed.

    3

    Click

    EXIT .

    The MAIN Menu will be closed.
    Attention
    z Time correction is not available when the “ZDA” sentence of NMEA0183 is
    not received.



    8-51



  • Page 284

    ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●

    Adjustment of Performance Monitor (NJU-63/64)・・・・・・・・・・・・・
    Procedures

    1

    Set the radar to Master Radar when the Interswitch is
    installed.

    2

    Press

    to display VRM1 and set the range of VRM1 to

    10-18* NM.
    *
    *

    3

    4

    Set the range to 12 to 18 NM when a waveguide is installed between the
    scanner unit and the transmitter-receiver unit. (X band radar)
    Set the range to 12 to 18 NM when the transceiver unit is incorporated in
    the scanner unit or in case of operating the S band radar.

    Open the ADJUST Menu as directed in
    Section 8.5, Adjustments.
    Left-click on

    PM PRESET .

       

    The PM PRESET Menu will appear. The radar
    will automatically be set to RM, OFF CNTER
    OFF, IR OFF, PROCESS OFF, TGT ENH OFF,
    FUNCTION OFF and 24 NM range.

    5

    6

    Affix the INFORMATION LABEL as
    supplied with the Performance Monitor
    to a suitable position of the board side
    of the Display Unit.
    Write down the value of the "PM"
    indicator in the TEST Menu and the
    date of checking in the INFORMATION
    LABEL.

    ADJUST
    1.TUNE
    0-63
    32
    2.BEARING
    0.0-359.9°
    000.0
    3.RANGE
    0-999
    510
    4.ANTENNA HEIGHT
    3.OVER 25m
    5.

    ARPA

    6.

    ISW

    7.

    MBS

    8.PM PRESET
    0-127

    0.

    30

    EXIT



    8-52



  • Page 285

    ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●

    Adjust the PM pattern
    using the ten-key or [+]
    and [-] so that its outer
    edge is within 12 to 18 NM.
    (See step 2)

    12 to
    18 NM

    PM Pattern

    EXIT

    1

    Click

    EXIT .

    The PM PRESET Menu will be closed and the display will return to the
    status existing before the tests were conducted.

    Note: • All target acquisitions by ARPA functions will be
    cancelled.
    The target acquisition cancelled when PM is ON will not
    be recovered.
    • The radar image is suppressed to make the PM image
    easier to see.
    Therefore, the ADJUST MENU should be always opened
    after PM check is completed.



    8-53



  • Page 286

    ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●

    Adjustment of Inter switch ・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・
    [Checking after Installation]
    Turn off the ship's mains (switch board) for the radar equipment.
    (1) Check that the Interswitch is installed properly after completion of the installation.
    In particular, check if the cable is connected correctly and if the shield meshwork of the
    cable is grounded properly.
    (2) Check that the internal settings in each Display Unit are made adequately.
    [Checking the Interswitch Operation]
    Turn on the ship's mains (switch board) for the radar equipment.
    (1) Checking Interswitch Patterns.
    6 interswitch patterns are available for 2-ynits of radar system, and 12 interswitch
    patterns are available for 3-units of radar system.
    For the checking procedures, refer to the Instruction Manual for Interswitch Kit as
    attached hereto.
    (2) Checking and adjusting Radar Video
    The radar system with the built-in interswitch kit shall be adjusted in the following three
    parameters:
    ・Range adjustment (0 NM adjustment)
    ・Bearing adjustment
    ・Rough tuning adjustment
    These types of adjustment shall be made for each interswitch pattern as follows:
    2-units system ・・・・・・・ No.1 and No.2
    3-units system ・・・・・・・ No.1 , No.2 , No.3 and No.12 .
    For the method of adjustment, refer to the respective adjustment procedures.
    Note: Each adjustment should be performed swiftly after the interswitch is equipped.
    These adjustments should be performed on the patterns specified according to the
    radar quantity of the system.
    If the patterns are switched without adjustments and the radar is used, accurate
    information cannot be obtained from the radar.
    2-units System
    a. Pattern No.1
    ① Adjustment between the Display Unit (right) and the MTR (right). (Adjust by operating
    the panel of the Display Unit (right))
    ② Adjustment between the Display Unit (left) and the MTR (left). (Adjust by operating the
    panel of the Display Unit (left))
    b. Pattern No.2
    ① Adjustment between the Display Unit (right) and the MTR (left). (Adjust by operating the
    panel of the Display Unit (right))
    ② Adjustment between the Display Unit (left) and the MTR (right). (Adjust by operating the
    panel of the Display Unit (left))
    3-units System
    a. Pattern No.1
    8-54





  • Page 287

    ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●

    ① Adjustment between the Display Unit (center) and the MTR (center). (Adjust by
    operating the panel of the Display Unit (center))
    ② Adjustment between the Display Unit (left) and the MTR (left). (Adjust by operating the
    panel of the Display Unit (left))
    ③ Adjustment between the Display Unit (right) and the MTR (right). (Adjust by operating
    the panel of the Display Unit (right))
    b. Pattern No.2
    ① Adjustment between the Display Unit (center) and the MTR (left). (Adjust by operating
    the panel of the Display Unit (center))
    ② Adjustment between the Display Unit (left) and the MTR (center). (Adjust by operating
    the panel of the Display Unit (left))
    ③ Adjustment between the Display Unit (right) and the MTR (right). (Unnecessory
    adjustment)

    c. Pattern No.3
    ① Adjustment between the Display Unit (center) and the MTR (right). (Adjust by operating
    the panel of the Display Unit (center))
    ② Adjustment between the Display Unit (left) and the MTR (left). (Unnecessory
    adjustment)
    ③ Adjustment between the Display Unit (right) and the MTR (center). (Adjust by operating
    the panel of the Display Unit (right))

    d. Pattern No.12
    ① Adjustment between the Display Unit (center) and the MTR (center). (Unnecessory
    adjustment)
    ② Adjustment between the Display Unit (left) and the MTR (right). (Adjust by operating
    the panel of the display Unit (left))
    ③ Adjustment between the Display Unit (right) and the MTR (left). (Adjust by operating
    the panel of the Display Unit (right))



    8-55



  • Page 288

    ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●



    8-56



  • Page 289

    SECTION 9
    AFTER-SALES SERVICE

    When you Request for Repair .................... 9-1
    Recommended Maintenance ..................... 9-1
    Radar Failure Check List ............................ 9-2



  • Page 290

    When you Request for Repair
    If you suppose the product may be out of order, read the description in Section8
    carefully and check the suspected point again.
    If it is still out of order, you are recommended to stop operation of the equipment and
    consult with the dealer from whom you purchased the product, or our branch office in
    your country or district, the sales department in our main office in Tokyo.
    Repair within the Warranty Period
    If any failure occurs in the product during its normal operation in accordance with
    the instruction manual, the dealer or JRC will repair free of change. In case that
    any failure is caused due to misuse, faulty operation, negligence or force major
    such as natural disaster and fine, the product will be repaired with charges.
    Repair after the Warranty Period
    It any defective function of the product is recoverable by repair, the repair of it will
    be made at your own charge upon your request.
    Necessary Information for Repair
    Product name, model, manufacturing date and serial number
    Trouble conditions (as detailed as possible. Refer to "Radar Failure Check
    List" in page 9-2
    Name of company/organization address and telephone number

    Recommended Maintenance
    The performance of the product may deteriorate due to the secular change of the
    parts used in it, though such deterioration depends upon the conditions of
    operation.
    So checkup and maintenance is recommendable for the product in addition to your
    daily care.
    For maintenance, consult with the near-by dealer or our sales department.
    Such maintenance will be made with changes.

    For futher details of after-sale service, contact the JRC Offices in the list at the end of this
    manual.

    9-1



  • Page 291

    Radar Failure Check List
    When placing an order for repair of the product, it is requested that you could confirm the check items
    and fill the results and sent the sheet to our contact.
    If there is any unclear items, contact the ship on which the product is installed, and give the correct
    information on the product.
    Phone:
    Ship name:
    Radar general model name: JMA(Write the full model name correctly)

    Fax:
    Serial No. :

    1

    Check the following items in the order of the number, and circle the applicable answer between
    YES or NO. If the item cannot be determined as YES or NO, explain in detail in the item (18),
    others.

    2

    If any of the items (1) to (5) if marked as NO, check the fuse of the product (refer to Section 8.2
    and 8.3).

    3

    Check the items (4) to (17) while the transmission (TX) in ON.
    *Function mentioned in the items (14), (15) and (17) may be optional, answer is not necessary.

    No.

    Check Item

    Result

    1
    2

    Power can be turn on. (The lamp on the operation panel is lit)
    A few minutes after powering-on, it will become standby status .

    YES
    YES

    NO
    NO

    3

    When powering-on (or TX ON), the LCD displays something (LCD is lit).

    YES

    NO

    YES

    NO

    5

    The scanner rotates at the transmission (TX) ON.
    (Check the following items while transmission is ON)
    Current is supplied to the magnetron. (Refer to the instruction manual)

    YES

    NO

    6

    Tuning is enabled. (Check with the range of 6 NM or more)

    YES

    NO

    7

    Fixed marker is displayed.

    YES

    NO

    8

    VRM is displayed.

    YES

    NO

    9

    While noise is displayed while set at STC and FTC minimum,
    GAIN maximum, IR-OFF and range 48 NM.

    YES

    NO

    10

    Target reflection echo is displayed.

    YES

    NO

    11

    Sensitivity of reflection echo is normal.

    YES

    NO

    12

    EBL is displayed.

    YES

    NO

    13

    cursor mark moves.

    YES

    NO

    4

    *

    14

    GYRO course can be set and normally displayed.

    YES

    NO

    *

    15

    LOG speed can be normally displayed.

    YES

    NO

    ARPA works normally.

    YES

    NO

    If wquipped with an interswitch, when switching from the straight mode (| |) to
    (×), the failures (items marked NO) in the ablve (1) to (16), are switched over to
    the other unit.

    YES

    NO

    16
    *

    17

    18

    Others (Error message, etc.)

    9-2



  • Page 292

    9-3



  • Page 293

    SECTION 10
    DISPOSAL

    10.1
    10.2
    10.3

    DISPOSAL OF THE UNIT ..................... 1
    DISPOSAL OF USED BATTERIES ....... 1
    DISPOSAL OF USED MAGNETRON ... 1



  • Page 294



  • Page 295

    DISPOSAL OF THE UNIT
    When disposing of this unit, be sure to follow the local laws and regulations foe the place of
    disposal.

    DISPOSAL OF USE BUTTERIES

    WARNING
    When disposing of used lithium batteries, be sure to
    insulate the batteries by taping the + and
    terminals.
    Otherwise, heat generation, explosion or a fire may
    occur.
    In this unit, lithium batteries are used for the following parts:
    Indication control board CMC-1218 : BT1(Maxell:CR2032
    Do not store used lithium batteries but dispose of them as non-combustible waste.
    When disposing of used lithium batteries, be sure to insulate the batteries by
    taping the + and - terminals.
    For disposal of batteries, be sure to follow the local laws and regulation.
    For detail, consult with the dealer you purchased the product our business office,
    or local government.

    DISPOSAL OF
    USED MAGNETRON
    Magnetron is used in the Scanner (NKE-1079/1089) and the Transmitter-receiver
    unit (NGT-3037/3037A/3028) of the unit.
    When the magnetron is replaced with a new one, return the used magnetron
    to our dealer or business office.
    For detail, consult with our dealer or business office.
    10-1



  • Page 296

    SECTION 11
    SPECIFICATIONS

    11.1

    JMA-9933-SA TYPE RADAR ...................................... 11-1

    11.2

    JMA-9932-SA TYPE RADAR ...................................... 11-2

    11.3

    JMA-9923-7XA/9XA TYPE RADAR ............................ 11-3

    11.4

    JMA-9922-6XA/9XA TYPE RADAR ............................ 11-4

    11.5

    SCANNER

    NKE-1079

    .............................................. 11-5

    11.6

    SCANNER

    NKE-1075

    .............................................. 11-5

    11.7

    SCANNER

    NKE-1089-7/9

    ....................................... 11-6

    11.8

    SCANNER

    NKE-1087-6/9

    ....................................... 11-7

    11.9

    TRANSMITTER-RECEIVER UNIT

    NTG-3037

    ......... 11-8

    11.10

    TRANSMITTER-RECEIVER UNIT

    NTG-3028

    ......... 11-9

    11.11

    DISPLAY UNIT

    NCD-4263

    ..................................... 11-10

    11.12

    ARPA

    11.13

    PERFORMANCE MONITOR

    ........................................................................ 11-12
    NJU-63

    .................... 11-13

    11.14

    PERFORMANCE MONITOR

    NJU-64

    .................... 11-13



  • Page 297

    11.1

    SPECIFICATIONS

    JMA-9933-SA TYPE RADAR

    (1)
    (2)
    (3)

    General Specification
    Type of Emission
    Display
    Screen

    (4)

    Range scale

    (5)
    (6)
    (7)
    (8)
    (9)

    Range Resolution
    Minimum Detective Range
    Bearing Accuracy
    Bearing Indication
    Ambient Condition

    (10)

    Vibration

    (11)

    Power Supply Input

    (12)
    (13)

    Power Consumption
    Power Supply Input
    Voltage Fluctuation

    (14)
    (15)

    Input Voltage ±10%
    (at the maximum cable length)
    Within 4 min

    Pre-heating Time
    From Standby
    up to Operation

    Within 15 sec

    Scanner (NKE-1079)

    See 11.5

    Transmitter-receiver (NTG-3037

    See 11.9

    Display (NCD-4263

    See 11.11

    Performance Monitor

    (1)
    (2)
    (3)

    P0N
    Color Raster Scan
    23.1-inch Color LCD
    (Effective Diameter, more than 340mm)
    0.125,0.25,0.5,0.75,1.5,3,6,12,24,48
    and 96 (or 120) NM
    Less than 30m
    Less than 40m
    Less than 1°
    North-up / Head-up / Course-up
    Temperature
    Scanner
    25 to
    55
    (Storage Temperature 25 to
    70 )
    Other Units expect Scanner 25 to
    55
    Relative Humidity
    93% at +40
    2 to 13.2Hz
    amplitude ±1mm±10%
    13.2 to 100Hz,max.accelaration 7m/s2 constant
    Scanner AC220V,60Hz,3φ
    AC110/220V, 60Hz,1φ
    Approx.800VA

    NJU-63

    Option
    Scanner with Deicing Heater
    Radar Interswitch
    Display Unit (Desktop Type)

    Distance between Units

    See 11.13

    NKE-1079-D (only heater collar)
    NQE-3141-2/4
    NCD-4263T

    Maximum Distance
    11-1



  • Page 298

    (1)
    (2)

    Scanner to Transmitter-receiver
    Display to Transmitter-receiver

    (1)
    (2)
    (3)

    Compass Safety Distance Standard
    Scanner
    1.4m
    Transmitter-receiver
    2.8m
    Display
    3.2m

    11.2

    30m
    35m

    JMA-9932-SA TYPE RADAR
    (1)
    (2)
    (3)
    (4)
    (5)
    (6)
    (7)
    (8)
    (9)

    (10)

    (11)
    (12)
    (13)

    (14)
    (15)

    General Specification
    Type of Emission
    Display
    Screen

    P0N
    Color Raster Scan
    23.1-inch Color LCD
    (Effective Diameter, more than 340mm)
    Range scale
    0.125,0.25,0.5,0.75,1.5,3,6,12,24,48
    and 96 (or 120) NM
    Range Resolution
    Less than 30m
    Minimum Detective Range
    Less than 40m
    Bearing Accuracy
    Less than 1°
    Bearing Indication
    North-up / Head-up / Course-up
    Ambient Condition
    Temperature
    Scanner
    25 to
    55
    (Storage Temperature
    25
    to
    70 )
    Other Units expect Scanner 15 to
    55
    Relative Humidity
    93% at +40
    Vibration
    2 to 13.2Hz
    amplitude ±1mm±10%
    13.2 to 100Hz,max.accelaration 7m/s2
    constant
    Power Supply Input
    Scanner AC220/230V,60Hz,3φ
    AC100/110/220/230V,60Hz,1φ
    Power Consumption
    Approx.800VA
    Power Supply Input
    Voltage Fluctuation
    Input Voltage ±10%
    (at the maximum cable length)
    Pre-heating Time
    Within 4 min
    From Standby
    up to Operation
    Within 15 sec
    Scanner (NKE-1075A

    See 11.6

    Display (NCD-4263

    See 11.11

    Performance Monitor

    (1)

    NJU-63

    Option
    Scanner with Deicing Heater

    See 11.13

    NKE-1075A-D (only heater collar)
    11-2



  • Page 299

    (2)
    (3)

    Radar Interswitch
    Display Unit (Desktop Type)

    (1)

    Distance between Units
    Scanner - Display

    (1)
    (2)

    Compass Safety Distance Standard
    Scanner
    1.4m
    Display
    3.2m

    11.3

    NQE-3141-2/4
    NCD-4263T
    Maximum Distance
    65m

    JMA-9923-7XA/9XA TYPE RADAR
    (1)
    (2)
    (3)

    General Specification
    Type of Emission
    Display
    Screen

    (4)

    Range Scale

    (5)
    (6)
    (7)
    (8)
    (9)

    Range Resolution
    Minimum
    Detective Range
    Bearing Accuracy
    Bearing Indication
    Ambient Condition

    (10)

    Vibration

    (11)

    Power Supply Input

    (12)

    Power Consumption

    (13)

    Power Supply Input
    Voltage Fluctuation

    (14)
    (15)

    P0N
    Color Raster Scan
    23.1-inch Color LCD
    (Effective Diameter, more than 340mm)
    0.125,0.25,0.5,0.75,1.5,3,6,12,24,48
    and 96 (or 120) NM
    Less than 30m
    Less than 40m
    Less than 1°
    North-up / Head-up / Course-up
    Temperature
    Scanner
    25 to
    55
    (Storage Temperature
    25 to
    70 )
    Other Units expect Scanner 15 to
    55
    Relative Humidity
    93% at +40
    2 to 13.2Hz
    amplitude ±1mm±10%
    13.2 to 100Hz,max.accelaration 7m/s2
    constant
    Scanner AC220/230V,60Hz,3φ
    AC100/110/220/230V,60Hz,1φ
    Approx.600VA

    Input Voltage±10%
    (at the maximum cable length)
    Within 4 min

    Pre-heating Time
    From Standby
    up to Operation

    Within 15 sec

    Scanner (NKE-1089-7/9)

    See 11.6

    Transmitter-receiver (NTG-3028) See 11.10
    11-3



  • Page 300

    Display (NCD-4263)

    See 11.11

    Performance Monitor (NJU-64)

    See 11.13

    (1)
    (2)
    (3)

    Option
    Scanner with Deicing Heater
    Radar Interswitch
    Display Unit (Desktop Type)

    (1)
    (2)

    Distance between Units
    Scanner to Transmitter-receiver
    Display to Transmitter-receiver

    (1)
    (2)
    (3)

    Compass Safety Distance Standard
    Scanner
    1.4m
    Transmitter-receiver
    2.8m
    Display
    3.2m

    11.4

    NKE-1089-7D/9D (only heater coller)
    NQE-3141-2 / 4
    NCD-4263T
    Maximum Distance
    30m
    35m

    JMA-9922-6XA/9XA TYPE RADAR
    (1)
    (2)
    (3)

    General Specification
    Type of Emission
    Display
    Screen

    (4)

    Range Scale

    (5)
    (6)
    (7)
    (8)
    (9)

    Range Resolution
    Minimum
    Detective Range
    Bearing Accuracy
    Bearing Indication
    Ambient Condition

    (10)

    Vibration

    (11)

    Power Supply Input

    (12)
    (13)

    Power Consumption
    Power Supply Input
    Voltage Fluctuation

    (14)
    (15)

    Pre-heating Time
    From Standby

    P0N
    Color Raster Scan
    23.1-inch Color LCD
    (Effective Diameter, more than 340mm)
    0.125,0.25,0.5,0.75,1.5,3,6,12,24,48
    and 96 (or 120) NM
    Less than 30m
    Less than 40m
    Less than 1°
    North-up / Head-up / Course-up
    Temperature
    Scanner
    25 to
    55
    (Storage Temperature
    25 to
    70 )
    Other Units expect Scanner 15 to
    55
    Relative Humidity
    93% at +40
    : 2 to 13.2Hz
    amplitude ±1mm±10%
    13.2 to 100Hz,max.accelaration 7m/s2
    constant
    Scanner AC220/230V,60Hz,3φ
    AC100/110/220/230V, 60Hz, 1φ
    Approx.600VA
    Input Voltage±10%
    (at the maximum cable length)
    Within 4 min
    11-4



  • Page 301

    up to Operation

    Within 15 sec

    Scanner (NKE-1087-6/9)

    See 11.6

    Display (NCD-4263)

    See 11.11

    Performance Monitor (NJU-64)

    See 11.13

    (1)
    (2)
    (3)

    Option
    Scanner with Deicing Heater
    Radar Interswitch
    Display Unit (Desktop Type)

    : NKE-1087-6D/9D (only heater coller)
    : NQE-3141-2 / 4
    : NCD-4263T

    (1)

    Distance between Units
    Scanner Display

    Maximum Distance
    : 65m

    (1)
    (2)

    Compass Safety Distance Standard
    Scanner
    2.4m
    Display
    : 3.2m

    11.5

    SCANNER NKE-1079
    (1)
    (2)
    (3)
    (4)

    Dimensions
    Mass
    Polarization
    Directional Characteristic

    (5)

    Revolution

    (6)

    Drive Motor

    (7)

    Wind Velocity

    11.6

    Height 837×Swing Circle 4000 (mm)
    Approx. 142kg
    Horizontal Polarization
    Horizontal Beam Width 1.9°(-3dB width)
    Vertical Beam Width 30°(-3dB width)
    Sidelobe Level Below -26dB (Within ±10°)
    Below -30dB (Outside ±10°)
    Approx. 26rpm (60Hz)
    220V AC, 60Hz, 3φ
    AC110/220V , 60Hz, 1φ
    Relative Wind Velocity 51.5m/s (100 knots)

    SCANNER NKE-1075A
    (1)
    (2)
    (3)
    (4)

    Dimensions
    Mass
    Polarization
    Directional Characteristic

    (5)

    Revolution

    Height 581 × Swing Circle 4000 (mm)
    Approx. 163kg
    Horizontal Polarization
    Horizontal Beam Width 1.9°(-3dB width)
    Vertical Beam Width 30°(-3dB width)
    Sidelobe Level Below -26dB (Within ±10°)
    Below -30dB (Outside ±10°)
    Approx. 26 rpm (60Hz)

    (6)

    Drive Motor

    AC220/230V, 60Hz,3φ
    11-5



  • Page 302

    (7)
    (8)
    (9)
    (10)
    (11)

    (12)
    (13)
    (14)
    (15)

    (16)
    (17)

    11.7

    Wind Velocity
    Transmitting Frequency
    Peak Power
    Transmitting Tube
    Pulse Width /
    Repeatition Frequency

    Modulation
    Duplexer
    Front End Module
    Intermediate Frequency
    Amplifier

    Overall Noise Figure
    Tuning

    SCANNER

    AC100/110/220/230V , 60Hz, 1φ
    Relative Wind Velocity 51.5m/s (100knots)
    3050±10MHz
    30kW
    Magnetron M1302
    0.07µs/1900Hz
    0.07µs/1900Hz
    0.15µs/1900Hz
    0.1 µs/1900Hz
    0.2 µs/1900Hz
    0.3 µs/1900Hz
    0.2 µs/1900Hz
    0.3 µs/1900Hz
    0.6 µs/1100Hz
    0.6 µs/1100Hz
    1.2 µs/570Hz
    1.2 µs/570Hz

    0.125,0.25,0.5NM
    0.75NM By change over
    SP switch
    (1.5NM)

    By change over
    SP switch

    (3NM)

    By change over
    SP switch
    (6,12NM) By change over
    SP switch
    (24,48,96,120NM)

    Solid States Modulator Circuit
    Circulator + TRHPL
    Built-in
    Intermediate Frequency 60MHz
    Band Width 20/6/3MHz
    Gain More than 90dB
    Amplifying Characteristics Logarithmic Amplifier
    7.5dB (Average)
    Manual/Auto

    NKE-1089-7/9

    (1)

    Dimensions

    (2)

    Mass

    (3)
    (4)

    Polarization
    Directional Characteristic

    (5)

    Revolution

    7ft
    Height 536×Swing Circle 2270 (mm)
    9ft
    Height 536×Swing Circle 2825 (mm)
    7ft
    Approx. 43kg
    9ft
    Approx. 46kg
    Horizontal Polarization
    Horizontal Beam Width 7ft
    1°(-3dB width
    9ft 0.8°(-3dB width
    Vertical Beam Width 20°(-3dB width
    Sidelobe Level Below -26dB (within ±10°)
    Below -30dB (Outside±10°)
    Approx. 26rpm (60Hz)

    (6)

    Drive Motor

    7ft
    9ft
    11-6

    AC 220/230V, 60Hz, 3φ
    AC100/110V / 220/230V ,60Hz, 1φ
    AC220/230V ,60Hz, 3φ
    AC100/110V / 220/230V ,60Hz, 1φ



  • Page 303

    (7)

    11.8

    Wind Velocity

    SCANNER

    Velocity 51.5m/s (100knots)

    NKE-1087-6/9

    (1)

    Dimensions

    (2)

    Mass

    (3)
    (4)

    Polarization
    Directional Characteristic

    6ft
    Height 536 × Swing Circle 1910(mm)
    9ft
    Height 536 × Swing Circle 2825(mm)
    6ft
    Approx. 48kg
    9ft
    Approx. 52kg
    Horizontal Polarization
    Horizontal Beam Width 6ft 1.2°(-3dB

    (5)

    Revolution

    9ft 0.8°(-3dB width)
    Vertical Beam Width 20°(-3dB width
    Sidelobe Level Below -26dB (within ±10°)
    Below -30dB (Outside±10°)
    Approx. 26rpm (60Hz)

    (6)

    Drive Motor

    6ft

    (7)
    (8)
    (9)
    (10)
    (11)

    Wind Velocity
    Transmitting Frequency
    Peak Power
    Transmitting Tube
    Pulse Width /
    Repeatition Frequency

    width)

    (12)
    (13)
    (14)
    (15)

    Modulation
    Duplexer
    Front End Module
    Intermediate Frequency
    Amplifier

    11-7

    AC220/230V ,60Hz, 3φ
    AC100/110V / 220/230V,60Hz, 1φ
    9ft
    AC220/230V,60Hz, 3φ
    AC100/110V / 220/230V, 60Hz, 1φ
    Velocity 51.5m/s (100knots)
    9410±30MHz
    25kW
    Magnetron M1568B(J)
    0.07µs/1900Hz
    0.07µs/1900Hz
    0.15µs/1900Hz
    0.1 µs/1900Hz
    0.2 µs/1900Hz
    0.3 µs/1900Hz
    0.2 µs/1900Hz
    0.3 µs/1900Hz
    0.6 µs/1100Hz
    0.6 µs/1100Hz
    1.2 µs/570Hz
    1.2 µs/570Hz

    0.125,0.25,0.5NM
    0.75NM By change over
    SP switch
    (1.5NM)

    By change over
    SP switch

    (3NM)

    By change over
    SP switch
    (6,12NM) By change over
    SP switch
    (24,48,96,120NM)

    Solid States Modulator Circuit
    Circulator + Diode Limiter
    Built-in
    Intermediate Frequency 60MHz
    Band Width 20/6/3MHz
    Gain More than 90dB
    Amplifying Characteristics Logarithmic Amplifier



  • Page 304

    (16)
    (17)

    11.9

    Overall Noise Figure
    Tuning

    7.5dB (Average)
    Manual/Auto

    TRANSMITTER-RECEIVER UNIT
    (1)
    (2)
    (3)
    (4)
    (5)
    (6)
    (7)

    (8)
    (9)
    (10)
    (11)

    (12)
    (13)

    Dimensions
    Structure
    Mass
    Transmitting Frequency
    Peak Power
    Transmitting Tube
    Pulse Width /
    Repeatition Frequency

    Modulation
    Duplexer
    Front End Module
    Intermediate Frequency
    Amplifier

    Overall Noise Figure
    Tuning

    NTG-3037

    Height 615 × Width 615 × Depth 365 (mm)
    Wall Mount Drip Proof
    Approx. 35kg
    3050±10MHz
    30kW
    Magnetron M1302
    0.07µs/1900Hz
    0.07µs/1900Hz
    0.15µs/1900Hz
    0.1 µs/1900Hz
    0.2 µs/1900Hz
    0.3 µs/1900Hz
    0.2 µs/1900Hz
    0.3 µs/1900Hz
    0.6 µs/1100Hz
    0.6 µs/1100Hz
    1.2 µs/570Hz
    1.2 µs/570Hz

    0.125,0.25,0.5NM
    0.75NM By change over
    SP switch
    (1.5NM)

    By change over
    SP switch

    (3NM)

    By change over
    SP switch
    (6,12NM) By change over
    SP switch
    (24,48,96,120NM)

    Solid States Modulator Circuit
    Circulator + TRHPL
    Built-in
    Intermediate Frequency 60MHz
    Band Width 20/6/3MHz
    Gain More than 90dB
    Amplifying Characteristics Logarithmic Amplifier
    7.5dB (Average)
    Manual/Auto

    11-8



  • Page 305

    11.10
    (1)
    (2)
    (3)
    (4)
    (5)
    (6)
    (7)

    (8)
    (9)
    (10)
    (11)

    (12)
    (13)

    TRANSMITTER-RECEIVER UNIT
    Dimensions
    Structure
    Mass
    Transmitting Frequency
    Peak Power
    Transmitting Tube
    Pulse Width /
    Repeatition Frequency

    Modulation
    Duplexer
    Front End Module
    Intermediate Frequency
    Amplifier

    Overall Noise Figure
    Tuning

    11-9

    NTG-3028

    Height 461 × Width 460 × Depth 227 (mm)
    Wall Mount Drip Proof
    Approx. 19kg
    9410±30MHz
    25kW
    Magnetron M1568B(J)
    0.07µs/1900Hz
    0.07µs/1900Hz
    0.15µs/1900Hz
    0.1 µs/1900Hz
    0.2 µs/1900Hz
    0.3 µs/1900Hz
    0.2 µs/1900Hz
    0.3 µs/1900Hz
    0.6 µs/1100Hz
    0.6 µs/1100Hz
    1.2 µs/570Hz
    1.2 µs/570Hz

    0.125,0.25,0.5NM
    0.75NM
    By change over
    SP switch
    (1.5NM)

    By change over
    SP switch

    (3NM)

    By change over
    SP switch
    (6,12NM) By change over
    SP switch
    (24,48,96,120NM)

    Solid States Modulation circuit
    Circulator + TRHPL
    Built-in
    Intermediate Frequency 60MHz
    Band Width 20/6/3MHz
    Gain More than 90dB
    Amplifying Characteristics Logarithmic Amplifier
    7.5dB (Average)
    Manual/Auto



  • Page 306

    11.11

    DISPLAY UNIT

    (1)
    (2)
    (3)
    (4)
    (5)
    (6)
    (7)
    (8)
    (9)
    (10)
    (11)
    (12)
    (13)
    (14)
    (15)
    (16)
    (17)
    (18)
    (19)
    (20)
    (21)
    (22)
    (23)
    (24)
    (25)
    (26)
    (27)
    (28)
    (29)

    NCD-4263

    Dimension
    Structure
    Mass
    Display

    Height 1100 × Width 703 × Depth 1052 (mm)
    Self-Standing Drip Proof
    Approx. 150kg
    23.1-inch Color LCD
    (Effective Diameter, more than 340mm)
    Range Scale
    0.125,0.25,0.5,0.75,1.5,3,6,12,24,48,
    and 96 (or 120) NM
    Range Marker
    0.025,0.05,0.1,0.25,0.5,1,2,4,8,and 16(or 20) NM
    Range Accuracy
    Less than 1% of the maximum distance of the
    range scale in use or 30m whichever is larger
    Variable Rage Markers
    2(VRM1 / VRM2)
    VRM Scale
    0.00 - 96.0(or 120.0) NM, Numerical indication in
    4 digits
    Bearing Marker
    360°in 1°steps
    Off Center
    Within 60% of the radius of any range except
    96 NM and 120NM
    Trackball Cursor
    Built-in (Target range, Relative / True bearing
    presentation)
    Electronic Bearing Lines
    2 (EBL1 / EBL2) (Center / Independent)
    EBL Bearing Indication
    0.0°- 359.9°, Numerical indication in 4 digits
    Tuning Indication
    Bar-graph
    Marking Function
    Electronic mark(Max. 20 points
    Heading Line Indication
    Electronic
    True Motion Unit
    Built-in (0.25,0.5,0.75,1.5,3,6,12,24 and 48 NM
    STC(SEA)
    Manual / Auto
    FTC(RAIN)
    Manual / Auto
    Display Mode
    North-up / head-up / Course-up
    Trails Indication
    0.5 min / 1 min / 3 min / 6 min / OFF
    Video Process
    Built-in
    Interference Rejection
    Built-in (ON/OFF)
    Guard Zone
    Ring
    Navigation Lines
    Built-in (256 points × 10 types)
    (only with navigation equipment is connected)
    Self-diagnostic-Function
    Built-in
    Own Ship's Track Indicate
    Built-in
    (only with navigation equipment is connected)
    Parallel Line Cursor
    Built-in

    11-10



  • Page 307

    (30)

    Interface

    Sub display
    Loran-C
    IEC61162-1(NMEA0183)
    GPS
    Radar buoy
    LOG
    GYRO
    Radar Interswitch (option)
    External Alarm output

    (Reference) NMEA0183 Interface
    Receivable sentence

    BWC
    GLL
    RMB
    VBW
    VTG

    Priority
    1 Latitude/Longitude
    2 Waypoint
    Note

    GGA
    RMA
    RMC
    ZDA

    GGA > RMC > RMA > GLL
    RMB > BWC

    The speed measuring accuracy of speed sensor shall conform to IMO
    Resolution A.824(19).

    11-11



  • Page 308

    11.12
    (1)

    (2)

    (3)

    ARPA
    Acquisition
    Acquisition Mode

    Auto/Manual Acquisition(Targets are acquired
    within guard zone in the automatic acquisition
    mode)

    Manual Cancellation of
    Unwanted Target
    Tracking
    Number of Targets
    Acquisition and
    Tracking Range
    Presentation
    Display Modes
    Bearing Modes
    Vector Modes
    Past Position Display

    (4)

    (5)

    Time to Display Vector
    Time to Stabilize Vector
    Alarm
    Guard Zone
    Setting Ranges
    Alarm Indication
    Safe Limits (CPA/TCPA)
    Setting Condition

    Each One Target or All Target at once
    50 Targets (Auto Tracking)
    32 NM
    TM (True Motion) / RM (Relative Motion)
    North-up / Head-up / Course-up
    True/Relative Display
    Vector Length Adjustable from 1 to 60 min
    True / Relative Display
    Number of Dots 6 points
    Display Time 30sec, 1 min, 2 min, 4 min
    Within 1 min
    Within 3 min
    2
    Guard Zone 1 (0.5 - 32 NM),
    Guard Zone 2 (0.5 - 32 NM)
    mark on LCD with Visible / Audible alarm
    CPA LIMIT (0.1 - 9.9 NM)
    TCPA LIMIT (1 - 99 min)

    Alarm Condition
    Safe
    Target
    Danger
    Target

    CPA>CPA LIMIT
    0>TCPA
    TCPA>TCPA LIMIT
    CPA CPA LIMIT
    0 TCPA TCPA LIMIT

    Alarm Display
    Status
    Safe Ship
    Danger Ship
    Lost Target

    LCD Symbol

    Alarm
    OFF
    CPA TCPA

    mark on LCD
    Visible / Audible Alarms
    11-12

    Buzzer
    OFF
    ON



  • Page 309

    (6)

    (7)

    (8)
    (9)
    (10)

    11.13

    Data Indication
    Target Data

    Own Ship's Data
    Trial Maneuver
    Trial Course
    Trial Speed
    Accuracy of Display
    System Failure Alarm
    Speed Input

    Simultaneous and Continuous Display for
    2 targets
    True Bearing, Range, True Course,
    True Speed, CPA, TCPA, BCR and BCT
    Course and Speed
    Manual Setting
    0°- 360°
    0 - 100 knots
    Complied with IMO Technical Requirements
    Visible / Audible Alarms
    Manual/Auto(log)

    PERFORMANCE MONITOR

    Dimensions
    Mass
    Operation Frequency

    11.14

    NJU-63

    Height 56 × Width 150 × Depth 249 (mm)
    Approx. 1.5kg
    3050±30MHz

    PERFORMANCE MONITOR

    Dimensions
    Mass
    Operation Frequency

    NJU-64

    Height 56 × Width 150 × Depth 215 (mm)
    Approx. 1.5kg
    9410±30MHz

    11-13



  • Page 310

    APPENDIX



  • Page 311

    APPENDIX
    Radar System Composition..................................................
    Table A-1 S band System Composition
    Equipment
    JMA-9933-SA
    JMA-9932-SA
    Type of Scanner
    NKE-1079(*1)
    NKE-1075A(*1)
    Type of Performance Monitor
    NJU-63
    NJU-63
    Type of Transmitter-receiver
    NTG-3037
    -----Unit
    Type of Modulator Unit
    Type of Receiver Unit
    Type of Display Unit

    *1

    NMA-446
    NMA-487
    NRG-88
    NRG-222
    NCD-4263(*2)

    NKE-1079-1 (110V AC 60 Hz 1φ)
    NKE-1079-2F (220V AC 60 Hz 3φ)
    NKE-1079-D (110V AC 60 Hz 1φ)
    NKE-1079-2DF (220V AC 60 Hz 3φ) (Option with deicing heater collar)
    NKE-1075A-1 (100/110/220/230V AC 60 Hz 1φ)
    NKE-1075A-2F (220/230V AC 60 Hz 3φ)
    NKE-1075A-D (110/110/220/230V AC 60 Hz 1φ)
    NKE-1075A-2DF (220/230V AC 60 Hz 3φ) (Option with deicing heater collar)

    *2 NCD-4263 :Self-standing type
    NCD-4263T:Desktop type (NWZ-158T: Monitor Unit, NDC-1279T: Control Unit,
    NCE-7721: Keyboard Unit) (Option)
    Note: The ARPA unit have the approbation by the Ministry of Transport
    Automatic equipment for Prevention of collision JAS-9900.



  • Page 312

    Table A-2 X band System Composition
    Equipment
    Type of Scanner

    JMA-9923-7
    XA

    JMA-9923-9
    XA

    JMA-9922-6
    XA

    NKE-10897(*1)

    NKE-10899(*2)

    NKE-10876(*3)
    NJU-64

    Type
    of
    Performance
    Monitor
    Type of Modulator Unit
    Type of Receiver Unit
    Type of Display Unit

    JMA-9922-9XA

    NKE-1087-9(*4)

    NMA-449
    NRG-98/154

    NCD-4263(*5)

    *1

    NKE-1089-71/72 (7ft 100/110/220/230V AC 60Hz 1φ)
    NKE-1089-72F (7ft 220/230V AC 60Hz 3φ)
    NKE-1089-71D/72D (7ft 100/110/220/230V AC 60Hz 1φ)
    (Option with deicing heater collar)
    NKE-1089-72DF (7ft 220/230V AC 60Hz 3φ) (Option with deicing heater collar)

    *2

    NKE-1089-91/92 (9ft 100/110/220/230V AC 60Hz 1φ)
    NKE-1089-92F (9ft 220/230V AC 60Hz 3φ)
    NKE-1089-91D/92D (9ft 100/110/220/230V AC 60 Hz 1φ)
    (Option with deicing heater collar)
    NKE-1089-91DF (9ft 220/230V AC 60Hz 3φ) (Option with deicing heater collar)

    *3

    NKE-1087-61/62 (6ft 100/110/220/230V AC 60Hz 1φ)
    NKE-1087-62F (6ft 220/230V AC 60Hz 3φ)
    NKE-1087-61D/62D (6ft 100/110/220/230V AC 60 Hz 1φ)
    (Option with deicing heater collar)
    NKE-1087-62DF (6ft 220/230V AC 60Hz 3φ) (Option with deicing heater collar)

    *4

    NKE-1087-91/92 (9ft 100/110/220/230V AC 60Hz 1φ)
    NKE-1087-92F (9ft 220/230V AC 60Hz 3φ)
    NKE-1087-91D/92D (9ft 100/110/220/230V AC 60Hz 1φ)
    (Option with deicing heater collar)
    NKE-1087-92DF (9ft 220/230V AC 60Hz 3φ) (Option with deicing heater collar)

    *5 NCD-4263 :Self-standing type
    NCD-4263T:Desktop type (NWZ-158T: Monitor Unit, NDC-1279T: Control Unit,
    NCE-7721: Keyboard Unit)(Option)
    Note: The ARPA unit have the approbation by the Ministry of Transport
    Automatic equipment for Prevention of collision JAS-9800.

    A-2



  • Page 313

    Radar System Circuit Block.................................................
    Type of Scanner
    Inner Antenna
    Driving Part
    Heater Cont.

    Table A-3 3-unit Type Scanner (S band)
    NKE-1079-2F NKE-1079-1D
    NKE-1079-1
    (100V AC,1φ) (220V AC,3φ) (100V AC,1φ)
    CQC-764
    CQC-764
    CQC-764
    CBP-129
    CBP-128
    CBP-129
    ----CCK-751

    NKE-1079-2DF
    (220V AC,3φ)
    CQC-764
    CBP-128
    CCK-751

    ("D" is attached with a heater control part option to a form name Heater Cont:CCK-751)

    Table A-4 2-unit Type Scanner (S band)
    NKE-1075-1
    NKE-1075-2
    NKE-1075-2F
    (100V AC,1φ) (230V AC,1φ) (230V AC,3φ)
    Inner Antenna
    CQC-1004
    CQC-1004
    CQC-1004
    Driving Part
    CBP-129
    CBP-146
    CBP-128
    IF AMP circuit
    CAE-344-4
    CAE-344-4
    CAE-344-4
    Inner Receiver Unit
    CMA-554
    CMA-554
    CMA-554
    Receiver Unit
    RNG-222
    RF AMP circuit
    CAF-424
    CAF-424
    CAF-424
    LO OSC circuit
    CCH-205
    CCH-205
    CCH-205
    Bias circuit
    CBD-1274
    CBD-1274
    CBD-1274
    Limiter circuit
    CNL-23
    CNL-23
    CNL-23
    Modulator Unit
    NMA-534
    Modulator circuit
    CPA-209
    CPA-209
    CPA-209
    Inner Modulator circuit
    CNM-239
    CNM-239
    CNM-239
    Filter circuit
    CFR-161
    CFR-161
    CFR-161
    T/R control circuit
    CMC-1205
    CMC-1205
    CMC-1205
    Power circuit
    CBD-1682
    CBD-1682
    CBD-1682
    Relay circuit
    CSC-632
    CSC-632
    CSC-632
    Type of Scanner

    ("D" is attached with a heater control part option to a form name

    Heater Cont:CCK-751)



  • Page 314

    Table A-5 3-unit Type Scanner (X band)
    Type of
    Scanner

    NKE-1089-71/91
    (100/110VAC,1φ)
    CQC-1108
    CBP-170

    NKE-1089-72/92
    (220/230VAC,1φ)
    CQC-1108
    CBP-171

    NKE-1089-72F/92F
    (220/230VAC,3φ)
    CQC-1108
    CBP-172

    Inner Antenna
    Driving Part
    ("D" is attached with a heater control part option to a form name Heater Cont:CCK-751)

    Type of Scanner
    Inner Antenna
    Driving Part
    Receiver Unit
    IF AMP circuit
    Inner Receiver Unit
    Modulator Unit
    Modulator circuit
    Inner Modulator Unit
    Filter circuit
    T/R control circuit
    Power circuit
    Relay circuit

    Table A-6 2-unit Type Scanner (X band)
    NKE-1087-6
    NKE-1087-6
    (100/110VAC,1φ)
    (220/230VAC,1φ)
    CQC-683
    CQC-683
    CBP-122
    CBP-123
    RNG-222
    CAE-344
    CAE-344
    CMA-588
    CMA-588
    NMA-534
    CPA-209-1
    CPA-209-1
    CNM-234
    CNM-234
    CFR-161
    CFR-161
    CMC-1025
    CMC-1025
    CBD-1645
    CBD-1645
    CSC-632
    CSC-632

    ("D" is attached with a heater control part option to a form name

    A-4

    NKE-1087-6
    (220/230VAC,3φ)
    CQC-683
    CBP-132
    CAE-344
    CMA-588
    CPA-209-1
    CNM-234
    CFR-161
    CMC-1025
    CBD-1645
    CSC-632
    Heater Cont:CCK-751)



  • Page 315

    Table A-7 3-unit Type Transmitter-receiver Unit Composition (S band)
    Type of Transmitter-receiver Unit
    Modulator Unit
    ・Modulator circuit
    ・Filter circuit
    ・Inner Modulator Unit
    Receiver Unit
    ・IF AMP circuit
    ・RF AMP circuit
    ・LO OSC circuit
    ・Bias circuit
    ・Limiter circuit
    ・Inner receiver unit
    ・Power circuit
    ・T/R control circuit
    ・Relay circuit
    ・Inner transmitter-receiver unit

    NTG-3037
    NMA-1253
    CPA-209
    CFR-161
    CNM-236
    NRG-88
    CAE-344-1
    CAF-424
    CGH-205
    CBD-1274
    CNL-23
    CMA-554
    CBD-1682
    CMC-1205
    CSC-632
    CQC-1093

    Table A-8 3-unit Type Transmitter-receiver Unit Composition (X band)
    Type of Transmitter-receiver Unit
    Modulator Unit
    ・Modulator
    ・Filter circuit
    ・Inner modulator unit
    Receiver Unit
    ・IF AMP
    ・Inner receiver unit
    ・Power circuit
    ・T/R control circuit
    ・Relay circuit
    ・Inner transmitter-receiver unit

    NTG-3028
    NMA-1252
    CPA-209-1
    CFR-161
    CNM-235
    NRG-98
    CAE-344
    CMA-588
    CBD-1682
    CMC-1205
    CSC-632
    CQC-1092



  • Page 316

    Table A-9 NCD-4263 Type Display Unit Circuit Compositions
    1
    2
    3

    4

    5

    6
    7

    Display Unit
    NCD-4263
    Inner display unit
    NSK/LOG I/F unit
    NSK/LOG I/F circuit
    Rack unit
    Terminal board circuit
    Display control circuit
    Radar process circuit
    Mother board
    Inner keyboard unit
    Panel circuit 1
    Panel circuit 2
    Panel circuit 3
    Connection cable
    Monitor unit
    Case part
    Operation unit
    Inner power supply unit
    Power supply circuit
    Interswitch circuit

    JRC Code
    CWB-1256

    Remarks

    CMJ-462A
    CQD-1949
    CMC-1218
    CDC-1209
    CQC-1094
    CWB-1211-PSO/RST
    CCK-900
    CCK-901
    CCK-902
    CFQ-6908-RSO/RST
    CWB-1255
    CCK-906
    CBD-1661
    CCL-291
    (NQE-3141)

    A-6

    (Option)



  • Page 317

    Table A-10 NDC-1279 Type Control Unit Circuit Compositions
    Control Unit
    NDC-1279
    Inner display unit
    NSK/LOG I/F unit
    NSK/LOG I/F circuit
    Rack unit
    Terminal board circuit
    Display control circuit
    Radar process circuit
    Mother board
    Inner power supply circuit
    Power supply circuit
    Interswitch circuit

    1
    2
    3

    4
    5

    JRC Code
    CWB-1256
    CMJ-462A

    Remarks

    CQD-1949
    CMC-1218
    CDC-1209
    CQC-1094
    CBD-1661
    CCL-291
    (NQE-3141)

    (Option)

    Table A-11 NCE-7721 Type Keyboard Unit Circuit Compositions
    Keyboard Unit
    NCE-7721
    Inner keyboard unit
    Panel circuit 1
    Panel circuit 2
    Panel circuit 3
    Connection cable

    1

    JRC Code
    CWB-1211-RSO/RST
    CCK-900
    CCK-901
    CCK-902
    CFQ-6908-RSO/RST

    Remarks

    (Option)

    Table A-12 NWZ-158 Type Monitor Unit Circuit Compositions
    1

    Monitor Unit NWZ-158
    Monitor unit
    Case part
    Operation unit

    JRC Code
    CWB-1255T
    CCK-906

    Remarks



  • Page 318

    INTERSWITCH
    (NQE-3141)
    OPERATION MANUAL

    1. GENERAL........................................................................1
    1.1

    OUTLINE ......................................................................1

    1.2

    INTERSWITCH CONSTRUCTION ......................................1

    2. OPERATIONS..................................................................2
    2.1

    OPERATION FLOW ........................................................2

    2.2

    SUB1 MENU .................................................................3

    2.3

    ISW (INTERSWITCH) MENU ...........................................4

    2.3

    CHANGING INTERSWITCH PATTERNS .............................6

    3. REFERENCES...............................................................10

    A-8



  • Page 319

    ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●

    1.

    GENERAL

    1.1

    Outline・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・
    The NQE-3141 interswitch allows interconnections to be changed freely between
    bridge-installed multiple radar display units and multiple scanner units different in characteristics.
    The NQE-3141 can change the interconnections between multiple radar display units and
    multiple transmitter-receiver/scanner units (in the remainder of this manual, referred to as MTRs)
    in the JMA-9900 Series radar system.
    It is possible to change the interconnections between up to eight combinations of units: (two units
    in the case of a built-in type) x (four units in the case of a separate type).

    1.2

    Interswitch Construction・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・
    The Interswitch Kit is incorporated in the display unit. (Option)
    The number of combined display units and MTRs according to the interswitch kit is different
    between the 2-units system and the 3-units system.
    The distinction between the 2-units system and the 3-units system is determined by the internal
    settings.
    The pattern switchover operations can be exercised simply and quickly according to the menus
    displayed on the display unit. The interseitch patterns as shown below are displayed at the upper
    left of the radar display. (The position filled on the mark indicates the position of the display unit
    currently operated.)

    Radar system of
    2-radar indicators

    ......

    Interswitch patterns
    (Combinations of six patterns)

    MTR

    Unit arrangement (towards the ship's heading)
    MTR (L)

    Display unit (L)

    L

    R

    Display unit L

    R

    MTR (R)

    Display unt (R)

    Radar system of
    3-radar indicators

    No.1

    No.2

    No.3

    No.4

    No.5

    No.6

    ...... Interswitch patterns

    MTR

    (Combinations of twelve patterns)

    Display unit L C R

    Unit arrangement (towards the ship's headhing)
    MTR (R)
    MTR (L)
    MTR (C)

    APPENDIX

    Display unit (L)

    Display unit (C)

    Display unit (R)

    A-1

    L C R

    No.1

    No.2

    No.7

    No.8

    No.3

    No.4

    No.9

    No.10

    No.5

    No.6

    No.11

    No.12



  • Page 320

    ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●

    2.

    OPERATIONS
    When switching over the interswitch patterns, first set the system to the STBY mode and
    proceed the switch operations on the operation panel of the Display Unit as shown in the
    operation flow below.

    Operation Flow・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・
    The following flowchart shows the operation flow from menu opening to menu closing.

    〔Open of software button〕

    〔Open of the Sub1 Menu〕

    ① Click the

    ① Click MENU , then SUB1 MENU

    on the upper left of the screen.

    〔The ISW Menu will appear〕

    (This software button is differing in
    selecting pattern. This picture is

    ① Click ISW .

    2UNIT, No.4.)

    〔Changing interswitch patterns〕
    ① Click the pattern selection menu number.
    Click SET .
    ② Click EXIT .

    The radar will be placed in
    the standby mode. The
    changed pattern diagram
    in the center of the display
    as well as the change
    menu at the right of the
    display will be displayed.

    〔Closing the interswitch menu〕
    ① Click EXIT .

    〔The Sub1 Menu will be closed〕
    ① Click MENU .
    APPENDIX

    2.1

    A-2



  • Page 321

    ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●

    2.2

    Software button /Sub1 Menu・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・
    Refer to: (A) [Sub1 Menu display・・・Selection of an ISW Menu]
    Open of software button
    Click the

    on the upper left of the screen.

    Open the ISW Menu.
    This software button is differing in selecting pattern. This picture is 2UNIT, No.4.

    Open of the Sub1 Menu


    Click Menu .



    Click SUB1 MENU .
    The Sub1 Menu will appear.

    Sub1 Menu
    SUB1 MENU
    1.

    SETTING1

    2.

    LEVEL

    3.

    NAV/MAP INFO

    4.

    TRACK

    5.

    ARPA

    6.

    PIN

    7.

    ISW

    8.

    EBL MANEUVER

    9.

    SUB2 MENU

    0.

    EXIT

    The Sub1 Menu will be closed


    Click Menu . Or click EXIT .

    APPENDIX

    A-3



  • Page 322

    ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●

    2.3

    ISW (Interswitch) Menu・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・
    Refer to: (B) [ISW MENU 1・・・2-units (No.1 to No.6)]
    (C) [ISW MENU 2・・・3-units (No.1 to No.6)]
    (D) [ISW MENU 3・・・3-units (No.7 to No.12)]
    The Interswitch Menu can be selected only when the radar system is set to on the standby mode.
    Although the Interswitch Menu can be opened during transmission, the radar system will stop
    transmission and enter the standby state automatically.

    The Sub1 Menu will appear
    The ISW Menu will appear



    Click ISW .

    ISW Menu (on display right)

    (2-unit system)

    ←Set with the equipped (2-unit/ 3-unit)→

    INTER SWITCH

    (3-unit system)

    INTER SWITCH

    No.1

    No.2

    No.3

    No.4

    2UNIT

    No.1

    No.2

    No.3

    No.4

    2.

    2.

    SET

    SET

    0. EXIT

    0. EXIT

    No.5

    No.6

    Pattern No.
    The number surrounded by a
    frame is the number to be
    selected.

    No.6

    Unit No. of radar system

    APPENDIX

    No.5

    3UNIT
    1. PREVIOUS/NEXT

    1.

    A-4



  • Page 323

    ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●

    ISW Menu (Pattern Diagram)(on display center)
    The pattern diagrams for the 2-units sysem is different from the pattern diagrams for the 3-units
    system.
    ・6 pattern diagrams are displayed gor 2-units system.
    ・12 pattern diagrams (on two pages with 6 patterns per page) are displayed for 3-units system.
    In the pattern diagram.
    ・The pattern diagram dark filled represents the current pattern.
    ・The display unit currently in operation is highlighted in the reverse black/white view.
    ・A display unit or MTR marked with“×”is not connected or has a failure.
    ・The pattern diagram with the mark“×”cannot be selected as described above.

    The ISW Menu will be closed



    Click EXIT .

    The Sub1 Menu will be closed



    Click EXIT .

    ×

    The MTR not-connected or
    at fault.
    (× mark draw)

    No.1
    The MTR currently operated.
    (filled in reverse video)

    APPENDIX

    A-5



  • Page 324

    ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●

    2.3

    Changing Interswitch Patterns・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・
    The Sub1 Menu will appear
    The ISW Menu will appear
    Select an ISW pattern

    Click



    +

    or

    -

    to select Pattern No.

    ISW Menu (on display right)

    (2-unit system)

    (3-unit system)

    INTER SWITCH

    INTER SWITCH

    No.1

    No.2

    No.3

    No.4

    2UNIT

    No.1

    No.2

    No.3

    No.4

    2.

    2.

    SET

    SET

    0. EXIT

    0. EXIT

    No.5

    3UNIT
    1. PREVIOUS/NEXT

    1.

    No.5

    No.6

    No.6

    ISW Menu (Pattern Diagram)(on display center)
    Click

    +

    or

    -

    , and the pattern diagram will be enclosed by a square line,

    which signifies“selecting”.
    3-unit system is click PEVIOUS/NEXT
    Click SET
    (SET

    .
    is indicated to selecting pattern.)
    APPENDIX



    ,selectid No.7 to No.12

    A-6



  • Page 325

    ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●

    Message Area (on display lower right)
    “ISW END”is blinking and an alarm buzzer sounds.
    ISW Menu (Pattern Diagram)(on display center)
    The selected pattern deagram is blinking for about 5 seconds, and if it is
    established, the pattern is selected.
    Note that if the seitchover fails, the selected pattern will not appear. The
    blinking is stopped after about 5 second and the previous pattern diagram
    will reappear. In this case."ISW TIME OUT"will appear on the message area
    on the lower right of the display and an alarm sound is given.
    In this state, re-select the pattern diagram and seitch over the units. If the
    re-selection fails, contact JRC service depot.
    Pre-heat Time Countdown (on display center or the upper part)
    When the seitchover operation is completed, the timer at the display center
    or the upper part will start the countdown. At this time, the radar operation
    state at the upper right of the display indicates "PREHEAT".
    If the count "0:00" is indicated, the indication at the upper right on the
    radar display is changed from "PREHEAT" to "STANDBY".
    The ISW Menu will be closed
    The Sub1 Menu will be closed

    APPENDIX

    A-7



  • Page 326

    ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●
    -

    6
    1

    AUTO

    +
    SP

    000

    010
    020

    330

    RM N UP
    TRANSMIT
    X-BAND

    350
    340

    320

    310

    ACUIRE
    CURSOR (

    137.1 °
    TRUE
    030
    4.514 nm
    252.1 °
    REL
    040
    N 35゜31.675'
    E139゜43.773'
    OFF
    050
    CENTER
    HL OFF
    060

    300

    CPA
    RING
    070

    290

    080

    280

    090

    270

    260

    100

    250

    110

    MAP
    SHIFT
    DEPTH

    F

    ACT 240
    DACT
    IR

    OS STAB
    GND
    HDG
    245.0 °
    SPEED
    15.0 kts
    WATER
    MAN
    279.1
    °
    COG
    9.2 kts
    SOG
    30.0
    °
    SET
    DRIFT
    9.0 kts
    2003 / 03 / 18 14:36
    U
    N 35°35.0000'
    OWN
    MAN
    E139°40.0000'
    ARPA STAB
    GND
    6 min
    VECTOR T
    LIMIT
    1.5 nm
    10 min
    T
    1 min
    PAST POSN
    1
    2
    GUARD ZONE
    SUB1 MENU
    1.
    2.
    3.
    4.
    5.
    6.
    7.
    8.
    9.

    SETTING1
    LEVEL
    NAV/MAP INFO
    TRACK
    ARPA
    PIN
    ISW
    EBL MANEUVER
    SUB2 MENU

    120

    130

    230

    GAIN
    220
    SEA
    RAIN
    TRACK 3min
    TRAILS 0.5min T
    ENH
    PROC PROC1

    140

    210

    OFF

    EBL1
    EBL2
    VRM1
    VRM2

    150
    200

    160
    190

    180

    170

    100m 0.
    EXIT
    DAY1
    DISPLAY INFO
    PANEL
    TOKYO
    NAV
    FUNC3
    T 037.0 °C PIN
    T 135.0 °O MENU
    PI
    GZ
    TEST
    1.70 nm
    ACK
    2.20 nm
    No Alarm

    (A) [Sub1 Menu display・・・Selection of an ISW Menu]
    INTER SWITCH

    No.1

    OS STAB
    GND
    HDG
    245.0 °
    SPEED
    15.0 kts
    WATER
    MAN
    279.1 °
    COG
    9.2 kts
    SOG
    30.0 °
    SET
    DRIFT
    9.0 kts
    2003 / 03 / 18 14:36
    U
    N 35°35.0000'
    OWN
    E139°40.0000'
    MAN
    ARPA STAB
    GND
    6 min
    VECTOR T
    LIMIT
    1.5 nm
    10 min
    T
    1 min
    PAST POSN
    2
    1
    GUARD ZONE

    No.2

    SUB1 MENU

    No.4

    2UNIT
    1.
    2.

    SETTING1
    LEVEL
    NAV/MAP INFO
    TRACK
    ARPA
    PIN
    ISW
    EBL MANEUVER
    SUB2 MENU

    0.

    EXIT

    SET

    0. EXIT

    NAV
    PIN

    No.5

    MENU

    No.6

    DISPLAY INFO
    TOKYO
    PI

    GZ

    No Alarm

    (B) [ISW MENU 1・・・2-units (No.1 to No.6)]
    The current connection pattern: No.1
    The current connection pattern to be selected: No.4
    A-8

    TEST
    ACK

    APPENDIX

    No.3

    1.
    2.
    3.
    4.
    5.
    6.
    7.
    8.
    9.



  • Page 327

    ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●
    INTER SWITCH

    No.1

    OS STAB
    GND
    HDG
    245.0 °
    15.0 kts
    SPEED
    MAN
    WATER
    279.1
    °
    COG
    9.2 kts
    SOG
    30.0 °
    SET
    DRIFT
    9.0 kts
    2003 / 03 / 18 14:36
    U
    N 35°35.0000'
    OWN
    E139°40.0000'
    MAN
    ARPA STAB
    GND
    6 min
    VECTOR T
    LIMIT
    1.5 nm
    10 min
    T
    1 min
    PAST POSN
    2
    1
    GUARD ZONE

    No.2

    SUB1 MENU

    No.3

    No.4

    3UNIT
    1. PREVIOUS/NEXT
    2.

    1.
    2.
    3.
    4.
    5.
    6.
    7.
    8.
    9.

    SET

    0. EXIT

    MENU

    No.6

    EXIT

    0.
    NAV
    PIN

    No.5

    SETTING1
    LEVEL
    NAV/MAP INFO
    TRACK
    ARPA
    PIN
    ISW
    EBL MANEUVER
    SUB2 MENU

    DISPLAY INFO
    TOKYO
    PI

    GZ

    TEST
    ACK

    No Alarm

    (C) [ISW MENU 2・・・3-units (No.1 to No.6)]
    The current connection pattern: No.1
    The current connection pattern to be selected: No.4
    INTER SWITCH

    No.7

    OS STAB
    GND
    HDG
    245.0 °
    SPEED
    15.0 kts
    MAN
    WATER
    279.1
    °
    COG
    9.2 kts
    SOG
    30.0 °
    SET
    DRIFT
    9.0 kts
    2003 / 03 / 18 14:36
    U
    N 35°35.0000'
    OWN
    MAN
    E139°40.0000'
    ARPA STAB
    GND
    6 min
    VECTOR T
    LIMIT
    1.5 nm
    10 min
    T
    1 min
    PAST POSN
    2
    1
    GUARD ZONE

    No.8

    SUB1 MENU

    No.9

    No.10

    3UNIT
    1. PREVIOUS/NEXT
    2.

    1.
    2.
    3.
    4.
    5.
    6.
    7.
    8.
    9.

    SET

    0. EXIT

    MENU

    No.12

    EXIT

    0.
    NAV
    PIN

    No.11

    SETTING1
    LEVEL
    NAV/MAP INFO
    TRACK
    ARPA
    PIN
    ISW
    EBL MANEUVER
    SUB2 MENU

    DISPLAY INFO
    TOKYO
    PI

    GZ

    No Alarm

    APPENDIX

    (D) [ISW MENU 3・・・3-units (No.7 to No.12)]
    The current connection pattern to be selected: No.10
    A-9

    TEST
    ACK



  • Page 328

    ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●

    REFERENCES
    Preheating Time after Pattern Selection

    After switching over the interswitch patterns, it is necessary to wait for the time as
    mentioned below because the pre-heat time is different from the previous
    interconnection between the MTR and the display unit. This measure is taken for
    protecting the electronic tube emitting radar pulses.
    (a) Not changed to the new interconnection condition:.........................No preheat
    time
    (b) Changed to the new interconnection condition.
    However, the MTR was used before change:...........................................30
    seconds
    (c) Changed to the new interconnection condition.
    However, the MTR was used before change:.............................................3
    minutes
    Notes on Pattern Selection

    Immediately after switching over the patterns, the try to select another pattern may fail.
    This means that even If the pattern switchover is completed, it takes some time to
    prepare for the next interswitch operation. In this case, "ISW BUSY" will be indicated in
    the message area on the display lower right, and the interswitch operation is not
    available.
    Alarm Sound Control
    The interseitch alarm continues to sound for about 5 seconds. In setting the alarm sound
    level, open the Sub1 Menu, press [2] switch to select the "5.BUZZER" in LEVEL Menu.
    When stopping the alarm sound immediately after it sounds, press [ALARM ACK] switch.
    Even when the alarm sound stops, a certain message will remain in the message area.
    Notes on Master/Slave Connection
    The Master/Slave connection is a configuration in which the Display Unit connected to the
    Scanner Unit is the Master Unit, while the Display Unit connected to the Master Unit is a
    Slave Unit. Of the interswitch patterns, the following pattern numbers includes the
    Master/Slave connection:
    a) 2-unit System: No.3, No.4, No.5 and No.6
    b) 3-unit System: No.4, No.5, No.6, No.7, No.8, No.9, No.10 and No.11
    If the Master Display Unit is not in the transmission state, it is impossible to set the Slave
    Display Unit to the transmission state, If the Master Display Unit is changed from the
    transmission to the standby mode, the Slave Display Unit will also be set to the standby
    mode forcibly. In this status, "MTR ST-BY" will be indicated in the message area and the
    alarm will beep.

    A-10

    APPENDIX

    3.



  • Page 329

    ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●

    The Slave Display Unit will not change the radar video even if the tuning control is adjusted
    because the tuning is controlled by the Master Display Unit. The tuning indicator at the
    upper left of the display will show "SLAVE".
    The change of the range scale on the Slave Display Unit depends upon the range scale on
    the Master Display Unit. In general, the Slave Display Unit can not change the range scale
    into a higher one than that on the Master Display Unit. However, a higher range scale may
    be selected by the Slave Display Unit if the pulse length/repetition frequency is the same as
    on the Master Display.

    Scanner Safety Switch
    If the Scanner Units are changed over in the condition that the safety switch of one Scanner
    Unit is set to "OFF" while the other is set to "ON", "SSW OFF" will be indicated on both the
    display.

    APPENDIX

    A-11



  • Page 330

    ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●

    Setting the DIP switches of the interswitch circuit (CCL-304)



    Set DIP switches SW11, SW12, and SW13 as follows:

    SW 11

    SW 13 SW 12

    Interswitch circuit board
    CCL-304

    (1) Setting SW11 (Expansion mode setting and master/slave setting)

    1

    2 3 4

    ON
    OFF

    Expansion mode setting
    4

    Description

    ON

    Expansion mode

    OFF

    Normal mode

    Select OFF to connect up to four
    units.

    Master/slave setting
    3

    Description

    ON

    Slave

    OFF

    Master

    In expansion mode, select ON
    for the ISW circuit board at the
    slave side.

    Not used
    Description

    ON

    Not used

    OFF

    Not used

    Select OFF.

    APPENDIX

    1, 2

    A-12



  • Page 331

    ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●

    (2) Setting SW12 (Radar connection setting)

    1

    2 3 4 5 6 7 8

    ON
    OFF

    Radar connection setting
    1
    2
    3
    4
    5
    6
    7
    8

    ON

    No. 1 display unit connection

    OFF

    No. 1 display unit non-connection

    ON

    No. 1 scanner unit connection

    OFF

    No. 1 scanner unit non-connection

    ON

    No. 2 display unit connection

    OFF

    No. 2 display unit non-connection

    ON

    No. 2 scanner unit connection

    OFF

    No. 2 scanner unit non-connection

    ON

    No. 3 display unit connection

    OFF

    No. 3 display unit non-connection

    ON

    No. 3 scanner unit connection

    OFF

    No. 3 scanner unit non-connection

    ON

    No. 4 display unit connection

    OFF

    No. 4 display unit non-connection

    ON

    No. 4 scanner unit connection

    OFF

    No. 4 scanner unit non-connection

    (3) SW13 (Not used)

    1

    2 3 4

    ON
    OFF

    1, 2, 3, 4

    Not used

    Note: Set the DIP switches of the ISW circuit in accordance with the INSTALLATION
    MANUAL, and ensure safety when and before setting the DIP switches.

    APPENDIX

    A-13



  • Page 332

    ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●

    JMA-9900 series Radar

    APPENDIX

    INSTALLATION OF AIS

    A-14



  • Page 333

    ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●

    Introduction
    Thank you for purchasing the optional AIS information display kit for JRC marine radar.

    This

    product provides the AIS information display function, which is optionally available on the JMA-9900
    Radar series.
    ●Read this operation manual carefully before use.
    ●This manual describes operations of the optional AIS display function only.
    Please refer to JAM-9900 series operation manual for operation of other radar functions.
    Please keep this operation manual for reference.
    ●There are two types of AIS interfaces for JMA-9900 Series Radar as follows.
    JMA-9900 TYPE

    AIS I/F Type

    Self-standing type

    NQA-4172*, 7ZCRD0967

    Desktop type

    NQA-4172*, NQA-4172-6

    * NQA-4172 : Base Kit (Common unit for both types of JMA-9900 radar.)
    Note
    This optional AIS kit was checked the operation only by the connection with JRC AIS(JHS-180).

    The capacity and limitations of the system and operational limitations
    1. Vectors of ARPA target are displayed by dashed lines instead of solid lines to keep
    consistency with those of AIS targets.
    2. Maximum 50 AIS targets are displayed in this system. Three kinds of AIS target filter are
    provide to prioritize on displaying AIS targets effectively. See 1-10 in this manual.
    3. Note that following operational restrictions in this system before using.
    1) An AIS function cannot turn ON
    ・When "MANUAL" was selected as a speed input source.
    ・When SET and DRIFT was set in “LOG” speed mode
    2) "LOG" speed mode cannot be chosen as a speed source.
    ・When an AIS function was ON and SET and DRIFT were set.
    3) "MANUAL" speed mode cannot be selected..
    ・When an AIS function was ON.
    4) SET/DRIFT (Current correction) function cannot turn ON.
    ・When an AIS function was ON and speed was set as "LOG".
    APPENDIX

    A-15



  • Page 334

    ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●

    Table of Contents
    Introduction

    ……………………………………………………………………

    A-15

    1. AIS Information Display Function
    1-1. AIS Software Buttons
    …………………………………………
    1-2. Initial Setting
    ■GPS Antenna installation position Setting
    ……………………
    …………………………..………
    ■Collision Decision Criteria Setting

    A-18

    1-3. AIS Function ON/OFF
    …………………………………………
    1-4. AIS Target Activation
    ■Manual Target Activation …………………………………………………
    ■Automatic Target Activation …………………………………………..…

    A-21

    1-5. AIS Target Deactivation
    ……………………………………………
    1-6. AIS Symbol Display ON/OFF
    …………………………………………
    1-7. ARPA Symbol Display ON/OFF …………………………………………

    A-24

    1-9. Definitions of AIS Target Symbols
    ………………………………
    1-10. AIS Filter Setting
    ■Meaning of AIS Filter
    ……………………………………………………
    ■AIS Filter Type Selection……………………………………………………
    ……………………………………………………
    ■AIS Filter Setting
    …………………………………………
    ■AIS Filter Area Display
    1-11. AIS and ARPA Target Association Condition
    ………………
    1-12. AIS Lost Target
    …………………………………………
    1-13. Conditions of AIS Symbol Display
    ■Maximum AIS Target Number and Display Priority
    ………
    ■AIS Target Vector Display

    A-20

    A-22
    A-23
    A-25
    A-26
    A-27
    A-27
    A-28
    A-28
    A-29
    A-31
    A-31
    A-33
    A-34
    A-35
    A-36
    A-37

    ……………………………………..………

    A-37

    1-14.Alarm Display
    ……………………………………………………
    1-15.Operational Restrictions …………………………………………………

    A-38

    2.Basic Operation with Track Ball

    ………………………………

    A-39
    A-40

    3.Installation of AIS Information Display Kit
    3-1. Composition of AIS Information Display Kit ……………………
    3-2. AIS I/F Connection
    ……………………………………
    A-16

    A-41
    A-41

    APPENDIX

    1-8. AIS Target Data Display
    ■Types of Data Display
    ……………………………………………..……
    ……………………………………………
    ■Target Data Display
    ……………………………………………
    ■Target Data Display Cancel
    ……………………
    ■Target Data Display with simple/detail mode

    A-19



  • Page 335

    ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●

    3-3.Set up after Installation
    3-4.Turn on and Check

    …………………………………………

    A-42

    …………………………………………

    A-42

    APPENDIX

    A-17



  • Page 336

    ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●

    1. AIS Information Display Function
    1-1 AIS Software Buttons
    When AIS I/F is connected, the AIS software button as shown below is displayed on a radar
    screen. By operating these buttons, ON/OFF of an AIS function, activation or deactivation of a AIS
    symbol, and the display ON/OFF of ARPA-AIS symbol can be performed.

    -

    6
    1

    000

    350

    AUTO

    +

    010

    340

    020

    SP
    330

    RM N UP
    TRANSMIT
    X-BAND

    320

    1

    310

    300

    ACUIRE
    CURSOR (

    TRUE
    137.1 °
    030
    4.514 nm
    252.1 °
    REL
    040
    N 35゜31.675'
    E139゜43.773'
    OFF
    050
    CENTER
    HL OFF
    060
    CPA
    RING

    290

    280

    270

    2
    6
    3

    260

    5

    250

    F

    4

    ACT
    DACT 240
    IR

    230

    GAIN
    SEA
    220
    RAIN
    TRACK 3min
    TRAILS 0.5min T
    ENH
    PROC PROC1

    130

    140

    210

    OFF

    150
    200

    160
    190

    180

    170

    EBL1
    EBL2
    VRM1
    VRM2

    OS STAB
    GND
    HDG
    245.0 °
    SPEED
    15.0 kts
    WATER
    MAN
    279.1 °
    COG
    9.2 kts
    SOG
    30.0 °
    SET
    DRIFT
    9.0 kts
    2003 / 03 / 18 14:36
    U
    N 35°35.0000'
    OWN
    E139°40.0000'
    MAN
    ARPA STAB
    GND
    6 min
    VECTOR T
    070
    LIMIT
    1.5 nm
    10 min
    1 min
    T
    PAST POSN
    080
    1
    GUARD ZONE
    2
    TARGET ID      No 2 
    264 °
    BRG
    3.5 nm
    RANGE
    090
    281 °
    COURSE
    9.3 kts
    SPEED
    0.4 nm
    CPA
    -2581.4 min
    TCPA
    100
    nm
    BCR
    min
    BCT
    TARGET ID      No 1 
    344 °
    BRG
    110
    RANGE
    3.8 nm
    COURSE
    279 °
    MAP
    9.2 kts
    SHIFT SPEED
    1.0 nm
    120
    CPA
    min
    5988.6
    TCPA
    DEPTH
    nm
    100m BCR
    min
    BCT
    DAY1
    DISPLAY INFO
    PANEL
    FUNC3
    TOKYO
    NAV
    T 037.0 °C PIN
    T 135.0 °O
    1.70 nm
    2.20 nm

    MENU

    PI

    GZ

    TEST

    No Alarm

    ACK

    Example of Display with Optional AIS I/F

    F

    ACT
    DACT

    ①AIS FUNCTION ON/OFF BUTTON
    ②AIS ACTIVATE
    ③AIS DEACTIVATE BUTTON
    ④AIS SYMBOL DISPLAY ON/OFF BUTTON
    ⑤ARPA SYMBOL DISPLAY ON/OFF BUTTON

    APPENDIX

    AIS Software buttons

    A-18



  • Page 337

    ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●

    1-2 Initial Setting
    ■GPS Antenna installation position Setting
    The distance of the GSP antenna from the position of the radar scanner should be set.
    Operation

    ADJUST

    1. Left-click MENU on the screen.

    procedure

    MAIN menu opens.

    ARPA/AIS
    AIS
    1.GSP ANT. LOCATION

    2. Left-click CODE INPUT.

    a: + 100

    CODE INPUT menu opens.
    3. Left-click





    b: + 100
    a
    (-500 to +500[m])

    END .

    ADJUST menu opens.
    b

    4. Left-click ARPA/AIS .
    ARPA/AIS menu opens.
    5. Left-click AIS .

    0.

    EXIT

    AIS menu opens.
    6. The GPS antenna rough direction from the radar scanner is chosen with the GPS
    button “

    . “.

    7. Left-click the

    button in the a: box of "1.GPS ANT.LOCATION".

    The distance of the GPS antenna from the radar scanner in bow-stern
    direction should be entered. (The direction of the bow side is plus and the
    direction of the stern side is minus.)
    8. Left-click the

    button in the b: box of "1.GPS ANT.LOCATION".

    The distance of the GPS antenna from the radar scanner in port-starboard
    direction should be entered. (The direction of starboard side is plus and the
    direction of the port side is minus.
    Note1
    Unless it performs this setup correctly, the position of an AIS symbol may not
    coincide with the radar echo position of the target.
    Note 2
    When this setup is performed, offset is added to the data received from GPS, and
    APPENDIX

    the compensated latitude and longitude are displayed as own ship position. It
    would be the radar scanner installation position.
    A-19



  • Page 338

    ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●

    ■Collision Decision Criteria Setting (CPA/TCPA)
    The collision decision criteria CPA/TCPA of ARPA target are used for AIS target as well.

    SUB1 MENU

    Operation
    procedure

    1. Left-click MENU on the screen.
    MAIN menu opens.
    2. Left-click SUB1 MENU → ARPA/AIS.
    ARPA menu opens.
    3. Set CPA LIMIT (Closest Point of Approach)

    ARPA
    1. CPA LIMIT
    0.1-99nm

    1.5




    2. TCPA LIMIT
    1-99min

    10




    3. CPA RING
    OFF
    TRIAL

    4.
    (1) Left-click the "1.CPA LIMIT" edit box.

    ON

    5. GATE
    2. NARROW

    CPA LIMIT

    will be selected.

    6.

    AIS SETTING

    0.

    EXIT



    The numeric input dialogue box is
    opened.

    (2) Input the new value by pressing the 0 to 9 number keys or by using the
    keys, then press

    END

    +

    or

    -

    +

    or

    -

    to input.

    4. Set TCPA LIMIT (Time to CPA)
    (1) Left-click the "2.TCPA LIMIT" edit box.
    TCPA LIMIT

    will be selected.

    The numeric input dialogue box is opened.
    (2) Input the new value by pressing the 0 to 9 number keys or by using the
    keys, then press "END" to input.

    APPENDIX

    For further details, please refer to Chapter 5 of a JMA-9900 series Instruction Manual.

    A-20



  • Page 339

    ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●

    1-3. AIS Function ON/OFF
    ■ON/OFF of AIS function is set up. There are two methods to switch ON/OFF of AIS function.
    Operation
    procedure
    (Method-1 : With the AIS software button on screen.)
    Put the arrow cursor on the

    F

    button at the lower left a screen and click the left

    button of the track ball. Every time the left section button is pressed, AIS function on/off
    changes alternatively as follows.
    a. When the symbol is displayed in the bright color -----AIS function is ON.
    b. When the symbol is displayed in the dark color -------AIS function is OFF.
    (Method-2 : With the menu operation.)

    SUB1 MENU

    1. Left-click MENU on the screen.
    Main menu opens.
    2. Left-click SUB1 MENU .
    SUB1 menu opens.

    ARPA
    1. CPA LIMIT
    0.1-99nm

    1.5




    2. TCPA LIMIT
    1-99min

    10




    3. CPA RING
    OFF

    3. Left-click ARPA/AIS .
    ARPA/AIS menu opens.

    ON

    TRIAL

    4.
    5. GATE

    4. Left-click AIS SETTING.

    2. NARROW

    AIS SETTING menu opens.

    6.

    AIS SETTING

    0.

    EXIT



    5. Left-click "ON" or "OFF" of "1.AIS FUNCTION".
    "1.AIS FUNCTION" is changed to on or off.
    Note:
    When AIS function is OFF, no AIS symbol is displayed and all AIS functions are completely
    turned off. Even if there is a dangerous target, AIS function would not be turned on
    automatically.

    APPENDIX

    A-21



  • Page 340

    ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●

    1-4 AIS Target

    1

    Activation

    ■Manual Target Activation
    An AIS target is activated by either of the mehod-1 or the method–2 as follows, and then the
    vector and the heading of the target are displayed.
    Operation
    procedure

    (Method-1 : With the software button on the screen)
    1. Put the arrow cursor on the

    ACT

    button at the lower left of the screen

    and click the left button of the track ball.
    Cursor mode ”AIS ACT" is displayed at the upper right side on the screen.
    2. Put the cross cursor “+” on the target to be activated and press the track ball
    section left button .
    The selected AIS target is activated.
    (Method-2 : With the menu operation)
    1. Left-click MENU on the screen.
    Main menu opens.
    2. Left-click SUB1 MENU.
    SUB1 menu opens.
    3. Left-click AIS/ARPA.
    ARPA/AIS menu opens.
    4. Left-click AIS SETTING.
    AIS SETTING menu opens.
    5. Left-click "ON" of "2.AIS ACTIVATE".
    Cursor mode ”AIS ACT" is displayed at the

    upper right side on the

    screen.
    6. Put the cross cursor “+” on the target to be activated and press the track ball section left
    button .

    APPENDIX

    The selected AIS target is activated.

    ※1

    Refer to "1.9 Definitions of AIS Target Symbols” about the activated target.
    A-22



  • Page 341

    ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●

    ■Automatic Target Activation
    The AIS target in a guard zone is activated automatically and the vector and the heading of the
    target are displayed. The guard zone for AIS target activation is the same zone used in ARPA. For
    further details of guard zone setting, please see “Set Guard Zones” at Chapter 3.4 of the
    instruction manual of JMA-9900 series radar.

    Dangerous AIS targets are also activated

    automatically.

    Note:
    ・When the manual ‘ACTIVATION’ operation is performed at the position where no AIS sleeping
    symbol is displayed, an AIS target is searched at the near area pointed by the cursor “+”. The
    following “search mark” is displayed.
    SEARCH
    Search Mark
    A activated target symbol is displayed when an AIS target is found near the “search mark”. Then
    the “search mark” is removed. On the other hand, no AIS target found in approx. 4 minutes, the
    “search mark” disappears.

    ・When no vector of the activated target is displayed, please refer to "1-13 Conditions of AIS
    Symbol Display."
    ・No activated symbol may be displayed if the priority of the search target is lower than existing
    activated AIS targets displayed on the screen. Refer to “1-13 Conditions of AIS Symbol
    Display”.

    APPENDIX

    A-23



  • Page 342

    ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●

    1-5 AIS Target Deactivation
    When an AIS target is deactivated, the vector and the heading are deleted as a
    sleeping
    Operation
    procedure

    2

    target.
    (Method-1 : With the software button on the screen)
    1. Put the arrow cursor on the DACT button and click the track ball section left
    button.
    Cursor mode ”AIS DEACT" is displayed at the upper right side on the screen.
    2. Put the cross cursor “+” on the target to be deactivated and press the track ball
    section left button .
    The selected AIS target is deactivated.

    (Method-2 : With the menu operation)
    1. Left-click MENU on the screen.
    Main menu opens.
    2. Left-click SUB1 MENU .
    SUB1 menu opens.
    3. Left-click ARPA/AIS .
    ARPA/AIS menu opens.
    4. Left-click AIS SETTING.
    AIS SETTING menu opens.
    5. Left-click "ON" of "3.AIS DEACTIVATE".
    Cursor mode ”AIS DEACT" is displayed at the upper right side on the
    screen.
    6. Put the cross cursor “+” on the target to be deactivated and press the track ball section
    left button .

    The selected AIS target is deactivated.

    Note

    ※2

    Refer to "1.9 Definitions of AIS Target Symbols” about the sleeping target.
    A-24

    APPENDIX

    This operation is only available for an activated target.



  • Page 343

    ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●

    1.6 AIS SYMBOL DISPLAY ON/OFF
    AIS symbol display is changed to on or off by the procedure method-1 or method-2 as follows.
    Operation
    procedure
    (Method-1 : With the software button on the screen)
    Put the arrow cursor on the

    button and click the track ball section left button. Each

    time the left button is pushed, AIS symbol display is changed to on or off.
    When the button is displayed in the bright colour ----- AIS Symbol display is on.
    When the button is displayed in the dark colour

    ----- AIS Symbol display is off.

    (Method-2 : With the menu operation)
    1. Left-click MENU on the screen.
    Main menu opens.
    2. Left-click SUB1 MENU .
    SUB1 menu opens.
    3. Left-click ARPA /AIS .
    ARPA/AIS menu opens.
    4. Left-click AIS SETTING.
    AIS SETTING menu opens.
    5. Left-click "ON" or "OFF" of "4.AIS SYMBOL DISPLAY".
    AIS symbol display is changed to on or off.

    Note
    The ARPA symbol display can only turned OFF when the AIS function id ON.
    Turning the AIS function OFF will automatically return ARPA symbols display back ON.

    APPENDIX

    A-25



  • Page 344

    ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●

    1-7. ARPA Symbol Display ON/OFF
    ARPA symbol display is changed to on or off by the procedure either of the method-1 or method-2
    as follows.
    Operation
    procedure
    (Method-1 : With the software button on the screen)
    Put the arrow cursor on the

    button and click the track ball section left button. Every

    time the left button is pushed, ARPA symbol display is changed to on or off.
    When the button is displayed in the bright color ----- ARPA Symbol display is on.
    When the button is displayed in the dark color

    ----- ARPA Symbol display is off.

    (Method-2 : With the menu operation)
    1. Left-click MENU on the screen.
    Main menu opens.
    2. Left-click SUB1 MENU .
    SUB1 menu opens.
    3. Left-click ARPA/AIS .
    ARPA/AIS menu opens.
    4. Left-click AIS SETTING.
    AIS SETTING menu opens.
    5. Left-click "ON" or "OFF" of "4.AIS SYMBOL DISPLAY".

    APPENDIX

    ARPA symbol display is changed to on or off.

    A-26



  • Page 345

    ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●

    1-8. AIS Target Data Display
    ■ Types of Data Display
    The detailed or simple numerical data of an AIS target are available. The display items in each
    detailed and simple mode are shown as follows.
    Display Items

    Detailed Mode

    Simple Mode

    NAME(Ship’s Name)

    Max 20 characters

    Max 20 characters

    CALL

    Max 7 characters

    Max 7 characters

    MMSI

    Max 9 characters

    Max 9 characters

    COG

    Unit 0.1 degrees

    Unit 0.1 degrees

    SOG

    Unit 0.1 knots

    Unit 0.1 knots

    CPA

    Unit 0.1 nm

    Unit 0.1 nm

    TCPA

    Unit 0.1 min

    Unit 0.1 min

    BRG

    Unit 0.1 degrees

    RANGE

    Unit 0.01 nm

    HDG

    Unit 0.1 degrees

    ROT

    Unit

    L/L (Lat/Lon)

    Unit 0.001 seconds

    SIGN

    No display

    0.1°/min

    One target data in the detailed mode or two target data in the simple mode are displayed at the
    numerical data area on the screen.
    ■ Target Data Display
    Operation
    procedure
    1. Press

    TGT
    DATA

    Cursor mode changes and "TGT DATA" is displayed on the upper right of the screen.
    2. Put the cross cursor “+” on the target to be data displayed and press the track ball
    section left button .
    The numerical information of the selected AIS target is displayed at the right side of
    the

    screen,

    and

    is displayed on the AIS target symbol.

    APPENDIX

    A-27



  • Page 346

    ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●

    Note:
    When the numerical data is displayed without

    mark on the radar screen, the target

    might exist out of the radar display range.
    ■ Target Data Display Cancel
    Operation
    procedure
    1. Press

    TGT
    DATA

    Cursor mode changes and "TGT DATA" is displayed on the upper right of the screen.
    2. Put the cross cursor “+” on the target to be turn off the numerical data display and
    press the track ball section left button .
    The numerical information of the selected AIS target data is removed from the
    numerical data area at the right-hand side of the screen and the symbol
    disappears.
    Target Data Display in simple/detail mode
    Operation
    procedure

    1. Put the cursor on the buttons

    or

    at the upper right of AIS target

    numerical data area, and press the trackball section left button.
    2. Every time the button is pushed, the mode of numerical data changes to simple
    or detail as follows..
    Button

    When
    pushed,

    button

    is

    display

    mode is changed
    Example of Simple mode
    APPENDIX



    Example of Detail mode

    A-28



  • Page 347

    ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●

    1-9. Definitions of AIS Target Symbols
    The AIS symbol is as follows.
    Symbol

    AIS Target

    Definitions & Meaning
    A target symbol indicating the presence and orientation of a
    vessel equipped with AIS in a certain location. No additional

    Sleeping
    Target

    information is presented until activated thus avoiding information
    overload.
    The most acute apex of the triangle is aligned with the heading of
    the target, or with its COG.
    A symbol representing the automatic or manual activation of a
    sleeping target for the display of additional graphically presented
    information including:

    Activated

    -

    a vector (speed and course over ground or water);

    -

    the heading; and

    -

    ROT or direction of turn indication (if available) to display
    actually initiated course changes.

    Target
    The COG/SOG vector is displayed as dashed line.
    The heading is displayed as solid line of fixed length.
    A flag on the heading indicates a turned its direction in order to
    detect a target maneuver.
    When no data is coming, the vector , heading and flag are not
    displayed.
    A symbol representing the manual or automatic selection of any
    AIS target for the display of detailed information in a separate
    data display area. In this area, received target data as well as the
    Selected

    calculated CPA and TCPA values will be shown.

    Target
    Squares indicated by its corners are drawn around the target
    symbol. This mark is displayed on the around of a numerical
    display target.
    A symbol representing an AIS target (activated or not) which data
    Dangerous
    APPENDIX

    Target

    contravene pre-set CPA and TCPA limits.
    CPA/TCPA alarm sound occurs and a symbol is flashed until
    acknowledged.

    Lost Target

    A symbol representing the last valid predicted position of an AIS
    A-29



  • Page 348

    ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●

    target before the reception of its data was lost.
    It will become a lost target when fixed time reception of the data
    of a dangerous target cannot be carried

    out. When it becomes a

    lost target, a symbol will be displayed on the position predicted by

    APPENDIX

    data received at the end, such as a course and speed.

    A-30



  • Page 349

    ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●

    1-10. AIS Filter Setting
    ■ Meaning of AIS Filter
    When an AIS filter is set up, AIS targets in the filtering area can be displayed preferentially. A
    default filter is set up within a circle with a radius of 20nm from own ship and other type of filter is
    selectable by the procedure in this section. When 50 or more AIS targets exist within the limits of
    the filter, AIS symbols are displayed according to the display priority indicated in 1-13 “Max target
    number and Display priority”.
    ■AIS Filter Type Selection
    There are three kinds of AIS filters as follows. One of them can be selected.
    1) RANGE・・・ A filter is set up in the shape of a circle which makes a radius
    set-up distance.
    2) SECTOR・・・A filter is set up in the shape of a sector including the own ship
    heading direction.
    3) ZONE

    ・・・A zone area surrounded by two directions and two ranges from
    own ship.

    Operation
    procedure
    1. Left-click MENU on the screen.
    Main menu opens.
    2. Left-click SUB1 MENU .
    SUB1 menu opens.
    3. Left-click ARPA/AIS .
    ARPA/AIS menu opens.
    4. Left-click AIS SETTING.
    AIS SETTING menu opens.
    5. Left-click AIS FILTER.
    AIS FILTER menu opens.
    APPENDIX

    A-31



  • Page 350

    ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●

    6. Left-click the selection section (combo box) of "1.FILTER TYPE".
    FILTER TYPE is chosen and the following pull down menu is displayed.

    SUB1 MENU
    AIS/ARPA
    AIS SETTING
    AIS FILTER
    1. FILTER TYPE
    4.

    1. RANGE
    2. SECTOR
    MAKE3.FILTER
    ZONE

    3. FILTER DISP
    OFF
    ON

    0.

    EXIT

    7. Select the FILTER TYPE from the pull-down menu, select 1 through 3 with the
    trackball, then left-click.

    Note:
    If a ARPA guard zone is set, the filter area for AIS target will be modified automatically to

    APPENDIX

    cover the guard zone.

    A-32



  • Page 351

    ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●

    ■ AIS Filter Setting
    Note:
    An AIS filter setting procedure changes according to the filter type chosen.
    Select a filter type should be set before setting up a filter area.
    Operation
    procedure

    1. Set up the type of a filter, according to the preceding clause.
    After selecting a filter type, then perform the following procedure to set a filter
    area..
    2. Left-click MAKE FILTER .
    It goes into filter setting mode.

    【When a filter type is "RANGE"】
    3. Adjust a setting marker to filter setting distance with a VRM knob and left-click.
    【When a filter type is “SECTOR”】
    3. Adjust a setting marker to a filter start angle with an EBL knob and left-click.
    4. Adjust a setting marker to a filter end angle with an EBL knob and left-click.

    【When a filter type is “ZONE”】
    3. Rotate EBL and VRM control knobs to adjust the cross point of EBL and VRM to
    the starting point of a filter zone. Then left click.
    4. Rotate EBL and VRM control knobs to adjust the cross point of EBL and VRM to
    the end point of a filter zone. Then left click.

    APPENDIX

    A-33



  • Page 352

    ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●

    ■ AIS Filter Area Display

    Operation
    1. Left-click MENU on the screen.
    Main menu opens.
    2. Left-click SUB1 MENU .
    SUB1 menu opens.
    3. Left-click ARPA/AIS .
    ARPA/AIS menu opens.
    4. Left-click AIS SETTING.
    AIS SETTING menu opens.
    5. Left-click AIS FILTER.
    AIS FILTER menu opens.
    6. Left-click "ON" or "OFF" of "3.FILTER DISP".
    The filter area display changes to on or off.
    When it is set to ON, filter setting area is displayed as a green
    dashed line on the radar screen.

    APPENDIX

    procedure

    A-34



  • Page 353

    ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●

    1-11. AIS and ARPA Target Association Condition
    ■ When the distance between an AIS target and an ARPA target is less than the “identical
    distance” of a preset value, these targets might be the same. In this case, only AIS symbol is
    displayed and ARPA symbol may be suppressed. The method of setting the “identical distance”
    to activate this association is as follows.

    Operation
    procedure

    1. Left-click MENU on the screen.
    Main menu opens.
    2. Left-click SUB1 MENU .
    SUB1 menu opens.
    3. Left-click ARPA/AIS .
    ARPA/AIS menu opens.
    4. Left-click AIS SETTING.
    AIS SETTING menu opens.
    5. Left-click the "7.IDENTICAL DISTANCE" edit box.
    TCPA LIMIT

    will be selected.

    The numeric input dialogue box is opened.
    6. Input the new value by pressing the 0 to 9 number keys or by using the
    -

    keys, then press

    END

    +

    or

    to input.

    Note:
    1. ARPA symbol which was suppressed by this association can be re-displayed by switching
    OFF the AIS display. See “1-6 AIS Symbol Display”.
    2. Both AIS and ARPA symbol are displayed when the “IDENTICAL DISTANCE” is set to zero.
    (Association OFF mode.) When turning power on the radar display, the “IDENTICAL
    DISTANCE” is set to zero.
    APPENDIX

    A-35



  • Page 354

    ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●

    1-12. AIS Lost Target
    When a dangerous AIS target is lost, the lost target alarm will be activated and the dangerous
    target symbol will change to a lost symbol. And the present target position is predicted by the
    final received data from the target and the lost symbol position will be updated for approx. 1
    minute. The lost symbol would be deleted when “ALARM ACK” key is pressed or no data has
    been received for approx. 1 minute after activating a lost target alarm.
    LOST TARGET interval depends on the Class A or Class B and the category of ship. Please see
    the following the lost target interval for Class A and Class B ship.

    【SOLAS ships】(Class A)
    Category of Ship

    Lost target Interval

    Ship at anchor or moored and moving at less than 3 knots

    18 min

    Ship at anchor or moored and moving at more than 3 knots

    60 sec

    Ship 0 to 14 knots

    60 sec

    Ship 0 - 14 knots and changing course

    60 sec

    Ship 14 - 23 knots

    36 sec

    Ship 14 – 23 knots and changing course

    36 sec

    Ship > 23 knots

    12 sec

    Ship > 23 knots and changing course

    12 sec

    【Non SOLAS ships】(Class B)
    Category of Ship

    Lost target Interval

    Ship < 2 knots

    18 min

    Ship 2 – 14 knots

    180 sec

    Ship 14 – 23 knots

    90 sec

    Ship > 23 knots

    30 sec

    NOTE:
    When non dangerous target is lost, the target symbol will be fixed at the last reported position and

    APPENDIX

    deleted automatically after waiting for the data input from the target for above lost target interval.

    A-36



  • Page 355

    ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●

    1-13. Conditions of AIS Symbol Display
    ■ Maximum Target Number and Display Priority
    Up to 50 AIS target symbols can be displayed in JMA-9900 series radar. When more than 50 AIS
    targets exist, 50 targets to be displayed are selected by the following priority order.
    1. Dangerous target. (Both CPA and TCPA of a target are less than the preset CPA and
    TCPA safe limit.)
    2. Selected Target for numerical data display.
    3. The target specified in target search mode. (See 1-4 Note for search mode)
    4. The target in an AIS filter. (The closer target from own ship in the filter has higher priority
    than further ones.)
    5. Targets outside of a filter and they do not conform with the above 1 to 4 conditions. A
    nearer target from own ship has higher priority than further ones.
    Note:
    When the 50 AIS targets symbol are displayed and 51st target enters, "AIS MAX TARGET"
    message appears at the lower right part of the screen and alarm sounds with “Pi! Pi! “.

    ■ AIS Target Vector Display
    - The vector of an AIS symbol is displayed in either ground-stabilized

    or sea-stabilized by a setup

    of the own speed equipment.
    The vector used now is displayed on "OS STAB" at the upper right of a screen.
    When displayed as "OS STAB GND"--- AIS Vector presentation is Ground-stabilized
    When displayed as "OS STAB
    -

    SEA" --- AIS Vector presentation is Sea-stabilized

    When the vector of an AIS symbol is displayed by sea-stabilized, the sea-stabilized vector of
    AIS target is calculated from the COG/SOG of AIS target and the own ship COG/SOG &
    CSE/STW information.

    Note:
    The vector of AIS target is not displayed in following cases.
    Case 1: COG / SOG data is not transmitted from GPS/DGPS.
    Case 2: The selected speed equipment is not working normally.
    APPENDIX

    A-37



  • Page 356

    ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●

    1-14. Alarm Display

    ■ There are the following alarms in AIS system.
    Alarm Message

    Meaning

    CPA / TCPA

    Dangerous Target is occurred

    LOST

    Lost Target is occurred
    The number of displayed AIS symbols was exceeded the

    AIS MAX TARGET

    maximum target number 50. (The 51st data was
    received.)

    AIS (DATA)

    AIS is not connected correctly. Or AIS is turned off.
    The AIS interface is not connected to radar correctly.

    AIS I/ F (DATA)

    Otherwise the interface is

    faulty.

    It is the alarm information received from AIS,
    AIS ALARM ***

    Local Alarm Number of an ALR sentence is displayed by
    3 figure number “***”.. See the AIS Alarm list below.

    AIS Alarm List on RADAR display
    AIS Alarm NO.

    Meaning of AIS

    001

    Tx malfunction

    002

    Antenna VSWR exceeds limit

    003

    Rx channel 1 malfunction

    004

    Rx channel 2 malfunction

    005

    Rx channel 70 malfunction

    006

    General failure

    008

    MKD connection lost

    025

    external EPFS lost

    026

    no sensor position in use

    029

    no valid SOG information

    030

    no valid COG information

    032

    Heading lost / invalid

    035

    no valid ROT information

    A-38

    APPENDIX

    Alarm



  • Page 357

    ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●

    Note:
    An alarm message is displayed at lower right part of the radar screen.

    Alarm message display position

    1-15. Operational restrictions
    AIS function is not available when the manual speed input or SET/DRIFT data is used and following
    operational restrictions exist
    1) An AIS function cannot turn ON
    ・When "MANUAL" was selected as a speed input source.
    ・When SET and DRIFT was set in “LOG” speed mode
    2) "LOG" speed mode cannot be chosen as a speed source.
    ・When an AIS function was ON and SET and DRIFT were set.
    3) "MANUAL" speed mode cannot be selected..
    ・When an AIS function was ON.
    4) DRIFT/SET (Current correction) function cannot turn ON.
    ・When an AIS function was ON and speed was set as "LOG".

    APPENDIX

    A-39



  • Page 358

    ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●

    2.Basic Operation with Track Ball

    APPENDIX

    The operation method of the trackball of each menu in this manual. is described in “3.4 Basic
    Operations” of the JMA-9900 Instruction Manual.

    A-40



  • Page 359

    ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●

    3.Installation of AIS Information Display Kit
    Note:
    Following connection and setup are not required if the AIS interface was built in the factory before
    shipping.
    3-1. Composition of AIS Information Display Kit
    The AIS kit for JMA-9900 consists of .
    -AIS I/F TYPE

    :

    AIS I/F PCB, Base attachment

    -7ZCRD0967

    : Power and Communication cable

    3-2. AIS I/F Connection
    (1) Attach the AIS I/F in the indicator. Refer to

    AIS UNIT INSTALLATION MANUAL.

    (2) Connect the communication cable as shown in the following figure.
    JMA-9900 Terminal Board

    (3) P

    Covering is skinned and
    itconnects with a terminal
    board.

    TB 4601
    COM CD
    COM RX
    COM TX
    COM TR
    COM SG
    COM DSR
    COM RTS
    COM RI

    o
    AIS I/F Board

    Red
    Green

    w
    e
    r

    Blak

    P500

    c





    a
    To J500

    b
    l
    e

    J16

    c

    P16

    P1

    o
    To J1

    n
    n

    Power and Communication
    cable 7ZCRD0967

    e
    c

    tion
    Connect P16 of attached cable to J16 of the terminal board.
    Connect P1 of attached cable to J1 of AIS I/F board.
    When ISW is equipped, exchange the existing power cable with the 7ZCRD0967 power cable
    in this kit.
    APPENDIX

    A-41



  • Page 360

    ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●

    3-3. Set up after Installation

    S100

    S100

    S102

    S101

    Set up a link pin, as shown in the following figure.

    S101
    S102

    ON







    12345678
    ON
    12345678
    ON




    12345678

    Note.
    It differs from "JMA-9800."
    3-4. Turn on & Check
    Turn on ship’s main power. And turn on radar power.
    AIS I/F is operating normally if the button for AIS (refer to 1-1.AIS button) is displayed on the
    screen lower left.
    , The connection or the setup may not be performed correctly if the AIS button is not displayed.
    Please turn off the radar and check connection and a setup.

    Note:

    APPENDIX

    Refer to the installation manual in the case of connection.

    A-42



  • Page 361

    Fig.101 Block Diagram of Radar, Type JMA-9933-SA,JMA-9923-7XA/9XA



  • Page 362

    Fig.102 Block Diagram of Radar, Type JMA-9932-SA,JMA-992-6XA/9XA



  • Page 363

    GYRO

    LOG
    PULSE

    CONINING DISPLAY

    DLOG

    ECHO SOUNDER

    DGPS

    ALARM MONITORING
    SYSTEM

    To ECDIS

    250V-MPYCYS-7

    0.6/1kV-DPYCYS-1.5

    250V-TTYCS-4

    250V-TTYCS-1

    250V-TTYCS-1

    250V-TTYCS-1

    1
    2

    LOG
    TB4801
    SFA +
    SFA SFS +
    SFS PULS 1+
    PULS 1PULS 2+
    PULS 2SYNC 1+
    SYNC 1SYNC 2+
    SYNC 2-

    1
    2
    3
    4
    5
    6
    7
    8
    9
    10
    11
    12

    BLK

    WHT

    RED

    1
    2
    3
    4
    5
    6
    7
    8
    9
    10
    11
    12
    13
    14
    15
    16
    17
    18
    19
    20
    21
    22
    23
    24
    25
    26
    27
    28
    29
    30

    1
    2
    3
    4
    5
    1
    2
    3
    4
    5
    6

    1/R1
    2/S1
    3/S2
    /S3
    5/R2
    (NC)

    GYRO
    TB4701

    ALM/COM
    TB4601
    1
    ARPAALM +
    2
    ARPAALM 3
    SYSALM +
    4
    SYSALM 5
    PWRALM +
    6
    PWRALM 7
    ARPAACK +
    8
    ARPAACK 9
    SYSACK +
    10
    SYSACK 11
    PWRACK +
    12
    PWRACK 13
    EXEVT +
    14
    EXEVT 15
    COMCD
    16
    COMRX
    17
    COMTX
    18
    COMDTR
    19
    COMSG
    20
    COMDSR
    21
    COMRTS
    22
    COMRI

    RBVD
    RBVDE
    ETIY 3
    ETIY 3E
    SVD 1
    SVD 1E
    ETIY 1
    ETIY 1E
    EXφA 1
    EXφA 1E
    EXφB 1
    EXφB 1E
    EXφZ 1
    EXφZ 1E
    SVD 2
    SVD 2E
    ETIY 2
    ETIY 2E
    EXφA 2
    EXφA 2E
    EXφB 2
    EXφB 2E
    EXφZ 2
    EXφZ 2E
    ITIY
    ITIYE
    EXφAIN
    EXφBIN
    EXφZEN
    EXφINGND

    EXT RADAR
    TB4401

    DISPLAY UNIT NCD-4263

    TB4501
    NAV1TX +
    NAV1TX NAV1RX +
    NAV1RX NAV2TX
    NAV2TX NAV2RX +
    NAV2RX LOGRX +
    LOGRX ALMTX +
    ALMTX ALMRX +
    ALMRX ARPATX +
    ARPATX JARPATX +
    JARPATX NSKTX +
    NSKTX NET -S
    TET -C

    1
    2
    3
    4
    5
    6
    7
    8
    9
    10
    11
    12
    13
    14
    15
    16
    17
    18
    19
    20
    21
    22

    0.6/1kV-DPYCYS-1.5

    250V-TTYCS-4
    ARPA DATA

    RADAR SIGNAL

    VDIN 1
    VDIN 1E
    TRIGIN 1
    TRIGIN 1E
    BPIN 1
    BPIN 1E
    BZIN 1
    BZIN 1E
    MTRIN 1+
    MTRIN 1MTRIN 1E
    PWRIN 1+
    PWRIN 1E
    PWROUT 1
    PWROUT 1E
    VDOUT 1
    VDOUT 1E
    TRIGOUT 1
    TRIGOUT 1E
    BPOUT 1
    BPOUT 1E
    BZOUT 1
    BZOUT 1E
    MTROUT 1+
    MTROUT 1MTORUT 1E

    H-2695110006

    1
    2
    3
    4
    5
    6
    7
    8
    9
    10
    11
    12
    13
    14
    15
    16
    17
    18
    19
    20
    21
    22
    23
    24
    25
    26

    ISW IN/OUT
    TB4201

    TB302

    TB301
    U
    V
    W
    1
    2
    3

    1
    2
    3

    TB303
    U
    1
    V
    2
    (NC)
    3

    U
    V
    W

    1
    2
    3
    4
    5
    6
    7
    8
    9
    10
    11
    12
    13
    14

    U
    V
    W

    U
    V
    W







    1

    YEL
    GRN
    BRN

    RED
    BLU

    ORG
    WHT

    POWER
    CBD-1661

    YEL
    GRN
    BRN

    YEL
    GRN
    BRN

    CBD-1684

    VD +
    VD TRIG +
    TRIG BP +
    BP BZ +
    BZ MTR +
    MTR MTRE
    (NC)
    +48V
    +48VG

    ANT
    TB4101 

    0.6/1kV-TPYCY-6

    AC220V 3φ

    MAIN POWER

    14-CORES COMPLEX CABLE
    H - 2695110056 (JRC SUPPLY)

    (OPTION)
    0.6/1kV-DPYCYS-1.5

    HEATER POWER
    AC100V1φ

    14-CROES COMPLEX CABLE
    H - 2695110056 (JRC SUPPLY)

    Fig.103(1) Terminal Board Connection Diagram of Radar, Type JMA-9933-SA (self standing type AC 220V 3f)
    RED
    BLU


    ORG
    WHT





    1

    TB201

    GRN
    BRN

    YEL

    +12V
    C2
    φZE
    φZ
    φA
    E
    φB
    +48V
    +48VG

    TB203

    VD +
    VD TRIG +
    TRIG BP +
    BP -/BZ BZ +
    MTR +
    MTR MTRE




    1

    ORG
    WHT




    1

    ORG
    WHT

    TB102  
    U1
    V1
    W1
    MU 1
    MV 1
    MW 1

    +12V
    C2
    φZE
    φZ
    φA
    E
    φB

    TB103
    V
    U

    YEL
    GRN
    BRN



    BLU
    RED

    GRY

    U0
    V0
    W0
    U1
    V1
    W1

    TB202   

    PTI
    PTE
    LVR
    PMS
    E
    TXI
    TXE

    TB204

    PTI
    PTE
    LVR
    PMS
    E
    TXI
    TXE

    TB104

    BLU
    RED
    BLK
    WHT

    YEL
    GRN
    BRN



    BLU
    RED

    GRY

    WHT

    BLU
    RED
    BLK

    TB104
    PTI
    PTE
    LVR
    PMS
    E
    TXI
    TXE

    PM UNIT
    NJU-63B

    TRANSMITTER-RECIVER
    UNIT
    NTG-3037A

    SCANNER NKE-1079



  • Page 364

    GYRO

    LOG
    PULSE

    CONINING DISPLAY

    DLOG

    ECHO SOUNDER

    DGPS

    ALARM MONITORING
    SYSTEM

    To ECDIS

    250V-MPYCYS-7

    0.6/1kV-DPYCYS-1.5

    250V-TTYCS-4

    250V-TTYCS-1

    250V-TTYCS-1

    250V-TTYCS-1

    1
    2

    LOG
    TB4801
    SFA +
    SFA SFS +
    SFS PULS 1+
    PULS 1PULS 2+
    PULS 2SYNC 1+
    SYNC 1SYNC 2+
    SYNC 2-

    1
    2
    3
    4
    5
    6
    7
    8
    9
    10
    11
    12

    BLK

    WHT

    RED

    1
    2
    3
    4
    5
    6
    7
    8
    9
    10
    11
    12
    13
    14
    15
    16
    17
    18
    19
    20
    21
    22
    23
    24
    25
    26
    27
    28
    29
    30

    1
    2
    3
    4
    5
    1
    2
    3
    4
    5
    6

    1/R1
    2/S1
    3/S2
    /S3
    5/R2
    (NC)

    GYRO
    TB4701

    ALM/COM
    TB4601
    1
    ARPAALM +
    2
    ARPAALM 3
    SYSALM +
    4
    SYSALM 5
    PWRALM +
    6
    PWRALM 7
    ARPAACK +
    8
    ARPAACK 9
    SYSACK +
    10
    SYSACK 11
    PWRACK +
    12
    PWRACK 13
    EXEVT +
    14
    EXEVT 15
    COMCD
    16
    COMRX
    17
    COMTX
    18
    COMDTR
    19
    COMSG
    20
    COMDSR
    21
    COMRTS
    22
    COMRI

    RBVD
    RBVDE
    ETIY 3
    ETIY 3E
    SVD 1
    SVD 1E
    ETIY 1
    ETIY 1E
    EXφA 1
    EXφA 1E
    EXφB 1
    EXφB 1E
    EXφZ 1
    EXφZ 1E
    SVD 2
    SVD 2E
    ETIY 2
    ETIY 2E
    EXφA 2
    EXφA 2E
    EXφB 2
    EXφB 2E
    EXφZ 2
    EXφZ 2E
    ITIY
    ITIYE
    EXφAIN
    EXφBIN
    EXφZEN
    EXφINGND

    EXT RADAR
    TB4401

    DISPLAY UNIT NCD-4263

    TB4501
    NAV1TX +
    NAV1TX NAV1RX +
    NAV1RX NAV2TX
    NAV2TX NAV2RX +
    NAV2RX LOGRX +
    LOGRX ALMTX +
    ALMTX ALMRX +
    ALMRX ARPATX +
    ARPATX JARPATX +
    JARPATX NSKTX +
    NSKTX NET -S
    TET -C

    1
    2
    3
    4
    5
    6
    7
    8
    9
    10
    11
    12
    13
    14
    15
    16
    17
    18
    19
    20
    21
    22

    0.6/1kV-DPYCYS-1.5

    250V-TTYCS-4
    ARPA DATA

    RADAR SIGNAL

    VDIN 1
    VDIN 1E
    TRIGIN 1
    TRIGIN 1E
    BPIN 1
    BPIN 1E
    BZIN 1
    BZIN 1E
    MTRIN 1+
    MTRIN 1MTRIN 1E
    PWRIN 1+
    PWRIN 1E
    PWROUT 1
    PWROUT 1E
    VDOUT 1
    VDOUT 1E
    TRIGOUT 1
    TRIGOUT 1E
    BPOUT 1
    BPOUT 1E
    BZOUT 1
    BZOUT 1E
    MTROUT 1+
    MTROUT 1MTORUT 1E

    H-2695110006

    1
    2
    3
    4
    5
    6
    7
    8
    9
    10
    11
    12
    13
    14
    15
    16
    17
    18
    19
    20
    21
    22
    23
    24
    25
    26

    ISW IN/OUT
    TB4201

    TB302

    TB301
    U
    V
    W
    1
    2
    3

    1
    2
    3

    TB303
    U
    1
    V
    2
    (NC)
    3

    U
    V
    W

    1
    2
    3
    4
    5
    6
    7
    8
    9
    10
    11
    12
    13
    14

    U
    V
    W

    U
    V
    W







    1

    YEL
    GRN

    RED
    BLU

    ORG
    WHT

    POWER
    CBD-1661

    YEL
    GRN

    YEL
    GRN

    CBD-1684

    VD +
    VD TRIG +
    TRIG BP +
    BP BZ +
    BZ MTR +
    MTR MTRE
    (NC)
    +48V
    +48VG

    ANT
    TB4101 

    0.6/1kV-TPYCY-6

    AC220V 1φ
    AC110V 1φ

    MAIN POWER

    14-CORES COMPLEX CABLE
    H - 2695110056 (JRC SUPPLY)

    (OPTION)
    0.6/1kV-DPYCYS-1.5

    HEATER POWER
    AC100V1φ

    14-CROES COMPLEX CABLE
    H - 2695110056 (JRC SUPPLY)

    Fig.103(2) Terminal Board Connection Diagram of Radar, Type JMA-9933-SA (self standing type AC220V AC100V 1f)
    RED
    BLU


    ORG
    WHT





    1

    TB201

    GRN

    YEL

    +12V
    C2
    φZE
    φZ
    φA
    E
    φB
    +48V
    +48VG

    TB203

    VD +
    VD TRIG +
    TRIG BP +
    BP -/BZ BZ +
    MTR +
    MTR MTRE




    1

    ORG
    WHT




    1

    ORG
    WHT

    TB102  
    U1
    V1
    W1
    MU 1
    MV 1
    MW 1

    +12V
    C2
    φZE
    φZ
    φA
    E
    φB

    TB103
    V
    U

    YEL
    GRN



    BLU
    RED

    GRY

    U0
    V0
    W0
    U1
    V1
    W1

    TB202   

    PTI
    PTE
    LVR
    PMS
    E
    TXI
    TXE

    TB204

    PTI
    PTE
    LVR
    PMS
    E
    TXI
    TXE

    TB104

    BLU
    RED
    BLK
    WHT

    YEL
    GRN



    BLU
    RED

    GRY

    WHT

    BLU
    RED
    BLK

    TB104
    PTI
    PTE
    LVR
    PMS
    E
    TXI
    TXE

    PM UNIT
    NJU-63B

    TRANSMITTER-RECIVER
    UNIT
    NTG-3037A

    SCANNER NKE-1079



  • Page 365

    GYRO

    LOG
    PULSE

    CONINING DISPLAY

    DLOG

    ECHO SOUNDER

    DGPS

    ALARM MONITORING
    SYSTEM

    To ECDIS

    250V-MPYCYS-7

    0.6/1kV-DPYCYS-1.5

    250V-TTYCS-4

    250V-TTYCS-1

    250V-TTYCS-1

    1
    2

    LOG
    TB4801
    SFA +
    SFA SFS +
    SFS PULS 1+
    PULS 1PULS 2+
    PULS 2SYNC 1+
    SYNC 1SYNC 2+
    SYNC 2-

    1
    2
    3
    4
    5
    6
    7
    8
    9
    10
    11
    12

    BLK

    WHT

    RED

    1
    2
    3
    4
    5
    6
    7
    8
    9
    10
    11
    12
    13
    14
    15
    16
    17
    18
    19
    20
    21
    22
    23
    24
    25
    26
    27
    28
    29
    30

    1
    2
    3
    4
    5
    1
    2
    3
    4
    5
    6

    1/R1
    2/S1
    3/S2
    /S3
    5/R2
    (NC)

    GYRO
    TB4701

    ALM/COM
    TB4601
    1
    ARPAALM +
    2
    ARPAALM 3
    SYSALM +
    4
    SYSALM 5
    PWRALM +
    6
    PWRALM 7
    ARPAACK +
    8
    ARPAACK 9
    SYSACK +
    10
    SYSACK 11
    PWRACK +
    12
    PWRACK 13
    EXEVT +
    14
    EXEVT 15
    COMCD
    16
    COMRX
    17
    COMTX
    18
    COMDTR
    19
    COMSG
    20
    COMDSR
    21
    COMRTS
    22
    COMRI

    RBVD
    RBVDE
    ETIY 3
    ETIY 3E
    SVD 1
    SVD 1E
    ETIY 1
    ETIY 1E
    EXφA 1
    EXφA 1E
    EXφB 1
    EXφB 1E
    EXφZ 1
    EXφZ 1E
    SVD 2
    SVD 2E
    ETIY 2
    ETIY 2E
    EXφA 2
    EXφA 2E
    EXφB 2
    EXφB 2E
    EXφZ 2
    EXφZ 2E
    ITIY
    ITIYE
    EXφAIN
    EXφBIN
    EXφZEN
    EXφINGND

    EXT RADAR
    TB4401

    DISPLAY UNIT NCD-4263T

    TB4501
    NAV1TX +
    NAV1TX NAV1RX +
    NAV1RX NAV2TX
    NAV2TX NAV2RX +
    NAV2RX LOGRX +
    LOGRX ALMTX +
    ALMTX ALMRX +
    ALMRX ARPATX +
    ARPATX JARPATX +
    JARPATX NSKTX +
    NSKTX NET -S
    TET -C

    1
    2
    3
    4
    5
    6
    7
    8
    9
    10
    11
    12
    13
    14
    15
    16
    17
    18
    19
    20
    21
    22

    0.6/1kV-DPYCYS-1.5

    250V-TTYCS-4
    ARPADATA

    250V-TTYCS-1

    VDIN 1
    VDIN 1E
    TRIGIN 1
    TRIGIN 1E
    BPIN 1
    BPIN 1E
    BZIN 1
    BZIN 1E
    MTRIN 1+
    MTRIN 1MTRIN 1E
    PWRIN 1+
    PWRIN 1E
    PWROUT 1
    PWROUT 1E
    VDOUT 1
    VDOUT 1E
    TRIGOUT 1
    TRIGOUT 1E
    BPOUT 1
    BPOUT 1E
    BZOUT 1
    BZOUT 1E
    MTROUT 1+
    MTROUT 1MTORUT 1E

    H-2695110006 RADAR SIGNAL

    1
    2
    3
    4
    5
    6
    7
    8
    9
    10
    11
    12
    13
    14
    15
    16
    17
    18
    19
    20
    21
    22
    23
    24
    25
    26

    ISW IN/OUT
    TB4201

    VD +
    VD TRIG +
    TRIG BP +
    BP BZ +
    BZ MTR +
    MTR MTRE
    (NC)
    +48V
    +48VG

    U
    V
    W

    1
    2
    3

    U
    V
    W

    POWER
    CBD-1661

    1
    2
    3

    TB304

    1
    2
    3
    4
    5
    6
    7
    8
    9
    10
    11
    12
    13
    14

    ANT
    TB4101 

    YEL
    GRN
    BRN

    RED
    BLU

    ORG
    WHT







    1

    (OPTION)
    0.6/1kV-DPYCYS-1.5

    MAIN POWER
    AC220V 3φ

    0.6/1kV-TPYCY-6

    14-CORES COMPLEX CABLE
    H-2695110056 (JRC SUPPLY)

    HEATER POWER
    AC100V1φ

    14-CORES COMPLEX CABLE
    H-2695110056 (JRC SUPPLY)

    Fig.104(1) Terminal Board Connection Diagram of Radar, Type JMA-9933-SA (desk top type AC 220V 3f)
    RED
    BLU


    ORG
    WHT





    1

    GRN
    BRN

    YEL

    +12V
    C2
    φZE
    φZ
    φA
    E
    φB
    +48V
    +48VG

    TB203

    VD +
    VD TRIG +
    TRIG BP +
    BP -/BZ BZ +
    MTR +
    MTR MTRE

    TB201




    1

    ORG
    WHT




    1

    ORG
    WHT

    TB102  
    U1
    V1
    W1
    MU 1
    MV 1
    MW 1

    +12V
    C2
    φZE
    φZ
    φA
    E
    φB

    TB103
    V
    U

    YEL
    GRN
    BRN



    BLU
    RED

    GRY

    U0
    V0
    W0
    U1
    V1
    W1

    TB202   

    PTI
    PTE
    LVR
    PMS
    E
    TXI
    TXE

    TB204

    PTI
    PTE
    LVR
    PMS
    E
    TXI
    TXE

    TB104

    YEL
    GRN
    BRN



    BLU
    RED

    GRY

    BLU
    RED
    BLK
    WHT

    WHT

    BLU
    RED
    BLK

    PTI
    PTE
    LVR
    PMS
    E
    TXI
    TXE

    TB104

    PM UNIT
    NJU-63B

    TRANSMITTER-RECIVER
    UNIT
    NTG-3037A

    SCANNER NKE-1079



  • Page 366

    GYRO

    LOG
    PULSE

    CONINING DISPLAY

    DLOG

    ECHO SOUNDER

    DGPS

    ALARM MONITORING
    SYSTEM

    To ECDIS

    250V-MPYCYS-7

    0.6/1kV-DPYCYS-1.5

    250V-TTYCS-4

    250V-TTYCS-1

    250V-TTYCS-1

    1
    2

    LOG
    TB4801
    SFA +
    SFA SFS +
    SFS PULS 1+
    PULS 1PULS 2+
    PULS 2SYNC 1+
    SYNC 1SYNC 2+
    SYNC 2-

    1
    2
    3
    4
    5
    6
    7
    8
    9
    10
    11
    12

    BLK

    WHT

    RED

    1
    2
    3
    4
    5
    6
    7
    8
    9
    10
    11
    12
    13
    14
    15
    16
    17
    18
    19
    20
    21
    22
    23
    24
    25
    26
    27
    28
    29
    30

    1
    2
    3
    4
    5
    1
    2
    3
    4
    5
    6

    1/R1
    2/S1
    3/S2
    /S3
    5/R2
    (NC)

    GYRO
    TB4701

    ALM/COM
    TB4601
    1
    ARPAALM +
    2
    ARPAALM 3
    SYSALM +
    4
    SYSALM 5
    PWRALM +
    6
    PWRALM 7
    ARPAACK +
    8
    ARPAACK 9
    SYSACK +
    10
    SYSACK 11
    PWRACK +
    12
    PWRACK 13
    EXEVT +
    14
    EXEVT 15
    COMCD
    16
    COMRX
    17
    COMTX
    18
    COMDTR
    19
    COMSG
    20
    COMDSR
    21
    COMRTS
    22
    COMRI

    RBVD
    RBVDE
    ETIY 3
    ETIY 3E
    SVD 1
    SVD 1E
    ETIY 1
    ETIY 1E
    EXφA 1
    EXφA 1E
    EXφB 1
    EXφB 1E
    EXφZ 1
    EXφZ 1E
    SVD 2
    SVD 2E
    ETIY 2
    ETIY 2E
    EXφA 2
    EXφA 2E
    EXφB 2
    EXφB 2E
    EXφZ 2
    EXφZ 2E
    ITIY
    ITIYE
    EXφAIN
    EXφBIN
    EXφZEN
    EXφINGND

    EXT RADAR
    TB4401

    DISPLAY UNIT NCD-4263T

    TB4501
    NAV1TX +
    NAV1TX NAV1RX +
    NAV1RX NAV2TX
    NAV2TX NAV2RX +
    NAV2RX LOGRX +
    LOGRX ALMTX +
    ALMTX ALMRX +
    ALMRX ARPATX +
    ARPATX JARPATX +
    JARPATX NSKTX +
    NSKTX NET -S
    TET -C

    1
    2
    3
    4
    5
    6
    7
    8
    9
    10
    11
    12
    13
    14
    15
    16
    17
    18
    19
    20
    21
    22

    0.6/1kV-DPYCYS-1.5

    250V-TTYCS-4
    ARPADATA

    250V-TTYCS-1

    VDIN 1
    VDIN 1E
    TRIGIN 1
    TRIGIN 1E
    BPIN 1
    BPIN 1E
    BZIN 1
    BZIN 1E
    MTRIN 1+
    MTRIN 1MTRIN 1E
    PWRIN 1+
    PWRIN 1E
    PWROUT 1
    PWROUT 1E
    VDOUT 1
    VDOUT 1E
    TRIGOUT 1
    TRIGOUT 1E
    BPOUT 1
    BPOUT 1E
    BZOUT 1
    BZOUT 1E
    MTROUT 1+
    MTROUT 1MTORUT 1E

    H-2695110006 RADAR SIGNAL

    1
    2
    3
    4
    5
    6
    7
    8
    9
    10
    11
    12
    13
    14
    15
    16
    17
    18
    19
    20
    21
    22
    23
    24
    25
    26

    ISW IN/OUT
    TB4201

    VD +
    VD TRIG +
    TRIG BP +
    BP BZ +
    BZ MTR +
    MTR MTRE
    (NC)
    +48V
    +48VG

    U
    V
    W

    1
    2
    3

    U
    V
    W

    POWER
    CBD-1661

    1
    2
    3

    TB304

    1
    2
    3
    4
    5
    6
    7
    8
    9
    10
    11
    12
    13
    14

    ANT
    TB4101 

    YEL
    GRN

    RED
    BLU

    ORG
    WHT







    1

    (OPTION)
    0.6/1kV-DPYCYS-1.5

    MAIN POWER
    AC220V 1φ
    AC110V 1φ

    0.6/1kV-TPYCY-6

    14-CORES COMPLEX CABLE
    H-2695110056 (JRC SUPPLY)

    HEATER POWER
    AC100V1φ

    14-CORES COMPLEX CABLE
    H-2695110056 (JRC SUPPLY)

    Fig.104(2) Terminal Board Connection Diagram of Radar, Type JMA-9933-SA (desk top type AC220V AC100V 1f)
    RED
    BLU


    ORG
    WHT





    1

    GRN

    YEL

    +12V
    C2
    φZE
    φZ
    φA
    E
    φB
    +48V
    +48VG

    TB203

    VD +
    VD TRIG +
    TRIG BP +
    BP -/BZ BZ +
    MTR +
    MTR MTRE

    TB201




    1

    ORG
    WHT




    1

    ORG
    WHT

    TB102  
    U1
    V1
    W1
    MU 1
    MV 1
    MW 1

    +12V
    C2
    φZE
    φZ
    φA
    E
    φB

    TB103
    V
    U

    YEL
    GRN



    BLU
    RED

    GRY

    U0
    V0
    W0
    U1
    V1
    W1

    TB202   

    PTI
    PTE
    LVR
    PMS
    E
    TXI
    TXE

    TB204

    PTI
    PTE
    LVR
    PMS
    E
    TXI
    TXE

    TB104

    YEL
    GRN



    BLU
    RED

    GRY

    BLU
    RED
    BLK
    WHT

    WHT

    BLU
    RED
    BLK

    PTI
    PTE
    LVR
    PMS
    E
    TXI
    TXE

    TB104

    PM UNIT
    NJU-63B

    TRANSMITTER-RECIVER
    UNIT
    NTG-3037A

    SCANNER NKE-1079



  • Page 367

    Fig.105(1) Terminal Board Connection Diagram of Radar, Type JMA-9932-SA (self standing type AC 220V 3f)

    GYRO

    LOG
    PULSE

    CONINING DISPLAY

    DLOG

    ECHO SOUNDER

    DGPS

    ALARM MONITORING
    SYSTEM

    To ECDIS

    250V-MPYCYS-7

    0.6/1kV-DPYCYS-1.5

    250V-TTYCS-4

    250V-TTYCS-1

    250V-TTYCS-1

    1
    2

    LOG
    TB4801
    SFA +
    SFA SFS +
    SFS PULS 1+
    PULS 1PULS 2+
    PULS 2SYNC 1+
    SYNC 1SYNC 2+
    SYNC 2-

    1
    2
    3
    4
    5
    6
    7
    8
    9
    10
    11
    12

    BLK

    WHT

    RED

    1
    2
    3
    4
    5
    6
    7
    8
    9
    10
    11
    12
    13
    14
    15
    16
    17
    18
    19
    20
    21
    22
    23
    24
    25
    26
    27
    28
    29
    30

    1
    2
    3
    4
    5
    1
    2
    3
    4
    5
    6

    1/R1
    2/S1
    3/S2
    /S3
    5/R2
    (NC)

    GYRO
    TB4701

    ALM/COM
    TB4601
    1
    ARPAALM +
    2
    ARPAALM 3
    SYSALM +
    4
    SYSALM 5
    PWRALM +
    6
    PWRALM 7
    ARPAACK +
    8
    ARPAACK 9
    SYSACK +
    10
    SYSACK 11
    PWRACK +
    12
    PWRACK 13
    EXEVT +
    14
    EXEVT 15
    COMCD
    16
    COMRX
    17
    COMTX
    18
    COMDTR
    19
    COMSG
    20
    COMDSR
    21
    COMRTS
    22
    COMRI

    RBVD
    RBVDE
    ETIY 3
    ETIY 3E
    SVD 1
    SVD 1E
    ETIY 1
    ETIY 1E
    EXφA 1
    EXφA 1E
    EXφB 1
    EXφB 1E
    EXφZ 1
    EXφZ 1E
    SVD 2
    SVD 2E
    ETIY 2
    ETIY 2E
    EXφA 2
    EXφA 2E
    EXφB 2
    EXφB 2E
    EXφZ 2
    EXφZ 2E
    ITIY
    ITIYE
    EXφAIN
    EXφBIN
    EXφZEN
    EXφINGND

    EXT RADAR
    TB4401

    DISPLAY UNIT NCD-4263

    TB4501
    NAV1TX +
    NAV1TX NAV1RX +
    NAV1RX NAV2TX
    NAV2TX NAV2RX +
    NAV2RX LOGRX +
    LOGRX ALMTX +
    ALMTX ALMRX +
    ALMRX ARPATX +
    ARPATX JARPATX +
    JARPATX NSKTX +
    NSKTX NET -S
    TET -C

    1
    2
    3
    4
    5
    6
    7
    8
    9
    10
    11
    12
    13
    14
    15
    16
    17
    18
    19
    20
    21
    22

    0.6/1kV-DPYCYS-1.5

    250V-TTYCS-4
    ARPADATA

    250V-TTYCS-1

    VDIN 1
    VDIN 1E
    TRIGIN 1
    TRIGIN 1E
    BPIN 1
    BPIN 1E
    BZIN 1
    BZIN 1E
    MTRIN 1+
    MTRIN 1MTRIN 1E
    PWRIN 1+
    PWRIN 1E
    PWROUT 1
    PWROUT 1E
    VDOUT 1
    VDOUT 1E
    TRIGOUT 1
    TRIGOUT 1E
    BPOUT 1
    BPOUT 1E
    BZOUT 1
    BZOUT 1E
    MTROUT 1+
    MTROUT 1MTORUT 1E

    H-2695110006 RADAR SIGNAL

    1
    2
    3
    4
    5
    6
    7
    8
    9
    10
    11
    12
    13
    14
    15
    16
    17
    18
    19
    20
    21
    22
    23
    24
    25
    26

    ISW IN/OUT
    TB4201

    U
    V
    W

    TB301

    U
    V
    W

    TB302

    1
    2
    3

    1
    2
    3

    TB303
    U
    1
    V
    2
    (NC)
    3

    U
    V
    W

    1
    2
    3
    4
    5
    6
    7
    8
    9
    10
    11
    12
    13
    14

    U
    V
    W

    POWER
    CBD-1661

    YEL
    GRN
    BRN

    YEL
    GRN
    BRN

    VD +
    VD TRIG +
    TRIG BP +
    BP BZ +
    BZ MTR +
    MTR MTRE
    (NC)
    +48V
    +48VG

    ANT
    TB4101 

    YEL
    GRN
    BRN

    RED
    BLU

    ORG
    WHT







    1

    0.6/1kV-TPYCY-6

    (OPTION)

    HEATER POWER
    AC100V1φ

    0.6/1kV-DPYCYS-1.5

    (JRC SUPPLY)

    14-CORES COMPLEX CABLE
    H-2695110056

    AC220V 3φ

    MAIN POWER

    1

    ORG
    WHT







    RED
    BLU
    YEL
    GRN
    BRN

    TB102  
    +48V
    +48VG
    U1
    V1
    W1
    1
    2
    3
    4
    UTH
    U
    V

    BP +
    BP BZ +
    BZ TRIG +
    TRIG MTR +
    MTR MTRE
    VD +
    VD -

    TB101
    1
    2
    3
    4
    5
    6
    7
    8
    9
    10
    11

    SCANNER
    NKE-1075A

    BLU
    RED
    BLK
    WHT

    BLK
    WHT

    BLU
    RED

    1
    2
    3
    4
    5
    6
    7
    8

    1
    2
    3
    4
    5
    6
    7

    J8
    PTI
    PTE
    LVR
    PMS
    E
    TXI
    TXE

    PTI
    PTE
    LVR
    PMS
    E
    TXI
    TXE

    TB104

    PM UNIT
    NJU-63B



  • Page 368

    Fig.105(2) Terminal Board Connection Diagram of Radar, Type JMA-9932-SA (self standing type AC220V AC100V 1f)

    GYRO

    LOG
    PULSE

    CONINING DISPLAY

    DLOG

    ECHO SOUNDER

    DGPS

    ALARM MONITORING
    SYSTEM

    To ECDIS

    250V-MPYCYS-7

    0.6/1kV-DPYCYS-1.5

    250V-TTYCS-4

    250V-TTYCS-1

    250V-TTYCS-1

    1
    2

    LOG
    TB4801
    SFA +
    SFA SFS +
    SFS PULS 1+
    PULS 1PULS 2+
    PULS 2SYNC 1+
    SYNC 1SYNC 2+
    SYNC 2-

    1
    2
    3
    4
    5
    6
    7
    8
    9
    10
    11
    12

    BLK

    WHT

    RED

    1
    2
    3
    4
    5
    6
    7
    8
    9
    10
    11
    12
    13
    14
    15
    16
    17
    18
    19
    20
    21
    22
    23
    24
    25
    26
    27
    28
    29
    30

    1
    2
    3
    4
    5
    1
    2
    3
    4
    5
    6

    1/R1
    2/S1
    3/S2
    /S3
    5/R2
    (NC)

    GYRO
    TB4701

    ALM/COM
    TB4601
    1
    ARPAALM +
    2
    ARPAALM 3
    SYSALM +
    4
    SYSALM 5
    PWRALM +
    6
    PWRALM 7
    ARPAACK +
    8
    ARPAACK 9
    SYSACK +
    10
    SYSACK 11
    PWRACK +
    12
    PWRACK 13
    EXEVT +
    14
    EXEVT 15
    COMCD
    16
    COMRX
    17
    COMTX
    18
    COMDTR
    19
    COMSG
    20
    COMDSR
    21
    COMRTS
    22
    COMRI

    RBVD
    RBVDE
    ETIY 3
    ETIY 3E
    SVD 1
    SVD 1E
    ETIY 1
    ETIY 1E
    EXφA 1
    EXφA 1E
    EXφB 1
    EXφB 1E
    EXφZ 1
    EXφZ 1E
    SVD 2
    SVD 2E
    ETIY 2
    ETIY 2E
    EXφA 2
    EXφA 2E
    EXφB 2
    EXφB 2E
    EXφZ 2
    EXφZ 2E
    ITIY
    ITIYE
    EXφAIN
    EXφBIN
    EXφZEN
    EXφINGND

    EXT RADAR
    TB4401

    DISPLAY UNIT NCD-4263

    TB4501
    NAV1TX +
    NAV1TX NAV1RX +
    NAV1RX NAV2TX
    NAV2TX NAV2RX +
    NAV2RX LOGRX +
    LOGRX ALMTX +
    ALMTX ALMRX +
    ALMRX ARPATX +
    ARPATX JARPATX +
    JARPATX NSKTX +
    NSKTX NET -S
    TET -C

    1
    2
    3
    4
    5
    6
    7
    8
    9
    10
    11
    12
    13
    14
    15
    16
    17
    18
    19
    20
    21
    22

    0.6/1kV-DPYCYS-1.5

    250V-TTYCS-4
    ARPADATA

    250V-TTYCS-1

    VDIN 1
    VDIN 1E
    TRIGIN 1
    TRIGIN 1E
    BPIN 1
    BPIN 1E
    BZIN 1
    BZIN 1E
    MTRIN 1+
    MTRIN 1MTRIN 1E
    PWRIN 1+
    PWRIN 1E
    PWROUT 1
    PWROUT 1E
    VDOUT 1
    VDOUT 1E
    TRIGOUT 1
    TRIGOUT 1E
    BPOUT 1
    BPOUT 1E
    BZOUT 1
    BZOUT 1E
    MTROUT 1+
    MTROUT 1MTORUT 1E

    H-2695110006 RADAR SIGNAL

    1
    2
    3
    4
    5
    6
    7
    8
    9
    10
    11
    12
    13
    14
    15
    16
    17
    18
    19
    20
    21
    22
    23
    24
    25
    26

    ISW IN/OUT
    TB4201

    U
    V
    W

    TB301

    U
    V
    W

    TB302

    1
    2
    3

    1
    2
    3

    TB303
    U
    1
    V
    2
    (NC)
    3

    U
    V
    W

    1
    2
    3
    4
    5
    6
    7
    8
    9
    10
    11
    12
    13
    14

    U
    V
    W

    POWER
    CBD-1661

    YEL
    GRN

    YEL
    GRN

    VD +
    VD TRIG +
    TRIG BP +
    BP BZ +
    BZ MTR +
    MTR MTRE
    (NC)
    +48V
    +48VG

    ANT
    TB4101 

    YEL
    GRN

    RED
    BLU

    ORG
    WHT







    1

    0.6/1kV-TPYCY-6

    (OPTION)

    HEATER POWER
    AC100V1φ

    0.6/1kV-DPYCYS-1.5

    (JRC SUPPLY)

    14-CORES COMPLEX CABLE
    H-2695110056

    AC220V 1φ
    AC110V 1φ

    MAIN POWER

    1

    ORG
    WHT







    RED
    BLU
    YEL
    GRN

    TB102  
    +48V
    +48VG
    U1
    V1
    W1
    1
    2
    3
    4
    UTH
    U
    V

    BP +
    BP BZ +
    BZ TRIG +
    TRIG MTR +
    MTR MTRE
    VD +
    VD -

    TB101
    1
    2
    3
    4
    5
    6
    7
    8
    9
    10
    11

    SCANNER
    NKE-1075A

    BLU
    RED
    BLK
    WHT

    BLK
    WHT

    BLU
    RED

    1
    2
    3
    4
    5
    6
    7
    8

    1
    2
    3
    4
    5
    6
    7

    J8
    PTI
    PTE
    LVR
    PMS
    E
    TXI
    TXE

    PTI
    PTE
    LVR
    PMS
    E
    TXI
    TXE

    TB104

    PM UNIT
    NJU-63B



  • Page 369

    Fig.106(1) Terminal Board Connection Diagram of Radar, Type JMA-9932-SA (desk top type AC 220V 3f)

    GYRO

    LOG
    PULSE

    CONINING DISPLAY

    DLOG

    ECHO SOUNDER

    DGPS

    ALARM MONITORING
    SYSTEM

    To ECDIS

    250V-MPYCYS-7

    0.6/1kV-DPYCYS-1.5

    250V-TTYCS-4

    250V-TTYCS-1

    250V-TTYCS-1

    1
    2

    TB4501
    NAV1TX +
    NAV1TX NAV1RX +
    NAV1RX NAV2TX
    NAV2TX NAV2RX +
    NAV2RX LOGRX +
    LOGRX ALMTX +
    ALMTX ALMRX +
    ALMRX ARPATX +
    ARPATX JARPATX +
    JARPATX NSKTX +
    NSKTX NET -S
    TET -C

    LOG
    TB4801
    SFA +
    SFA SFS +
    SFS PULS 1+
    PULS 1PULS 2+
    PULS 2SYNC 1+
    SYNC 1SYNC 2+
    SYNC 2-

    1
    2
    3
    4
    5
    6
    7
    8
    9
    10
    11
    12
    13
    14
    15
    16
    17
    18
    19
    20
    21
    22

    1
    2
    3
    4
    5
    6
    7
    8
    9
    10
    11
    12

    BLK

    WHT

    RED

    1
    2
    3
    4
    5
    6
    7
    8
    9
    10
    11
    12
    13
    14
    15
    16
    17
    18
    19
    20
    21
    22
    23
    24
    25
    26
    27
    28
    29
    30

    1
    2
    3
    4
    5
    1
    2
    3
    4
    5
    6

    1/R1
    2/S1
    3/S2
    /S3
    5/R2
    (NC)

    GYRO
    TB4701

    ALM/COM
    TB4601
    ARPAALM +
    ARPAALM SYSALM +
    SYSALM PWRALM +
    PWRALM ARPAACK +
    ARPAACK SYSACK +
    SYSACK PWRACK +
    PWRACK EXEVT +
    EXEVT COMCD
    COMRX
    COMTX
    COMDTR
    COMSG
    COMDSR
    COMRTS
    COMRI

    1
    2
    3
    4
    5
    6
    7
    8
    9
    10
    11
    12
    13
    14
    15
    16
    17
    18
    19
    20
    21
    22

    RBVD
    RBVDE
    ETIY 3
    ETIY 3E
    SVD 1
    SVD 1E
    ETIY 1
    ETIY 1E
    EXφA 1
    EXφA 1E
    EXφB 1
    EXφB 1E
    EXφZ 1
    EXφZ 1E
    SVD 2
    SVD 2E
    ETIY 2
    ETIY 2E
    EXφA 2
    EXφA 2E
    EXφB 2
    EXφB 2E
    EXφZ 2
    EXφZ 2E
    ITIY
    ITIYE
    EXφAIN
    EXφBIN
    EXφZEN
    EXφINGND

    EXT RADAR
    TB4401

    DISPLAY UNIT NCD-4263T

    0.6/1kV-DPYCYS-1.5

    250V-TTYCS-4
    ARPADATA

    250V-TTYCS-1

    VDIN 1
    VDIN 1E
    TRIGIN 1
    TRIGIN 1E
    BPIN 1
    BPIN 1E
    BZIN 1
    BZIN 1E
    MTRIN 1+
    MTRIN 1MTRIN 1E
    PWRIN 1+
    PWRIN 1E
    PWROUT 1
    PWROUT 1E
    VDOUT 1
    VDOUT 1E
    TRIGOUT 1
    TRIGOUT 1E
    BPOUT 1
    BPOUT 1E
    BZOUT 1
    BZOUT 1E
    MTROUT 1+
    MTROUT 1MTORUT 1E

    H-2695110006 RADAR SIGNAL

    1
    2
    3
    4
    5
    6
    7
    8
    9
    10
    11
    12
    13
    14
    15
    16
    17
    18
    19
    20
    21
    22
    23
    24
    25
    26

    ISW IN/OUT
    TB4201

    VD +
    VD TRIG +
    TRIG BP +
    BP BZ +
    BZ MTR +
    MTR MTRE
    (NC)
    +48V
    +48VG

    U
    V
    W

    1
    2
    3

    U
    V
    W

    POWER
    CBD-1661

    1
    2
    3

    TB304

    1
    2
    3
    4
    5
    6
    7
    8
    9
    10
    11
    12
    13
    14

    ANT
    TB4101 

    YEL
    GRN
    BRN

    RED
    BLU

    ORG
    WHT







    1

    0.6/1kV-TPYCY-6
    MAIN POWER
    AC220V 3φ

    HEATER POWER
    AC100V1φ

    0.6/1kV-DPYCYS-1.5

    (OPTION)

    14-CORES COMPLEX CABLE
    H-2695110056 (JRC SUPPLY)

    1

    ORG
    WHT







    RED
    BLU
    YEL
    GRN
    BRN

    TB102  
    +48V
    +48VG
    U1
    V1
    W1
    1
    2
    3
    4
    UTH
    U
    V

    BP +
    BP BZ +
    BZ TRIG +
    TRIG MTR +
    MTR MTRE
    VD +
    VD -

    TB101
    1
    2
    3
    4
    5
    6
    7
    8
    9
    10
    11

    SCANNER
    NKE-1075A

    BLU
    RED
    BLK
    WHT

    BLK
    WHT

    BLU
    RED

    PM UNIT
    NJU-63B

    1
    2
    3
    4
    5
    6
    7
    8

    1
    2
    3
    4
    5
    6
    7

    PTI
    PTE
    LVR
    PMS
    E
    TXI
    TXE

    J8

    PTI
    PTE
    LVR
    PMS
    E
    TXI
    TXE

    TB104



  • Page 370

    Fig.106(2) Terminal Board Connection Diagram of Radar, Type JMA-9932-SA (desk top type AC220V AC100 1f)

    GYRO

    LOG
    PULSE

    CONINING DISPLAY

    DLOG

    ECHO SOUNDER

    DGPS

    ALARM MONITORING
    SYSTEM

    To ECDIS

    250V-MPYCYS-7

    0.6/1kV-DPYCYS-1.5

    250V-TTYCS-4

    250V-TTYCS-1

    250V-TTYCS-1

    1
    2

    TB4501
    NAV1TX +
    NAV1TX NAV1RX +
    NAV1RX NAV2TX
    NAV2TX NAV2RX +
    NAV2RX LOGRX +
    LOGRX ALMTX +
    ALMTX ALMRX +
    ALMRX ARPATX +
    ARPATX JARPATX +
    JARPATX NSKTX +
    NSKTX NET -S
    TET -C

    LOG
    TB4801
    SFA +
    SFA SFS +
    SFS PULS 1+
    PULS 1PULS 2+
    PULS 2SYNC 1+
    SYNC 1SYNC 2+
    SYNC 2-

    1
    2
    3
    4
    5
    6
    7
    8
    9
    10
    11
    12
    13
    14
    15
    16
    17
    18
    19
    20
    21
    22

    1
    2
    3
    4
    5
    6
    7
    8
    9
    10
    11
    12

    BLK

    WHT

    RED

    1
    2
    3
    4
    5
    6
    7
    8
    9
    10
    11
    12
    13
    14
    15
    16
    17
    18
    19
    20
    21
    22
    23
    24
    25
    26
    27
    28
    29
    30

    1
    2
    3
    4
    5
    1
    2
    3
    4
    5
    6

    1/R1
    2/S1
    3/S2
    /S3
    5/R2
    (NC)

    GYRO
    TB4701

    ALM/COM
    TB4601
    1
    ARPAALM +
    2
    ARPAALM 3
    SYSALM +
    4
    SYSALM 5
    PWRALM +
    6
    PWRALM 7
    ARPAACK +
    8
    ARPAACK 9
    SYSACK +
    10
    SYSACK 11
    PWRACK +
    12
    PWRACK 13
    EXEVT +
    14
    EXEVT 15
    COMCD
    16
    COMRX
    17
    COMTX
    18
    COMDTR
    19
    COMSG
    20
    COMDSR
    21
    COMRTS
    22
    COMRI

    RBVD
    RBVDE
    ETIY 3
    ETIY 3E
    SVD 1
    SVD 1E
    ETIY 1
    ETIY 1E
    EXφA 1
    EXφA 1E
    EXφB 1
    EXφB 1E
    EXφZ 1
    EXφZ 1E
    SVD 2
    SVD 2E
    ETIY 2
    ETIY 2E
    EXφA 2
    EXφA 2E
    EXφB 2
    EXφB 2E
    EXφZ 2
    EXφZ 2E
    ITIY
    ITIYE
    EXφAIN
    EXφBIN
    EXφZEN
    EXφINGND

    EXT RADAR
    TB4401

    DISPLAY UNIT NCD-4263T

    0.6/1kV-DPYCYS-1.5

    250V-TTYCS-4
    ARPADATA

    250V-TTYCS-1

    VDIN 1
    VDIN 1E
    TRIGIN 1
    TRIGIN 1E
    BPIN 1
    BPIN 1E
    BZIN 1
    BZIN 1E
    MTRIN 1+
    MTRIN 1MTRIN 1E
    PWRIN 1+
    PWRIN 1E
    PWROUT 1
    PWROUT 1E
    VDOUT 1
    VDOUT 1E
    TRIGOUT 1
    TRIGOUT 1E
    BPOUT 1
    BPOUT 1E
    BZOUT 1
    BZOUT 1E
    MTROUT 1+
    MTROUT 1MTORUT 1E

    H-2695110006 RADAR SIGNAL

    1
    2
    3
    4
    5
    6
    7
    8
    9
    10
    11
    12
    13
    14
    15
    16
    17
    18
    19
    20
    21
    22
    23
    24
    25
    26

    ISW IN/OUT
    TB4201

    VD +
    VD TRIG +
    TRIG BP +
    BP BZ +
    BZ MTR +
    MTR MTRE
    (NC)
    +48V
    +48VG

    U
    V
    W

    1
    2
    3

    U
    V
    W

    RED
    BLU

    ORG
    WHT







    1

    YEL
    GRN

    POWER
    CBD-1661

    1
    2
    3

    TB304

    1
    2
    3
    4
    5
    6
    7
    8
    9
    10
    11
    12
    13
    14

    ANT
    TB4101 

    0.6/1kV-TPYCY-6
    MAIN POWER
    AC220V 1φ
    AC110V 1φ

    HEATER POWER
    AC100V1φ

    0.6/1kV-DPYCYS-1.5

    (OPTION)

    14-CORES COMPLEX CABLE
    H-2695110056 (JRC SUPPLY)

    1

    ORG
    WHT







    RED
    BLU
    YEL
    GRN

    TB102  
    +48V
    +48VG
    U1
    V1
    W1
    1
    2
    3
    4
    UTH
    U
    V

    BP +
    BP BZ +
    BZ TRIG +
    TRIG MTR +
    MTR MTRE
    VD +
    VD -

    TB101
    1
    2
    3
    4
    5
    6
    7
    8
    9
    10
    11

    SCANNER
    NKE-1075A

    BLU
    RED
    BLK
    WHT

    BLK
    WHT

    BLU
    RED

    PM UNIT
    NJU-63B

    1
    2
    3
    4
    5
    6
    7
    8

    1
    2
    3
    4
    5
    6
    7

    PTI
    PTE
    LVR
    PMS
    E
    TXI
    TXE

    J8

    PTI
    PTE
    LVR
    PMS
    E
    TXI
    TXE

    TB104



  • Page 371

    GYRO

    LOG
    PULSE

    CONINING DISPLAY

    DLOG

    ECHO SOUNDER

    DGPS

    ALARM MONITORING
    SYSTEM

    To ECDIS

    250V-MPYCYS-7

    0.6/1kV-DPYCYS-1.5

    250V-TTYCS-4

    250V-TTYCS-1

    250V-TTYCS-1

    1
    2

    LOG
    TB4801
    SFA +
    SFA SFS +
    SFS PULS 1+
    PULS 1PULS 2+
    PULS 2SYNC 1+
    SYNC 1SYNC 2+
    SYNC 2-

    1
    2
    3
    4
    5
    6
    7
    8
    9
    10
    11
    12

    BLK

    WHT

    RED

    1
    2
    3
    4
    5
    6
    7
    8
    9
    10
    11
    12
    13
    14
    15
    16
    17
    18
    19
    20
    21
    22
    23
    24
    25
    26
    27
    28
    29
    30

    1
    2
    3
    4
    5
    1
    2
    3
    4
    5
    6

    1/R1
    2/S1
    3/S2
    /S3
    5/R2
    (NC)

    GYRO
    TB4701

    ALM/COM
    TB4601
    1
    ARPAALM +
    2
    ARPAALM 3
    SYSALM +
    4
    SYSALM 5
    PWRALM +
    6
    PWRALM 7
    ARPAACK +
    8
    ARPAACK 9
    SYSACK +
    10
    SYSACK 11
    PWRACK +
    12
    PWRACK 13
    EXEVT +
    14
    EXEVT 15
    COMCD
    16
    COMRX
    17
    COMTX
    18
    COMDTR
    19
    COMSG
    20
    COMDSR
    21
    COMRTS
    22
    COMRI

    RBVD
    RBVDE
    ETIY 3
    ETIY 3E
    SVD 1
    SVD 1E
    ETIY 1
    ETIY 1E
    EXφA 1
    EXφA 1E
    EXφB 1
    EXφB 1E
    EXφZ 1
    EXφZ 1E
    SVD 2
    SVD 2E
    ETIY 2
    ETIY 2E
    EXφA 2
    EXφA 2E
    EXφB 2
    EXφB 2E
    EXφZ 2
    EXφZ 2E
    ITIY
    ITIYE
    EXφAIN
    EXφBIN
    EXφZEN
    EXφINGND

    EXT RADAR
    TB4401

    DISPLAY UNIT NCD-4263

    TB4501
    NAV1TX +
    NAV1TX NAV1RX +
    NAV1RX NAV2TX
    NAV2TX NAV2RX +
    NAV2RX LOGRX +
    LOGRX ALMTX +
    ALMTX ALMRX +
    ALMRX ARPATX +
    ARPATX JARPATX +
    JARPATX NSKTX +
    NSKTX NET -S
    TET -C

    1
    2
    3
    4
    5
    6
    7
    8
    9
    10
    11
    12
    13
    14
    15
    16
    17
    18
    19
    20
    21
    22

    0.6/1kV-DPYCYS-1.5

    250V-TTYCS-4
    ARPADATA

    250V-TTYCS-1

    VDIN 1
    VDIN 1E
    TRIGIN 1
    TRIGIN 1E
    BPIN 1
    BPIN 1E
    BZIN 1
    BZIN 1E
    MTRIN 1+
    MTRIN 1MTRIN 1E
    PWRIN 1+
    PWRIN 1E
    PWROUT 1
    PWROUT 1E
    VDOUT 1
    VDOUT 1E
    TRIGOUT 1
    TRIGOUT 1E
    BPOUT 1
    BPOUT 1E
    BZOUT 1
    BZOUT 1E
    MTROUT 1+
    MTROUT 1MTORUT 1E

    H-2695110006 RADAR SIGNAL

    1
    2
    3
    4
    5
    6
    7
    8
    9
    10
    11
    12
    13
    14
    15
    16
    17
    18
    19
    20
    21
    22
    23
    24
    25
    26

    ISW IN/OUT
    TB4201

    U
    V
    W

    TB301

    U
    V
    W

    TB302

    1
    2
    3

    1
    2
    3

    TB303
    U
    1
    V
    2
    (NC)
    3

    U
    V
    W

    1
    2
    3
    4
    5
    6
    7
    8
    9
    10
    11
    12
    13
    14

    U
    V
    W

    POWER
    CBD-1661

    YEL
    GRN
    BRN

    YEL
    GRN
    BRN

    VD +
    VD TRIG +
    TRIG BP +
    BP BZ +
    BZ MTR +
    MTR MTRE
    (NC)
    +48V
    +48VG

    ANT
    TB4101 

    YEL
    GRN
    BRN

    RED
    BLU

    ORG
    WHT







    1

    (OPTION)

    AC220V/230V 3φ

    MAIN POWER

    0.6/1kV-TPYCY-6

    14-CORES COMPLEX CABLE
    H-2695110056 (JRC SUPPLY)

    0.6/1kV-DPYCYS-1.5
    HEATER POWER
    AC100V1φ

    14-CORES COMPLEX CABLE
    H-2695110056 (JRC SUPPLY)

    Fig.107 Terminal Board Connection Diagram of Radar, Type JMA-9923-7/9XA (self standing type AC 220V/230V 3f)
    RED
    BLU


    ORG
    WHT





    1



    1



    YEL
    GRN
    BRN
    ORG
    WHT

    TB203
    +12V
    C2
    φZE
    φZ
    φA
    E
    φB
    +48V
    +48VG

    VD +
    VD TRIG +
    TRIG BP +
    BP -/BZ BZ +
    MTR +
    MTR MTRE

    TB201

    MU 1
    MV 1
    MW 1




    1

    WHT

    ORG

    TB105  
    U
    V
    UTH

    TB103
    U1
    V1
    W1
    +12V
    C2
    φZE
    φZ
    φA
    E
    φB



    YEL
    GRN
    BRN

    BLU
    RED

    GRY

    U0
    V0
    W0
    U1
    V1
    W1

    TB202

    MPS
    MCT

    PTI
    PTE
    LVR
    PMS
    E
    TXI
    TXE

    TB204

    MPS
    MCT

    PTI
    PTE
    LVR
    PMS
    E
    TXI
    TXE

    TB104

    BLU
    RED
    BLK
    WHT

    YEL
    GRN
    BRN



    BLU
    RED

    GRY

    WHT

    BLU
    RED
    BLK

    TB104
    PTI
    PTE
    LVR
    PMS
    E
    TXI
    TXE

    PM UNIT
    NJU-64   

    TRANSMITTER-RECIVER
    UNIT
    NTG-3028

    SCANNER NKE-1089



  • Page 372

    GYRO

    LOG
    PULSE

    CONINING DISPLAY

    DLOG

    ECHO SOUNDER

    DGPS

    ALARM MONITORING
    SYSTEM

    To ECDIS

    250V-MPYCYS-7

    0.6/1kV-DPYCYS-1.5

    250V-TTYCS-4

    250V-TTYCS-1

    250V-TTYCS-1

    1
    2

    LOG
    TB4801
    SFA +
    SFA SFS +
    SFS PULS 1+
    PULS 1PULS 2+
    PULS 2SYNC 1+
    SYNC 1SYNC 2+
    SYNC 2-

    1
    2
    3
    4
    5
    6
    7
    8
    9
    10
    11
    12

    BLK

    WHT

    RED

    1
    2
    3
    4
    5
    6
    7
    8
    9
    10
    11
    12
    13
    14
    15
    16
    17
    18
    19
    20
    21
    22
    23
    24
    25
    26
    27
    28
    29
    30

    1
    2
    3
    4
    5
    1
    2
    3
    4
    5
    6

    1/R1
    2/S1
    3/S2
    /S3
    5/R2
    (NC)

    GYRO
    TB4701

    ALM/COM
    TB4601
    ARPAALM +
    ARPAALM SYSALM +
    SYSALM PWRALM +
    PWRALM ARPAACK +
    ARPAACK SYSACK +
    SYSACK PWRACK +
    PWRACK EXEVT +
    EXEVT COMCD
    COMRX
    COMTX
    COMDTR
    COMSG
    COMDSR
    COMRTS
    COMRI

    1
    2
    3
    4
    5
    6
    7
    8
    9
    10
    11
    12
    13
    14
    15
    16
    17
    18
    19
    20
    21
    22

    RBVD
    RBVDE
    ETIY 3
    ETIY 3E
    SVD 1
    SVD 1E
    ETIY 1
    ETIY 1E
    EXφA 1
    EXφA 1E
    EXφB 1
    EXφB 1E
    EXφZ 1
    EXφZ 1E
    SVD 2
    SVD 2E
    ETIY 2
    ETIY 2E
    EXφA 2
    EXφA 2E
    EXφB 2
    EXφB 2E
    EXφZ 2
    EXφZ 2E
    ITIY
    ITIYE
    EXφAIN
    EXφBIN
    EXφZEN
    EXφINGND

    EXT RADAR
    TB4401

    DISPLAY UNIT NCD-4263

    TB4501
    NAV1TX +
    NAV1TX NAV1RX +
    NAV1RX NAV2TX
    NAV2TX NAV2RX +
    NAV2RX LOGRX +
    LOGRX ALMTX +
    ALMTX ALMRX +
    ALMRX ARPATX +
    ARPATX JARPATX +
    JARPATX NSKTX +
    NSKTX NET -S
    TET -C

    1
    2
    3
    4
    5
    6
    7
    8
    9
    10
    11
    12
    13
    14
    15
    16
    17
    18
    19
    20
    21
    22

    0.6/1kV-DPYCYS-1.5

    250V-TTYCS-4
    ARPADATA

    250V-TTYCS-1

    VDIN 1
    VDIN 1E
    TRIGIN 1
    TRIGIN 1E
    BPIN 1
    BPIN 1E
    BZIN 1
    BZIN 1E
    MTRIN 1+
    MTRIN 1MTRIN 1E
    PWRIN 1+
    PWRIN 1E
    PWROUT 1
    PWROUT 1E
    VDOUT 1
    VDOUT 1E
    TRIGOUT 1
    TRIGOUT 1E
    BPOUT 1
    BPOUT 1E
    BZOUT 1
    BZOUT 1E
    MTROUT 1+
    MTROUT 1MTORUT 1E

    H-2695110006 RADAR SIGNAL

    1
    2
    3
    4
    5
    6
    7
    8
    9
    10
    11
    12
    13
    14
    15
    16
    17
    18
    19
    20
    21
    22
    23
    24
    25
    26

    ISW IN/OUT
    TB4201

    U
    V
    W

    TB301

    U
    V
    W

    TB302

    1
    2
    3

    1
    2
    3

    TB303
    U
    1
    V
    2
    (NC)
    3

    U
    V
    W

    1
    2
    3
    4
    5
    6
    7
    8
    9
    10
    11
    12
    13
    14

    U
    V
    W

    POWER
    CBD-1661

    YEL
    GRN

    YEL
    GRN

    VD +
    VD TRIG +
    TRIG BP +
    BP BZ +
    BZ MTR +
    MTR MTRE
    (NC)
    +48V
    +48VG

    ANT
    TB4101 

    YEL
    GRN

    RED
    BLU

    ORG
    WHT







    1

    AC220V/230V 1φ
    AC100V/110V 1φ

    MAIN POWER

    0.6/1kV-TPYCY-6

    14-CORES COMPLEX CABLE
    H-2695110056 (JRC SUPPLY)

    (OPTION)
    0.6/1kV-DPYCYS-1.5
    HEATER POWER
    AC100V1φ

    14-CORES COMPLEX CABLE
    H-2695110056 (JRC SUPPLY)

    Fig.108 Terminal Board Connection Diagram of Radar, Type JMA-9923-7/9XA (self standing type AC220V/230V 1f AC100V/110V 1f)
    RED
    BLU


    ORG
    WHT





    1



    1



    ORG
    WHT

    YEL
    GRN

    +12V
    C2
    φZE
    φZ
    φA
    E
    φB
    +48V
    +48VG




    1

    WHT

    TB203
    ORG

    VD +
    VD TRIG +
    TRIG BP +
    BP -/BZ BZ +
    MTR +
    MTR MTRE

    TB201

    1
    MCNT +
    MCNT M +24V 1
    M +24VG 1
    2

    TB105  
    U
    V
    UTH

    +12V
    C2
    φZE
    φZ
    φA
    E
    φB

    TB103
    U1
    V1

    YEL
    GRN
    BRN

    PR
    BLK



    BLU
    RED

    GRY

    U0
    V0
    W0
    U1
    V1
    W1

    TB202

    MPS
    MCT

    PTI
    PTE
    LVR
    PMS
    E
    TXI
    TXE

    TB204

    MPS
    MCT

    PTI
    PTE
    LVR
    PMS
    E
    TXI
    TXE

    TB104

    BLU
    RED
    BLK
    WHT

    YEL
    GRN
    BRN

    PR
    BLK



    BLU
    RED

    GRY

    WHT

    BLU
    RED
    BLK

    TB104
    PTI
    PTE
    LVR
    PMS
    E
    TXI
    TXE

    PM UNIT
    NJU-64   

    TRANSMITTER-RECIVER
    UNIT
    NTG-3028

    SCANNER NKE-1089



  • Page 373

    GYRO

    LOG
    PULSE

    CONINING DISPLAY

    DLOG

    ECHO SOUNDER

    DGPS

    ALARM MONITORING
    SYSTEM

    To ECDIS

    250V-MPYCYS-7

    0.6/1kV-DPYCYS-1.5

    250V-TTYCS-4

    250V-TTYCS-1

    250V-TTYCS-1

    1
    2

    TB4501
    NAV1TX +
    NAV1TX NAV1RX +
    NAV1RX NAV2TX
    NAV2TX NAV2RX +
    NAV2RX LOGRX +
    LOGRX ALMTX +
    ALMTX ALMRX +
    ALMRX ARPATX +
    ARPATX JARPATX +
    JARPATX NSKTX +
    NSKTX NET -S
    TET -C

    LOG
    TB4801
    SFA +
    SFA SFS +
    SFS PULS 1+
    PULS 1PULS 2+
    PULS 2SYNC 1+
    SYNC 1SYNC 2+
    SYNC 2-

    1
    2
    3
    4
    5
    6
    7
    8
    9
    10
    11
    12
    13
    14
    15
    16
    17
    18
    19
    20
    21
    22

    1
    2
    3
    4
    5
    6
    7
    8
    9
    10
    11
    12

    0.6/1kV-DPYCYS-1.5

    250V-TTYCS-4
    ARPADATA

    250V-TTYCS-1

    VDIN 1
    VDIN 1E
    TRIGIN 1
    TRIGIN 1E
    BPIN 1
    BPIN 1E
    BZIN 1
    BZIN 1E
    MTRIN 1+
    MTRIN 1MTRIN 1E
    PWRIN 1+
    PWRIN 1E
    PWROUT 1
    PWROUT 1E
    VDOUT 1
    VDOUT 1E
    TRIGOUT 1
    TRIGOUT 1E
    BPOUT 1
    BPOUT 1E
    BZOUT 1
    BZOUT 1E
    MTROUT 1+
    MTROUT 1MTORUT 1E

    BLK

    WHT

    RED

    1
    2
    3
    4
    5
    6
    7
    8
    9
    10
    11
    12
    13
    14
    15
    16
    17
    18
    19
    20
    21
    22
    23
    24
    25
    26
    27
    28
    29
    30

    1
    2
    3
    4
    5
    1
    2
    3
    4
    5
    6

    1/R1
    2/S1
    3/S2
    /S3
    5/R2
    (NC)

    GYRO
    TB4701

    ALM/COM
    TB4601
    1
    ARPAALM +
    2
    ARPAALM 3
    SYSALM +
    4
    SYSALM 5
    PWRALM +
    6
    PWRALM 7
    ARPAACK +
    8
    ARPAACK 9
    SYSACK +
    10
    SYSACK 11
    PWRACK +
    12
    PWRACK 13
    EXEVT +
    14
    EXEVT 15
    COMCD
    16
    COMRX
    17
    COMTX
    18
    COMDTR
    19
    COMSG
    20
    COMDSR
    21
    COMRTS
    22
    COMRI

    RBVD
    RBVDE
    ETIY 3
    ETIY 3E
    SVD 1
    SVD 1E
    ETIY 1
    ETIY 1E
    EXφA 1
    EXφA 1E
    EXφB 1
    EXφB 1E
    EXφZ 1
    EXφZ 1E
    SVD 2
    SVD 2E
    ETIY 2
    ETIY 2E
    EXφA 2
    EXφA 2E
    EXφB 2
    EXφB 2E
    EXφZ 2
    EXφZ 2E
    ITIY
    ITIYE
    EXφAIN
    EXφBIN
    EXφZEN
    EXφINGND

    EXT RADAR
    TB4401

    DISPLAY UNIT NCD4263T

    H-2695110006 RADAR SIGNAL

    1
    2
    3
    4
    5
    6
    7
    8
    9
    10
    11
    12
    13
    14
    15
    16
    17
    18
    19
    20
    21
    22
    23
    24
    25
    26

    ISW IN/OUT
    TB4201

    1
    2
    3

    U
    V
    W

    1
    2
    3

    TB304

    1
    2
    3
    4
    5
    6
    7
    8
    9
    10
    11
    12
    13
    14

    U
    V
    W

    POWER
    CBD-1661

    VD +
    VD TRIG +
    TRIG BP +
    BP BZ +
    BZ MTR +
    MTR MTRE
    (NC)
    +48V
    +48VG

    ANT
    TB4101 

    YEL
    GRN
    BRN

    RED
    BLU

    ORG
    WHT







    1

    (OPTION)

    AC220V/230V 3φ

    MAIN POWER

    0.6/1kV-TPYCY-6

    14-CORES COMPLEX CABLE
    H-2695110056 (JRC SUPPLY)

    HEATER POWER
    AC100V1φ

    0.6/1kV-DPYCYS-1.5

    14-CORES COMPLEX CABLE
    H-2695110056 (JRC SUPPLY)

    Fig.109 Terminal Board Connection Diagram of Radar, Type JMA-9923-7/9XA (desk top type AC 220V/230V 3f)
    RED
    BLU


    ORG
    WHT





    1



    1



    YEL
    GRN
    BRN
    ORG
    WHT

    +12V
    C2
    φZE
    φZ
    φA
    E
    φB
    +48V
    +48VG




    1

    WHT

    TB203
    ORG

    VD +
    VD TRIG +
    TRIG BP +
    BP -/BZ BZ +
    MTR +
    MTR MTRE

    TB201

    MU 1
    MV 1
    MW 1

    TB105  
    U
    V
    UTH

    TB103
    U1
    V1
    W1
    +12V
    C2
    φZE
    φZ
    φA
    E
    φB



    YEL
    GRN
    BRN

    BLU
    RED

    GRY

    U0
    V0
    W0
    U1
    V1
    W1

    TB202

    MPS
    MCT

    PTI
    PTE
    LVR
    PMS
    E
    TXI
    TXE

    TB204

    MPS
    MCT

    PTI
    PTE
    LVR
    PMS
    E
    TXI
    TXE

    TB104

    BLU
    RED
    BLK
    WHT

    YEL
    GRN
    BRN



    BLU
    RED

    GRY

    WHT

    BLU
    RED
    BLK

    TB104
    PTI
    PTE
    LVR
    PMS
    E
    TXI
    TXE

    PM UNIT
    NJU-64   

    TRANSMITTER-RECIVER
    UNIT
    NTG-3028

    SCANNER NKE-1089



  • Page 374

    GYRO

    LOG
    PULSE

    CONINING DISPLAY

    DLOG

    ECHO SOUNDER

    DGPS

    ALARM MONITORING
    SYSTEM

    To ECDIS

    250V-MPYCYS-7

    0.6/1kV-DPYCYS-1.5

    250V-TTYCS-4

    250V-TTYCS-1

    250V-TTYCS-1

    1
    2

    TB4501
    NAV1TX +
    NAV1TX NAV1RX +
    NAV1RX NAV2TX
    NAV2TX NAV2RX +
    NAV2RX LOGRX +
    LOGRX ALMTX +
    ALMTX ALMRX +
    ALMRX ARPATX +
    ARPATX JARPATX +
    JARPATX NSKTX +
    NSKTX NET -S
    TET -C

    LOG
    TB4801
    SFA +
    SFA SFS +
    SFS PULS 1+
    PULS 1PULS 2+
    PULS 2SYNC 1+
    SYNC 1SYNC 2+
    SYNC 2-

    1
    2
    3
    4
    5
    6
    7
    8
    9
    10
    11
    12
    13
    14
    15
    16
    17
    18
    19
    20
    21
    22

    1
    2
    3
    4
    5
    6
    7
    8
    9
    10
    11
    12

    0.6/1kV-DPYCYS-1.5

    250V-TTYCS-4
    ARPADATA

    250V-TTYCS-1

    VDIN 1
    VDIN 1E
    TRIGIN 1
    TRIGIN 1E
    BPIN 1
    BPIN 1E
    BZIN 1
    BZIN 1E
    MTRIN 1+
    MTRIN 1MTRIN 1E
    PWRIN 1+
    PWRIN 1E
    PWROUT 1
    PWROUT 1E
    VDOUT 1
    VDOUT 1E
    TRIGOUT 1
    TRIGOUT 1E
    BPOUT 1
    BPOUT 1E
    BZOUT 1
    BZOUT 1E
    MTROUT 1+
    MTROUT 1MTORUT 1E

    BLK

    WHT

    RED

    1
    2
    3
    4
    5
    6
    7
    8
    9
    10
    11
    12
    13
    14
    15
    16
    17
    18
    19
    20
    21
    22
    23
    24
    25
    26
    27
    28
    29
    30

    1
    2
    3
    4
    5
    1
    2
    3
    4
    5
    6

    1/R1
    2/S1
    3/S2
    /S3
    5/R2
    (NC)

    GYRO
    TB4701

    ALM/COM
    TB4601
    1
    ARPAALM +
    2
    ARPAALM 3
    SYSALM +
    4
    SYSALM 5
    PWRALM +
    6
    PWRALM 7
    ARPAACK +
    8
    ARPAACK 9
    SYSACK +
    10
    SYSACK 11
    PWRACK +
    12
    PWRACK 13
    EXEVT +
    14
    EXEVT 15
    COMCD
    16
    COMRX
    17
    COMTX
    18
    COMDTR
    19
    COMSG
    20
    COMDSR
    21
    COMRTS
    22
    COMRI

    RBVD
    RBVDE
    ETIY 3
    ETIY 3E
    SVD 1
    SVD 1E
    ETIY 1
    ETIY 1E
    EXφA 1
    EXφA 1E
    EXφB 1
    EXφB 1E
    EXφZ 1
    EXφZ 1E
    SVD 2
    SVD 2E
    ETIY 2
    ETIY 2E
    EXφA 2
    EXφA 2E
    EXφB 2
    EXφB 2E
    EXφZ 2
    EXφZ 2E
    ITIY
    ITIYE
    EXφAIN
    EXφBIN
    EXφZEN
    EXφINGND

    EXT RADAR
    TB4401

    DISPLAY UNIT NCD-4263T

    H-2695110006 RADAR SIGNAL

    1
    2
    3
    4
    5
    6
    7
    8
    9
    10
    11
    12
    13
    14
    15
    16
    17
    18
    19
    20
    21
    22
    23
    24
    25
    26

    ISW IN/OUT
    TB4201

    U
    V
    W

    1
    2
    3

    YEL
    GRN

    1
    2
    3
    4
    5
    6
    7
    8
    9
    10
    11
    12
    13
    14

    +
    -

    BATTERY
    TB  

    U
    V
    W

    POWER
    CBD-1661

    1
    2
    3

    TB304

    VD +
    VD TRIG +
    TRIG BP +
    BP BZ +
    BZ MTR +
    MTR MTRE
    (NC)
    +48V
    +48VG

    ANT
    TB4101 

    RED
    BLU

    ORG
    WHT







    1

    (OPTION)

    AC220V/230V 1φ
    AC100V/110V 1φ

    MAIN POWER

    0.6/1kV-TPYCY-6

    14-CORES COMPLEX CABLE
    H-2695110056 (JRC SUPPLY)

    HEATER POWER
    AC100V1φ

    0.6/1kV-DPYCYS-1.5

    14-CORES COMPLEX CABLE H2695110056 (JRC SUPPLY)

    Fig.110 Terminal Board Connection Diagram of Radar, Type JMA-9923-7/9XA (desk top type AC220V/230V 1f AC100V/110V 1f)
    RED
    BLU


    ORG
    WHT





    1



    1



    ORG
    WHT

    YEL
    GRN

    +12V
    C2
    φZE
    φZ
    φA
    E
    φB
    +48V
    +48VG




    1

    WHT

    TB203
    ORG

    VD +
    VD TRIG +
    TRIG BP +
    BP -/BZ BZ +
    MTR +
    MTR MTRE

    TB201

    1
    MCNT +
    MCNT M +24V 1
    M +24VG 1
    2

    TB105  
    U
    V
    UTH

    +12V
    C2
    φZE
    φZ
    φA
    E
    φB

    TB103
    U1
    V1

    YEL
    GRN

    PR
    BLK



    BLU
    RED

    GRY

    U0
    V0
    W0
    U1
    V1
    W1

    TB202

    MPS
    MCT

    PTI
    PTE
    LVR
    PMS
    E
    TXI
    TXE

    TB204

    MPS
    MCT

    PTI
    PTE
    LVR
    PMS
    E
    TXI
    TXE

    TB104

    BLU
    RED
    BLK
    WHT

    YEL
    GRN

    PR
    BLK



    BLU
    RED

    GRY

    WHT

    BLU
    RED
    BLK

    TB104
    PTI
    PTE
    LVR
    PMS
    E
    TXI
    TXE

    PM UNIT
    NJU-64   

    TRANSMITTER-RECIVER
    UNIT
    NTG-3028

    SCANNER NKE-1089



  • Page 375

    Fig.111 Terminal Board Connection Diagram of Radar, Type JMA-9922-6/9XA (self standing type AC 220V/230V 3f)

    GYRO

    LOG
    PULSE

    CONINING DISPLAY

    DLOG

    ECHO SOUNDER

    DGPS

    ALARM MONITORING
    SYSTEM

    To ECDIS

    250V-MPYCYS-7

    0.6/1kV-DPYCYS-1.5

    250V-TTYCS-4

    250V-TTYCS-1

    250V-TTYCS-1

    250V-TTYCS-1

    1
    2

    LOG
    TB4801
    SFA +
    SFA SFS +
    SFS PULS 1+
    PULS 1PULS 2+
    PULS 2SYNC 1+
    SYNC 1SYNC 2+
    SYNC 2-

    1
    2
    3
    4
    5
    6
    7
    8
    9
    10
    11
    12

    BLK

    WHT

    RED

    1
    2
    3
    4
    5
    6
    7
    8
    9
    10
    11
    12
    13
    14
    15
    16
    17
    18
    19
    20
    21
    22
    23
    24
    25
    26
    27
    28
    29
    30

    1
    2
    3
    4
    5
    1
    2
    3
    4
    5
    6

    1/R1
    2/S1
    3/S2
    /S3
    5/R2
    (NC)

    GYRO
    TB4701

    ALM/COM
    TB4601
    1
    ARPAALM +
    2
    ARPAALM 3
    SYSALM +
    4
    SYSALM 5
    PWRALM +
    6
    PWRALM 7
    ARPAACK +
    8
    ARPAACK 9
    SYSACK +
    10
    SYSACK 11
    PWRACK +
    12
    PWRACK 13
    EXEVT +
    14
    EXEVT 15
    COMCD
    16
    COMRX
    17
    COMTX
    18
    COMDTR
    19
    COMSG
    20
    COMDSR
    21
    COMRTS
    22
    COMRI

    RBVD
    RBVDE
    ETIY 3
    ETIY 3E
    SVD 1
    SVD 1E
    ETIY 1
    ETIY 1E
    EXφA 1
    EXφA 1E
    EXφB 1
    EXφB 1E
    EXφZ 1
    EXφZ 1E
    SVD 2
    SVD 2E
    ETIY 2
    ETIY 2E
    EXφA 2
    EXφA 2E
    EXφB 2
    EXφB 2E
    EXφZ 2
    EXφZ 2E
    ITIY
    ITIYE
    EXφAIN
    EXφBIN
    EXφZEN
    EXφINGND

    EXT RADAR
    TB4401

    DISPLAY UNIT NCD-4263

    TB4501
    NAV1TX +
    NAV1TX NAV1RX +
    NAV1RX NAV2TX
    NAV2TX NAV2RX +
    NAV2RX LOGRX +
    LOGRX ALMTX +
    ALMTX ALMRX +
    ALMRX ARPATX +
    ARPATX JARPATX +
    JARPATX NSKTX +
    NSKTX NET -S
    TET -C

    1
    2
    3
    4
    5
    6
    7
    8
    9
    10
    11
    12
    13
    14
    15
    16
    17
    18
    19
    20
    21
    22

    0.6/1kV-DPYCYS-1.5

    250V-TTYCS-4
    ARPADATA

    RADAR SIGNAL

    VDIN 1
    VDIN 1E
    TRIGIN 1
    TRIGIN 1E
    BPIN 1
    BPIN 1E
    BZIN 1
    BZIN 1E
    MTRIN 1+
    MTRIN 1MTRIN 1E
    PWRIN 1+
    PWRIN 1E
    PWROUT 1
    PWROUT 1E
    VDOUT 1
    VDOUT 1E
    TRIGOUT 1
    TRIGOUT 1E
    BPOUT 1
    BPOUT 1E
    BZOUT 1
    BZOUT 1E
    MTROUT 1+
    MTROUT 1MTORUT 1E

    H-2695110006

    1
    2
    3
    4
    5
    6
    7
    8
    9
    10
    11
    12
    13
    14
    15
    16
    17
    18
    19
    20
    21
    22
    23
    24
    25
    26

    ISW IN/OUT
    TB4201

    U
    V
    W

    TB301

    U
    V
    W

    TB302

    1
    2
    3

    1
    2
    3

    TB303
    U
    1
    V
    2
    (NC)
    3

    U
    V
    W

    1
    2
    3
    4
    5
    6
    7
    8
    9
    10
    11
    12
    13
    14

    U
    V
    W

    POWER
    CBD-1661

    YEL
    GRN
    BRN

    YEL
    GRN
    BRN

    VD +
    VD TRIG +
    TRIG BP +
    BP BZ +
    BZ MTR +
    MTR MTRE
    (NC)
    +48V
    +48VG

    ANT
    TB4101 

    YEL
    GRN
    BRN

    RED
    BLU

    ORG
    WHT







    1

    0.6/1kV-TPYCY-6

    YEL
    GRN
    BRN

    RED
    BLU

    1

    AC220V/230V 3φ

    MAIN POWER

    14-CORES COMPLEX CABLE
    H-2695110056
    (JRC SUPPLY)

    HEATER POWER
    AC100V1φ

    (OPTION)
    0.6/1kV-DPYCYS-1.5

    ORG
    WHT







    U1
    V1
    W1

    +48V
    +48VG

    TB102

    1
    2
    3
    4
    5
    6
    7
    8
    9
    10
    11

    BP +
    BP BZ +
    BZ TRIG +
    TRIG MTR +
    MTR MTRE
    VD +
    VD -

    TB101

    SCANNER
    NKE-1087

    1
    MCNT +
    MCNT M +24V 1
    M +24VG 1
    2

    U
    V
    UTH

    TB105  

    BLU
    RED
    BLK
    WHT

    BLK
    WHT

    BLU
    RED

    PM UNIT
    NJU-64

    1
    2
    3
    4
    5
    6
    7
    8

    J8
    PTI
    PTE
    LVR
    PMS
    E
    TXI
    TXE

    PTI
    PTE
    LVR
    PMS
    E
    TXI
    TXE

    TB104
    1
    2
    3
    4
    5
    6
    7



  • Page 376

    Fig.112 Terminal Board Connection Diagram of Radar, Type JMA-9922-6/9XA (self standing type AC220V/230V 1f AC100V/110V 1f)

    GYRO

    LOG
    PULSE

    CONINING DISPLAY

    DLOG

    ECHO SOUNDER

    DGPS

    ALARM MONITORING
    SYSTEM

    To ECDIS

    250V-MPYCYS-7

    0.6/1kV-DPYCYS-1.5

    250V-TTYCS-4

    250V-TTYCS-1

    250V-TTYCS-1

    1
    2

    LOG
    TB4801
    SFA +
    SFA SFS +
    SFS PULS 1+
    PULS 1PULS 2+
    PULS 2SYNC 1+
    SYNC 1SYNC 2+
    SYNC 2-

    1
    2
    3
    4
    5
    6
    7
    8
    9
    10
    11
    12

    BLK

    WHT

    RED

    1
    2
    3
    4
    5
    6
    7
    8
    9
    10
    11
    12
    13
    14
    15
    16
    17
    18
    19
    20
    21
    22
    23
    24
    25
    26
    27
    28
    29
    30

    1
    2
    3
    4
    5
    1
    2
    3
    4
    5
    6

    1/R1
    2/S1
    3/S2
    /S3
    5/R2
    (NC)

    GYRO
    TB4701

    ALM/COM
    TB4601
    1
    ARPAALM +
    2
    ARPAALM 3
    SYSALM +
    4
    SYSALM 5
    PWRALM +
    6
    PWRALM 7
    ARPAACK +
    8
    ARPAACK 9
    SYSACK +
    10
    SYSACK 11
    PWRACK +
    12
    PWRACK 13
    EXEVT +
    14
    EXEVT 15
    COMCD
    16
    COMRX
    17
    COMTX
    18
    COMDTR
    19
    COMSG
    20
    COMDSR
    21
    COMRTS
    22
    COMRI

    RBVD
    RBVDE
    ETIY 3
    ETIY 3E
    SVD 1
    SVD 1E
    ETIY 1
    ETIY 1E
    EXφA 1
    EXφA 1E
    EXφB 1
    EXφB 1E
    EXφZ 1
    EXφZ 1E
    SVD 2
    SVD 2E
    ETIY 2
    ETIY 2E
    EXφA 2
    EXφA 2E
    EXφB 2
    EXφB 2E
    EXφZ 2
    EXφZ 2E
    ITIY
    ITIYE
    EXφAIN
    EXφBIN
    EXφZEN
    EXφINGND

    EXT RADAR
    TB4401

    DISPLAY UNIT NCD-4263

    TB4501
    NAV1TX +
    NAV1TX NAV1RX +
    NAV1RX NAV2TX
    NAV2TX NAV2RX +
    NAV2RX LOGRX +
    LOGRX ALMTX +
    ALMTX ALMRX +
    ALMRX ARPATX +
    ARPATX JARPATX +
    JARPATX NSKTX +
    NSKTX NET -S
    TET -C

    1
    2
    3
    4
    5
    6
    7
    8
    9
    10
    11
    12
    13
    14
    15
    16
    17
    18
    19
    20
    21
    22

    0.6/1kV-DPYCYS-1.5

    250V-TTYCS-4
    ARPADATA

    250V-TTYCS-1

    VDIN 1
    VDIN 1E
    TRIGIN 1
    TRIGIN 1E
    BPIN 1
    BPIN 1E
    BZIN 1
    BZIN 1E
    MTRIN 1+
    MTRIN 1MTRIN 1E
    PWRIN 1+
    PWRIN 1E
    PWROUT 1
    PWROUT 1E
    VDOUT 1
    VDOUT 1E
    TRIGOUT 1
    TRIGOUT 1E
    BPOUT 1
    BPOUT 1E
    BZOUT 1
    BZOUT 1E
    MTROUT 1+
    MTROUT 1MTORUT 1E

    H-2695110006 RADAR SIGNAL

    1
    2
    3
    4
    5
    6
    7
    8
    9
    10
    11
    12
    13
    14
    15
    16
    17
    18
    19
    20
    21
    22
    23
    24
    25
    26

    ISW IN/OUT
    TB4201

    U
    V
    W

    TB301

    U
    V
    W

    TB302

    1
    2
    3

    1
    2
    3

    TB303
    U
    1
    V
    2
    (NC)
    3

    U
    V
    W

    1
    2
    3
    4
    5
    6
    7
    8
    9
    10
    11
    12
    13
    14

    U
    V
    W

    POWER
    CBD-1661

    YEL
    GRN
    BRN

    YEL
    GRN

    VD +
    VD TRIG +
    TRIG BP +
    BP BZ +
    BZ MTR +
    MTR MTRE
    (NC)
    +48V
    +48VG

    ANT
    TB4101 

    YEL
    GRN
    BRN

    RED
    BLU

    ORG
    WHT







    1

    0.6/1kV-TPYCY-6

    (JRC SUPPLY)

    YEL
    GRN

    RED
    BLU

    1

    AC220V/230V 1φ
    AC100V/110V 1φ

    MAIN POWER

    14-CORES COMPLEX CABLE
    H-2695110056

    (OPTION)
    0.6/1kV-DPYCYS-1.5
    HEATER POWER
    AC100V1φ

    ORG
    WHT






    BP +
    BP BZ +
    BZ TRIG +
    TRIG MTR +
    MTR MTRE
    VD +
    VD -

    U
    V

    +48V
    +48VG

    TB102

    1
    2
    3
    4
    5
    6
    7
    8
    9
    10
    11

    TB101

    1
    MCNT +
    MCNT M +24V 1
    M +24VG 1
    2

    U
    V
    UTH

    TB105  

    SCANNER
    NKE-1087

    BLU
    RED
    BLK
    WHT

    BLK
    WHT

    BLU
    RED

    PM UNIT
    NJU-64   

    1
    2
    3
    4
    5
    6
    7
    8

    J8
    PTI
    PTE
    LVR
    PMS
    E
    TXI
    TXE

    PTI
    PTE
    LVR
    PMS
    E
    TXI
    TXE

    TB104
    1
    2
    3
    4
    5
    6
    7



  • Page 377

    Fig.113 Terminal Board Connection Diagram of Radar, Type JMA-9922-6/9XA (desk top type AC220V/230V 3f)

    GYRO

    LOG
    PULSE

    CONINING DISPLAY

    DLOG

    ECHO SOUNDER

    DGPS

    ALARM MONITORING
    SYSTEM

    To ECDIS

    250V-MPYCYS-7

    0.6/1kV-DPYCYS-1.5

    250V-TTYCS-4

    250V-TTYCS-1

    250V-TTYCS-1

    1
    2

    LOG
    TB4801
    SFA +
    SFA SFS +
    SFS PULS 1+
    PULS 1PULS 2+
    PULS 2SYNC 1+
    SYNC 1SYNC 2+
    SYNC 2-

    1
    2
    3
    4
    5
    6
    7
    8
    9
    10
    11
    12

    BLK

    WHT

    RED

    1
    2
    3
    4
    5
    6
    7
    8
    9
    10
    11
    12
    13
    14
    15
    16
    17
    18
    19
    20
    21
    22
    23
    24
    25
    26
    27
    28
    29
    30

    1
    2
    3
    4
    5
    1
    2
    3
    4
    5
    6

    1/R1
    2/S1
    3/S2
    /S3
    5/R2
    (NC)

    GYRO
    TB4701

    ALM/COM
    TB4601
    1
    ARPAALM +
    2
    ARPAALM 3
    SYSALM +
    4
    SYSALM 5
    PWRALM +
    6
    PWRALM 7
    ARPAACK +
    8
    ARPAACK 9
    SYSACK +
    10
    SYSACK 11
    PWRACK +
    12
    PWRACK 13
    EXEVT +
    14
    EXEVT 15
    COMCD
    16
    COMRX
    17
    COMTX
    18
    COMDTR
    19
    COMSG
    20
    COMDSR
    21
    COMRTS
    22
    COMRI

    RBVD
    RBVDE
    ETIY 3
    ETIY 3E
    SVD 1
    SVD 1E
    ETIY 1
    ETIY 1E
    EXφA 1
    EXφA 1E
    EXφB 1
    EXφB 1E
    EXφZ 1
    EXφZ 1E
    SVD 2
    SVD 2E
    ETIY 2
    ETIY 2E
    EXφA 2
    EXφA 2E
    EXφB 2
    EXφB 2E
    EXφZ 2
    EXφZ 2E
    ITIY
    ITIYE
    EXφAIN
    EXφBIN
    EXφZEN
    EXφINGND

    EXT RADAR
    TB4401

    DISPLAY UNIT NCD-4263T

    TB4501
    NAV1TX +
    NAV1TX NAV1RX +
    NAV1RX NAV2TX
    NAV2TX NAV2RX +
    NAV2RX LOGRX +
    LOGRX ALMTX +
    ALMTX ALMRX +
    ALMRX ARPATX +
    ARPATX JARPATX +
    JARPATX NSKTX +
    NSKTX NET -S
    TET -C

    1
    2
    3
    4
    5
    6
    7
    8
    9
    10
    11
    12
    13
    14
    15
    16
    17
    18
    19
    20
    21
    22

    0.6/1kV-DPYCYS-1.5

    250V-TTYCS-4
    ARPADATA

    250V-TTYCS-1

    VDIN 1
    VDIN 1E
    TRIGIN 1
    TRIGIN 1E
    BPIN 1
    BPIN 1E
    BZIN 1
    BZIN 1E
    MTRIN 1+
    MTRIN 1MTRIN 1E
    PWRIN 1+
    PWRIN 1E
    PWROUT 1
    PWROUT 1E
    VDOUT 1
    VDOUT 1E
    TRIGOUT 1
    TRIGOUT 1E
    BPOUT 1
    BPOUT 1E
    BZOUT 1
    BZOUT 1E
    MTROUT 1+
    MTROUT 1MTORUT 1E

    H-2695110006 RADAR SIGNAL

    1
    2
    3
    4
    5
    6
    7
    8
    9
    10
    11
    12
    13
    14
    15
    16
    17
    18
    19
    20
    21
    22
    23
    24
    25
    26

    ISW IN/OUT
    TB4201

    VD +
    VD TRIG +
    TRIG BP +
    BP BZ +
    BZ MTR +
    MTR MTRE
    (NC)
    +48V
    +48VG

    U
    V
    W

    1
    2
    3

    U
    V
    W

    POWER
    CBD-1661

    1
    2
    3

    TB304

    1
    2
    3
    4
    5
    6
    7
    8
    9
    10
    11
    12
    13
    14

    ANT
    TB4101 

    YEL
    GRN
    BRN

    RED
    BLU

    (OPTION)
    0.6/1kV-DPYCYS-1.5

    AC220V/230V 3φ

    MAIN POWER

    0.6/1kV-TPYCY-6

    14-CORES COMPLEX CABLE
    H-2695110056 (JRC SUPPLY)

    HEATER POWER
    AC100V1φ



    ORG
    WHT

    YEL
    GRN
    BRN

    RED
    BLU

    1

    ORG
    WHT











    1

    BP +
    BP BZ +
    BZ TRIG +
    TRIG MTR +
    MTR MTRE
    VD +
    VD -

    U1
    V1
    W1

    +48V
    +48VG

    TB102

    1
    2
    3
    4
    5
    6
    7
    8
    9
    10
    11

    TB101

    1
    MCNT +
    MCNT M +24V 1
    M +24VG 1
    2

    U
    V
    UTH

    TB105  

    SCANNER
    NKE-1087

    BLU
    RED
    BLK
    WHT

    BLK
    WHT

    BLU
    RED

    PM UNIT
    NJU-64   

    1
    2
    3
    4
    5
    6
    7
    8

    J8
    PTI
    PTE
    LVR
    PMS
    E
    TXI
    TXE

    PTI
    PTE
    LVR
    PMS
    E
    TXI
    TXE

    TB104
    1
    2
    3
    4
    5
    6
    7



  • Page 378

    Fig.114 Terminal Board Connection Diagram of Radar, Type JMA-9922-6/9XA (desk top type AC220V/230V 1f AC100V/110V 1f)

    GYRO

    LOG
    PULSE

    CONINING DISPLAY

    DLOG

    ECHO SOUNDER

    DGPS

    ALARM MONITORING
    SYSTEM

    To ECDIS

    250V-MPYCYS-7

    0.6/1kV-DPYCYS-1.5

    250V-TTYCS-4

    250V-TTYCS-1

    250V-TTYCS-1

    1
    2

    LOG
    TB4801
    SFA +
    SFA SFS +
    SFS PULS 1+
    PULS 1PULS 2+
    PULS 2SYNC 1+
    SYNC 1SYNC 2+
    SYNC 2-

    1
    2
    3
    4
    5
    6
    7
    8
    9
    10
    11
    12

    BLK

    WHT

    RED

    1
    2
    3
    4
    5
    6
    7
    8
    9
    10
    11
    12
    13
    14
    15
    16
    17
    18
    19
    20
    21
    22
    23
    24
    25
    26
    27
    28
    29
    30

    1
    2
    3
    4
    5
    1
    2
    3
    4
    5
    6

    1/R1
    2/S1
    3/S2
    /S3
    5/R2
    (NC)

    GYRO
    TB4701

    ALM/COM
    TB4601
    1
    ARPAALM +
    2
    ARPAALM 3
    SYSALM +
    4
    SYSALM 5
    PWRALM +
    6
    PWRALM 7
    ARPAACK +
    8
    ARPAACK 9
    SYSACK +
    10
    SYSACK 11
    PWRACK +
    12
    PWRACK 13
    EXEVT +
    14
    EXEVT 15
    COMCD
    16
    COMRX
    17
    COMTX
    18
    COMDTR
    19
    COMSG
    20
    COMDSR
    21
    COMRTS
    22
    COMRI

    RBVD
    RBVDE
    ETIY 3
    ETIY 3E
    SVD 1
    SVD 1E
    ETIY 1
    ETIY 1E
    EXφA 1
    EXφA 1E
    EXφB 1
    EXφB 1E
    EXφZ 1
    EXφZ 1E
    SVD 2
    SVD 2E
    ETIY 2
    ETIY 2E
    EXφA 2
    EXφA 2E
    EXφB 2
    EXφB 2E
    EXφZ 2
    EXφZ 2E
    ITIY
    ITIYE
    EXφAIN
    EXφBIN
    EXφZEN
    EXφINGND

    EXT RADAR
    TB4401

    DISPLAY UNIT NCD-4263T

    TB4501
    NAV1TX +
    NAV1TX NAV1RX +
    NAV1RX NAV2TX
    NAV2TX NAV2RX +
    NAV2RX LOGRX +
    LOGRX ALMTX +
    ALMTX ALMRX +
    ALMRX ARPATX +
    ARPATX JARPATX +
    JARPATX NSKTX +
    NSKTX NET -S
    TET -C

    1
    2
    3
    4
    5
    6
    7
    8
    9
    10
    11
    12
    13
    14
    15
    16
    17
    18
    19
    20
    21
    22

    0.6/1kV-DPYCYS-1.5

    250V-TTYCS-4
    ARPADATA

    250V-TTYCS-1

    VDIN 1
    VDIN 1E
    TRIGIN 1
    TRIGIN 1E
    BPIN 1
    BPIN 1E
    BZIN 1
    BZIN 1E
    MTRIN 1+
    MTRIN 1MTRIN 1E
    PWRIN 1+
    PWRIN 1E
    PWROUT 1
    PWROUT 1E
    VDOUT 1
    VDOUT 1E
    TRIGOUT 1
    TRIGOUT 1E
    BPOUT 1
    BPOUT 1E
    BZOUT 1
    BZOUT 1E
    MTROUT 1+
    MTROUT 1MTORUT 1E

    H-2695110006 RADAR SIGNAL

    1
    2
    3
    4
    5
    6
    7
    8
    9
    10
    11
    12
    13
    14
    15
    16
    17
    18
    19
    20
    21
    22
    23
    24
    25
    26

    ISW IN/OUT
    TB4201
    VD +
    VD TRIG +
    TRIG BP +
    BP BZ +
    BZ MTR +
    MTR MTRE
    (NC)
    +48V
    +48VG

    U
    V
    W

    1
    2
    3

    U
    V
    W

    POWER
    CBD-1661

    1
    2
    3

    TB304

    1
    2
    3
    4
    5
    6
    7
    8
    9
    10
    11
    12
    13
    14

    ANT
    TB4101 

    YEL
    GRN

    RED
    BLU

    (OPTION)
    0.6/1kV-DPYCYS-1.5
    HEATER POWER
    AC100V1φ

    0.6/1kV-TPYCY-6
    MAIN POWER
    AC220V/230V 1φ
    AC100V/110V 1φ

    14-CORES COMPLEX CABLE
    H-2695110056 (JRC SUPPLY)



    ORG
    WHT

    YEL
    GRN

    RED
    BLU

    1

    ORG
    WHT











    1

    BP +
    BP BZ +
    BZ TRIG +
    TRIG MTR +
    MTR MTRE
    VD +
    VD -

    U
    V

    +48V
    +48VG

    TB102

    1
    2
    3
    4
    5
    6
    7
    8
    9
    10
    11

    TB101

    1
    MCNT +
    MCNT M +24V 1
    M +24VG 1
    2

    U
    V
    UTH

    TB105  

    SCANNER
    NKE-1087

    BLU
    RED
    BLK
    WHT

    BLK
    WHT

    BLU
    RED

    PM UNIT
    NJU-64

    1
    2
    3
    4
    5
    6
    7
    8

    J8
    PTI
    PTE
    LVR
    PMS
    E
    TXI
    TXE

    PTI
    PTE
    LVR
    PMS
    E
    TXI
    TXE

    TB104
    1
    2
    3
    4
    5
    6
    7



  • Page 379

    DISPLAY UNIT (NCD-4263)

    SCANNER (NKE-1079)
    B101

    TB701

    U

    J701
    J701

    PS(POWER On/Off)

    J3
    J3

    TB701

    V
    PB8

    TX/STBY

    , 220V_3

    CONTROL
    CIRCUIT

    P+12V

    PWRALM
    PSMON

    DC250V

    S701

    W1/TB102

    PB1 P+12V

    TRANSMITTER-RECEIVER UNIT (NTG-3037)
    U1/TB202
    V1/TB202
    W1/TB202

    J2

    P+12V

    U0/TB202
    V0/TB202
    W0/TB202

    J2

    100

    PB2 +48V

    200

    DC24V

    TB701

    +48V

    15V
    +12V
    +5V

    J2

    +48V
    TB203

    PB3 +5V

    +5V

    J1
    J2

    PB4 +3.3V

    +5V
    +3.3V

    PB5

    J1
    J2

    12V

    12V

    AC100/110V
    AC220/230V

    J1

    MONTOR
    NWZ-158

    U
    V

    KEBOARD UNIT

    TERMINAL BOARD CQD-1949

    TB4101

    PWRALM

    J4048

    P+12V

    J4303

    J4001

    +48V

    PWRALM

    TX/STBY

    PS

    P+12V

    +24V

    12V

    +3.3V

    +48V
    J4001

    INTERSWITCH CIRCUIT
    NQE-3141
    (OPTION)
    J4048

    J4016

    +5V

    +5V
    +3.3V

    +5V
    +3.3V
    12V

    J4007

    J3101

    12V

    +3.3V

    CQC-1094

    NSK/LOG IF CIRCUIT
    CMJ-462A

    NCE-7721

    CCK-901

    J207

    CN1

    MOTHER BOARD

    +3.3V

    J2

    +5V

    RADAR SIGNAL PROCESSIN
    CIRCUIT
    CDC-1029

    CPU CONTROL CIRCUIT CMC1218

    Fig.115 Primary Power Supply Block Diagram of Radar,
    Type JMA-9933-SA

    INSUPUTVOLTAGE
    SELECTION

    SFA SWITCHI

    J4

    +3.3V On/Off
    +5V On/Off

    250V CNT

    S1

    V1/TB102

    J3

    +24V

    +24V

    M

    U1/TB102

    POWER SUPLAY
    CBD-1682

    TB701

    NFB701

    U0
    V0
    W0

    RELAY CIRCUIT
    CSC-632

    U
    V
    W

    U TB701
    V TB701
    W TB701

    PB7

    PS
    P+12V
    +24V

    JAM-9933-SA:110V_1

    POWER UNIT (CBD-1661)



  • Page 380

    DISPLAY UNIT (NCD-4263)

    SCANNER (NKE-1075)
    B101

    U
    V
    W

    U TB701
    V TB701
    W TB701

    PB7

    NFB70
    1
    TB701
    TB701
    TB701

    V
    PB8

    TX/STBY

    , 220V_3

    CONTROL
    CIRCUIT

    PWRALM
    PSMON

    J3
    J3
    J3
    J4

    +24V

    +24V

    U0/TB102 S1
    V0/TB102
    SFA SWITCHI
    W0/TB102

    J701
    J701

    PS(POWER On/Off)

    P+12V

    J2

    +3.3V On/Off
    +5V On/Off

    250V CNT
    DC250V

    S701

    U

    U0
    V0
    W0

    RELAY CIRCUIT
    CSC-632

    JAM-9932-SA:110V_1

    POWER UNIT (CBD-1661)

    PB1 P+12V

    P+12V

    M

    U0
    V0
    W0

    U1
    V1
    W1

    J2

    15V

    100

    PB2 +48V

    200

    INSUPUTVOLTAGE
    SELECTION
    TB701

    PB3 +5V

    POWER SUPLAY
    CBD-1682

    J2

    +48V
    TB102

    +5V

    +12V
    +5V

    J1
    J2

    PB4 +3.3V

    +5V
    +3.3V

    PB5

    J1
    J2

    12V

    12V

    AC100/110V
    AC220/230V

    J1

    MONTOR
    NWZ-158

    U
    V

    KEBOARD UNIT

    TERMINAL BOARD CQD-1949

    TB4101

    PWRALM

    PS
    P+12V
    +24V

    J4048

    P+12V

    J4303

    J4001

    +48V

    PWRALM

    TX/STBY

    PS

    P+12V

    +24V

    12V

    +3.3V

    +48V
    J4001

    INTERSWITCH CIRCUIT
    NQE-3141
    (OPTION)
    J4048

    J4016

    +5V

    +5V
    +3.3V

    +5V
    +3.3V
    12V

    J4007

    J3101

    12V

    +3.3V

    CQC-1094

    NSK/LOG IF CIRCUIT
    CMJ-462A

    NCE-7721

    CCK-901

    J207

    CN1

    MOTHER BOARD

    +3.3V

    J2

    +5V

    RADAR SIGNAL PROCESSIN
    CIRCUIT
    CDC-1029

    CPU CONTROL CIRCUIT CMC1218

    Fig.116 Primary Power Supply Block Diagram of Radar,
    Type JMA-9932-SA

    DC24V

    +48V



  • Page 381

    DISPLAY UNIT (NCD-4263)

    SCANNER (NKE-1089)

    TB701

    V
    PB8

    TX/STBY

    CONTROL
    CIRCUIT

    PWRALM
    PSMON

    W1/TB102

    TRANSMITTER-RECEIVER UNIT (NTG-3028)

    J4

    U1/TB202
    V1/TB202
    W1/TB202

    J2

    +3.3V On/Off
    +5V On/Off

    250V CNT
    DC250V

    PB1 P+12V

    P+12V

    U0/TB202
    V0/TB202
    W0/TB202

    J2

    100

    PB2 +48V

    200

    TB701

    +48V

    15V
    +12V
    +5V

    J2

    +48V
    TB203

    PB3 +5V

    +5V

    J1
    J2

    PB4 +3.3V

    +5V
    +3.3V

    PB5

    J1
    J2

    12V

    12V

    AC100/110V
    AC220/230V

    J1

    MONTOR
    NWZ-158

    U
    V

    KEBOARD UNIT

    TERMINAL BOARD CQD-1949

    PWRALM

    PS
    P+12V
    +24V

    TB4101

    J4048

    P+12V

    J4303

    J4001

    +48V

    PWRALM

    TX/STBY

    PS

    P+12V

    +24V

    12V

    +3.3V

    +48V
    J4001

    INTERSWITCH CIRCUIT
    NQE-3141
    (OPTION)
    J4048

    J4016

    +5V

    +5V
    +3.3V

    +5V
    +3.3V
    12V

    J4007

    J3101

    12V

    +3.3V

    CQC-1094

    NSK/LOG IF CIRCUIT
    CMJ-462A

    NCE-7721

    CCK-901

    J207

    CN1

    MOTHER BOARD

    +3.3V

    J2

    +5V

    CPU CONTROL CIRCUIT CMC1218

    Fig.117 Primary Power Supply Block Diagram of Radar,
    Type JMA-9923-7XA/9XA

    DC24V

    INSUPUTVOLTAG
    E
    SELECTION

    SFA SWITCHI

    J3
    J3
    J3

    +24V

    +24V

    S1

    V1/TB102

    J701
    J701

    PS(POWER On/Off)

    P+12V

    S701

    U

    M

    U1/TB102

    POWER SUPLAY
    CBD-1645

    TB701

    U0
    V0
    W0

    RELAY CIRCUIT
    CSC-632

    U
    V
    W

    U TB701
    V TB701
    W TB701

    PB7

    NFB70
    1
    TB701

    RADAR SIGNAL PROCESSIN
    CIRCUIT
    CDC-1029

    JAM-9923-7XA:100V/110V_1 , 220V/230V_1 , 220V/230V_3

    JAM-9923-9XA: 220V/230V_3

    B101

    POWER UNIT (CBD-1661)



  • Page 382

    SCANNER (NKE-1087)
    B101

    U
    V
    W

    U TB701
    V TB701
    W TB701

    PB7

    NFB70
    1
    TB701
    TB701

    U

    J701
    J701

    PS(POWER On/Off)

    J3
    J3

    TB701

    V
    PB8

    TX/STBY

    CONTROL
    CIRCUIT

    P+12V

    PWRALM
    PSMON

    J4
    J2

    +3.3V On/Off
    +5V On/Off

    250V CNT
    DC250V

    S701

    U0/TB102 S1
    SFA SWITCHI
    V0/TB102
    W0/TB102

    J3

    +24V

    +24V

    U0
    V0
    W0

    RELAY CIRCUIT
    CSC-632

    POWER UNIT (CBD-1661)

    PB1 P+12V

    P+12V

    M

    U0
    V0
    W0

    U1
    V1
    W1

    J2

    15V

    100

    PB2 +48V

    200

    TB701

    +48V

    PB3 +5V

    POWER SUPLAY
    CBD-1645

    J2

    +48V
    TB102

    +5V

    +12V
    +5V

    J1
    J2

    PB4 +3.3V

    +5V
    +3.3V

    PB5

    J1
    J2

    12V

    12V

    AC100/110V
    AC220/230V

    J1

    MONTOR
    NWZ-158

    U
    V

    KEBOARD UNIT

    TERMINAL BOARD CQD-1949

    TB4101

    PWRALM

    PS
    P+12V
    +24V

    J4048

    P+12V

    INTERSWITCH CIRCUIT
    NQE-3141
    (OPTION)
    J4303

    J4001

    +48V

    PWRALM

    TX/STBY

    PS

    P+12V

    +24V

    12V

    +3.3V

    +48V
    J4001

    J4048

    J4016

    +5V

    +5V
    +3.3V

    +5V
    +3.3V
    12V

    J4007

    J3101

    12V

    +3.3V

    CQC-1094

    NSK/LOG IF CIRCUIT
    CMJ-462A

    NCE-7721

    CCK-901

    J207

    CN1

    MOTHER BOARD

    +3.3V

    J2

    +5V

    CPU CONTROL CIRCUIT CMC1218

    Fig.118 Primary Power Supply Block Diagram of Radar,
    Type JMA-9922-6XA/9XA

    DC24V

    INSUPUTVOLTAG
    E
    SELECTION

    RADAR SIGNAL PROCESSIN
    CIRCUIT
    CDC-1029

    JAM-9922-6XA:100V/110V_1 , 220V/230V_1 , 220V/230V_3

    JAM-9922-9XA: 220V/230V_3

    DISPLAY UNIT (NCD-4263)



  • Page 383

    Fig.119 Internal Connection Diagram of Scanner Unit,
    Type NKE-1079



  • Page 384

    Fig.120 Internal Connection Diagram of Scanner Unit,
    Type NKE-1079-D



  • Page 385

    Fig.121 Internal Connection Diagram of Scanner Unit,
    Type NKE-1075/1075A (100V AC,1-phase)



  • Page 386

    Fig.122 Internal Connection Diagram of Scanner Unit, Type
    NKE-1075/1075A (230V AC,3-phase)



  • Page 387

    Fig.123 Internal Connection Diagram of Scanner Unit, Type
    NKE-1075/1075A (230V AC,1-phase)



  • Page 388

    Fig.124 Internal Connection Diagram of Scanner Unit,
    Type NKE-1089-7/9 (1-phase)



  • Page 389

    Fig.125 Internal Connection Diagram of Scanner Unit,
    Type NKE-1089-7/9 (3-phase)



  • Page 390

    Fig.126 Internal Connection Diagram of Scanner Unit,
    Type NKE-1087-6/9 (1-phase)



  • Page 391

    Fig.127 Internal Connection Diagram of Scanner Unit,
    Type NKE-1087-6/9 (3-phase)



  • Page 392

    Fig.128 Internal Connection Diagram of
    Transmitter-receiver Unit, Type NTG-3037/3037A



  • Page 393

    Fig.129 Internal Connection Diagram of
    Transmitter-receiver Unit, Type NTG-3028



  • Page 394

    Fig.130 Internal Connection Diagram of Display Unit,
    Type NCD-4263



  • Page 395

    Fig.131 Internal Connection Diagram of CRT Monitor of Display Unit,
    Type NCD-4263



  • Page 396

    SCANNER
    MOTOR
    POWER
    AC100/230V
    1φ/1φ,3φ

    MONITOR
    AC100/230V


    AC100/230V
    1φ/1φ,3φ

    Fig.132 Block Diagram of Radar,
    Type JMA-9933-SA and JMA-9923-7XA/9XA

    SCANNER
    MOTOR POWER

    MONITOR
    POWER

    VOLTAGE SELCT
    CIRCUIT

    BLEAKER

    LINE FILTER

    HI VOLTAGE SAVE CIRCUIT

    POWER CONTROL
    CIRCUIT

    HI VOLTAGE SELCT
    CIRCUIT

    1A

    -12V

    FAN ALM POWER CONTROL

    2A

    MAX 10A
    (8A)

    +12V

    +3.3V

    MAX15A
    (10A)

    3.5A

    +48V±3V

    +5.0V

    3.5A

    P+12V

    0.7A

    1.37A

    RADAR SIGNAL PROCCESSIN = MAX 4.7A
    NSK UNIT = MAX 1.0A

    RADAR SIGNAL PROCCESSIN = MAX 9.3A
    CPU CONTROL CIRCUT = MAX 5.4A

    SCANNER
    X BAND_2.5A, S BAND_3.0A

    INTERSWITCH=1A
    KEBOAD UNIT=2.5A



  • Page 397

    Fig.133 List of NSK and LOG Select Switches of Display
    Unit, Type NCD-4263



  • Page 398

    Fig.134 Setting Table of Speed LOG Select Switches of
    Display Unit, Type NCD-4263



  • Page 399

    Fig.135 Setting Table of Gyro Compass and Gyro Select Switches
    ofDisplay Unit, Type NCD-4263



  • Page 400

    Fig.136 Terminal Board Connection Diagram of 2-unit Interswitchse System, Type•@NQE-3141-2



  • Page 401



  • Page 402

    Fig.138(1) Internal Connection Diagram of Interswitch, Type NQE-3141-2



  • Page 403

    Fig.138(2) Internal Connection Diagram of Interswitch, Type NQE-3141-4



  • Page 404

    HEAD OFFICE &
    SALES DEPT.

    MAIN PLANT

    Akasaka Twin Tower (Main),
    17-22, Akasaka 2-chome, Minato-ku,
    Tokyo 107-8432 JAPAN
    Phone : +81-3-3584-8711
    Fax
    : +81-3-3584-8715
    Telex
    : 0242-5420 JRCTOK J
    1-1, Shimorenjaku 5-chome, Mitaka-shi,
    Tokyo 181-8510 JAPAN
    Phone : +81-422-45-9111
    Fax
    : +81-422-45-9110
    Telex
    : 02822-351 JRCMTK J

    CODE No. 7ZPRD0572






Missbrauch melden von Frage und/oder Antwort

Libble nimmt den Missbrauch seiner Dienste sehr ernst. Wir setzen uns dafür ein, derartige Missbrauchsfälle gemäß den Gesetzen Ihres Heimatlandes zu behandeln. Wenn Sie eine Meldung übermitteln, überprüfen wir Ihre Informationen und ergreifen entsprechende Maßnahmen. Wir melden uns nur dann wieder bei Ihnen, wenn wir weitere Einzelheiten wissen müssen oder weitere Informationen für Sie haben.

Art des Missbrauchs:

Zum Beispiel antisemitische Inhalte, rassistische Inhalte oder Material, das zu einer Gewalttat führen könnte.

Beispielsweise eine Kreditkartennummer, persönliche Identifikationsnummer oder unveröffentlichte Privatadresse. Beachten Sie, dass E-Mail-Adressen und der vollständige Name nicht als private Informationen angesehen werden.

Forenregeln

Um zu sinnvolle Fragen zu kommen halten Sie sich bitte an folgende Spielregeln:

Neu registrieren

Registrieren auf E - Mails für JRC JMA9922_6XA wenn:


Sie erhalten eine E-Mail, um sich für eine oder beide Optionen anzumelden.


Holen Sie sich Ihr Benutzerhandbuch per E-Mail

Geben Sie Ihre E-Mail-Adresse ein, um das Handbuch zu erhalten von JRC JMA9922_6XA in der Sprache / Sprachen: Englisch als Anhang in Ihrer E-Mail.

Das Handbuch ist 7,69 mb groß.

 

Sie erhalten das Handbuch in Ihrer E-Mail innerhalb von Minuten. Wenn Sie keine E-Mail erhalten haben, haben Sie wahrscheinlich die falsche E-Mail-Adresse eingegeben oder Ihre Mailbox ist zu voll. Darüber hinaus kann es sein, dass Ihr ISP eine maximale Größe für E-Mails empfangen kann.

Das Handbuch wird per E-Mail gesendet. Überprüfen Sie ihre E-Mail.

Wenn Sie innerhalb von 15 Minuten keine E-Mail mit dem Handbuch erhalten haben, kann es sein, dass Sie eine falsche E-Mail-Adresse eingegeben haben oder dass Ihr ISP eine maximale Größe eingestellt hat, um E-Mails zu erhalten, die kleiner als die Größe des Handbuchs sind.

Ihre Frage wurde zu diesem Forum hinzugefügt

Möchten Sie eine E-Mail erhalten, wenn neue Antworten und Fragen veröffentlicht werden? Geben Sie bitte Ihre Email-Adresse ein.



Info